Computer Insights Inc - The Best Software For Tracking Your Fasteners
Computer Insights, Inc
108 South Third Street
Bloomingdale, IL 60108

(800) 539-1233

May 2017-December 2017

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Fields- Alternate Product Code and Alternate Description added to Open Documents Optional Grid in the Order Detail line.
  2. New Fields- Optional comment fields have been added to the Enter & Edit Orders – Detail Line screen.

  3. New System Flag-There is a new system flag called Point to Check For Customer PO. This flag gives you the option to check for a customer purchase order at Order Entry-First Screen, Order Entry-Last Screen, Allocate Inventory or Invoice Creation. It is located in Utilities, System Administrator System, System Set Up, Miscellaneous Setup, Enter & Edit Entity Flags, Order Entry Flags page 6 of 7.
  4. New User Flag-There is a new User flag Show Cust PO in Recent Order List. If this flag is set to Yes, the customer purchase order will show in the most recently selected list.
  5. New Report- New inquiry that looks at changes history for all orders at once is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Order Analysis Reports, Full Order Change History.

  6. New Optional Information Grid-The Enter & Edit Sales Order and Order Inquiry screens now have an optional information grid that shows the “Document Output History”

  7. New Optional Information Grid-An Optional Information Grid showing all payments related to all of an order’s revisions is now available in E&E Orders and Order Inquiry screens.

  8. New Optional Information Grid-The Enter & Edit Sales Order Schedule Information now has grids about who and when a sales order’s schedule was entered and when the date was modified.

  9. New System Flag-The flag for the editable fields in the Enter & Edit Order final screen has been replaced with a general flag that will apply to all Enter & Edit Final screens as they become enabled with that feature. The flag has been moved to a different screen and is now located in Utilities, System Administrator System, System Set Up, Miscellaneous Setup, Enter & Edit Entity Flags, General Flags. When this flag is set to yes, you will be able to edit the fields shown below:

  10. New Fields Added to Report: New fields added to the Open Orders by Order Number Report include: Lines Packed, Allocated, Packing List Printed, Delivery Lot, Tracking Number. This report is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Open Order Reports, Open Orders by Order Number
  11. New Optional Information Grid-Order-In Enter & Edit Orders, Detail Line Shipment Schedule will now keep track of the original ship date entered. Existing schedules will be left blank

  12. New Fields Added to Report-The Order Type has been added as an additional column to the Order Booking Activity Report grid. The Order Booking Activity Report is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports,Order Booking Reports, Order Booking Activity Report
  13. New Optional Column-There are now Optional Columns in Order Detail grid in Enter & Edit Orders and Order Inquiry now includes Reorder Point, Max Qty to Stock, Stocking Objective, Max Stocking Objective and Stocking Unit of Measure
  14. New Optional Column-There are now Optional Columns in Order Detail grid in Enter & Edit Orders includes Available to Produce. This column looks at the first level Bill Of Material for the product and calculates how many can be produced. There is a new user flag Show Avail to Produce Column in Orders” in Enter & Edit User Flags – Order Entry that will allow you to see this column.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Optional Information Grids- There are now Optional Information Grids for Branch Stocking Values, Open Documents, Recent Product Lost Sales, Recent Product Receipts, Recent Product Sales, Alternates, Substitutes, Kits and Vendor Contract Pricing added to the Enter & Edit RFQ Detail Line screen.

  2. New Optional Information Grid-In Enter & Edit Purchase Orders and in Purchase Order Inquiry there is now an optional information grid for Document Output History

  3. New System Flag-There is a new system flag that will allow for a discount percent to affect a P.O. detail line’s landed cost. This flag is located in Utilities, System Administrator System, System Set Up, Miscellaneous Setup, Enter & Edit Entity Flags, Purchase Orders Flags, Page 4 of 4, Allow Vendor P.O. Discounts. A vendor can have a Default P.O. Discount

    This will be used when creating new P.O.’s for the vendor. The P.O.’s P.O. Discount defaults to the vendor’s default but can be overridden for the P.O. without changing the vendor’s default

    New detail lines will default to the P.O. Discount but can be overridden with the P.O. Detail Discount field.

    If line items exist you will be asked if you want to change their values when changing the P.O. Discount

  4. New Optional Information Grid-In Enter & Edit Purchase Order Detail Lines there are now Optional Grids that include Alternates, Substitute, Kits.

  5. New Fields added to report-The Receipts Journal by Product now shows Optional Label Comments column. The Receipts Journal by Product is located in Purchase Order System, Purchase Order Reports, PO Receipts Journals, Receipts Journal by Product
  6. New Optional Information Grid-There is now a Optional Information Grid called Recent Product RFQ’s added to Product Inquiry and Enter & Edit PO screens, Enter & Edit Order – Detail Line and Enter & Edit RFQ – Detail Line.

  7. New Fields added to report-There are new fields added to the Receipts Journal by Vendor grid: Vendor Code, Vendor Name, Cost UOM (per), Extension. The Receipts Journal by Vendor is located in Purchase Order System, Purchase Order Reports, PO Receipts Journals, Receipts Journal by Vendor

Processing Purchase Orders

  1. New Optional Column-There is now an Optional columns have been added the the Enter & Edit PPO Detail Lines grid: Include in VMI Mobile and VMI Mobile Barcode.

    Supply Chain Network

    1. New Feature- Now you have the ability to associate products with XL Screw parts in the XL Screw inquiries.

    2. New Optional Information Grid- When entering a PO detail line for XL Screw there is now an optional information grid that will show the response of the web call to the XL Screw site. This is currently for informational use only, the system will have to map UOM’s before the response from XL Screw will be able to affect data.

    3. New Feature-Purchase Orders submitted electronically will now show up as outbound history. The upgrade program will create records for Purchase Orders that have already been submitted. Reminder: FSCN stands for Fastener Supply Chain Network.

    Inventory

    1. New Report: There is a new inquiry added called Product Substitute Inquiry which is located in Inventory System, Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists, Product Substitute Inquiry
    2. New Fields Added to Report: There are now Optional columns that have been added to the Detail Inventory List grid for Tariff and Tariff Description. The Detail Inventory List is located here: Inventory System, Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists, Detail Inventory List
    3. New Option in Product Inquiry: In a product inquiry there is an option to see Volume. This is controlled by a flag located below. If you say Yes to Use Volume the Product Inquiry won’t show the Theoretical Count. The flag is located in Utilities, System Administrator System, System Set Up, Miscellaneous Setup, Enter & Edit Entity Flags, Inventory Flags, Page 4 of 4, Use Theoretical Volume

    4. New Fields Added to Report: The Dead Inventory Report grid will now show the product classification code and product classification description as optional columns. The Dead Inventory report is located in Inventory System, Inventory File Maintenance, Dead Inventory System, Dead Inventory Reports, Dead Inventory Report.
    5. New Field added to Optional Information Grid-Branch and Branch Name have been added as optional columns in Product Inquiry screens in the Recent Product Receipts optional information grid

    Accounts Receivable

    1. New Fields added to report- The following fields have been added to the report List Contacts by Customer- Entered by and Entered Date. This report is located in Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Lists & Labels, List Contacts by Customer.
    2. New Feature- When entering orders only customers assigned as Customer as their type will show up in lookup lists if the order type is a Firm Order. Orders that are entered with an order type of Quote will include prospects and leads in the lookup lists. When an order type is being changed from a Quote to Firm Order and the customer on the order is not set as a type Customer the system will now ask if you would like to change the customer’s type to Customer. In some cases you may want to send samples to a prospect using Enter & Edit Orders while not wanting to change their type from Prospect.

    3. New Feature-Now, you can view scanned images in invoice inquiry and create invoice screen.

    4. New Feature-Shippers can now be marked as inactive so they won’t show up as options in the selection grids. Existing documents with inactive shippers will continue to show the shippers that was assigned to them.

    5. New Report-New report located in Accounts Receivable, Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, Sales Summary Inquiry. This report will allow you to summarize sales by Ship to City, Ship to State, Ship to Zip Code, Bill to City, Bill to State, Bill to Zip Code, Payment Terms, Customer Classification or Sales Person. If you answer “NO’ to summarize customers or products the sales will be broken out accordingly.

    6. New Optional Fields-Optional columns have been added to all of the Customer Address Grids that show: Tax – Service, Tax – Custom, and Tax – Other. Example: Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Miscellaneous A/R Reports, List Customer Addresses

    7. New Option on Report: The Sales Summary Inquiry now has an option to summarize by Customer Group. The Sales Summary is located in: Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, Sales Summary Inquiry

    8. New Optional Field: The Customer’s default FOB is now available as an Optional Field on the Customer Inquiry screen when the system flag has been set to use default customer FOB’s

    9. New Feature-Now on the Accounts Receivable aging report you can see percentage of dollar amount if you hover your mouse over the graph. The report is located here: Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Aged Analysis Reports, Aging by Customer

    10. New Feature-You can now change your Note Category Filters from the Enter & Edit Notes screen

    11. New Feature-In Send Customer Statements the default for Review List before Sending? is now Yes
    12. New Report-New inquiry breaks out invoice miscellaneous charges in a grid by invoice date range. This new inquiry is located in Accounts Receivable, Accounts Receivable Reports, Invoice History, Misc. Charge Detail Sales Inquiry

    13. New Feature-Note Categories, you can now create categories for notes and choose which notes are visible to you in your user flags. You can set up a Note Category in Accounts Receivable System, CRM System, CRM File Maintenance, Enter & Edit Note Categories

    14. New Report-New sales summary inquiry based on lot comments, Lot Comment Sales Summary Inquiry located in Accounts Receivable, Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, Invoice History, Lot Comment Sales Summary Inquiry
    15. New Fields Added to Report-The Salesperson code and name have been added as optional columns to the Customer Payments Report. The Customer Payments report is located in Accounts Receivable, Accounts Receivable Reports, Cash Receipt Reports, Customer Payment Reports.
    16. New Fields Added to Report-New customer Group and Group Name optional columns have been added to the List Contacts by Customer grid.The List Contacts by Customer report is located in Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Lists & Labels, List Contacts by Customer
    17. New Feature-The Update Deposit will now return to the grid of deposits if more are available to update instead of closing the tab.
    18. New Fields Added to Report-The Sales Summary Inquiry grid will now show the Total Cost, Total Sales, Number of Customers and Number of Products in the north region. New optional columns have been added for Profit, Profit %, Invoices, Customers and Products. The Sales Summary report is located in Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, Sales Summary Inquiry. You also can now drill into row in the Sales Summary Inquiry grid to see the detail that the summary information came from.
    19. New Fields Added to Report-There are now Optional columns for Last Vendor and Last Vendor Name added to the Customer Inquiry’s Detail Sales History grid

    General Ledger

    1. New Fields Added to Report-There are now Optional columns for Value, Balance, Posted By and Time added to the G.L. Transaction Inquiry grid. The Account Transaction Report is located in General Ledger System, Account Transaction Report

    Graphical Interface

    1. New Feature-Contact Computer Insights will no longer send you to a web page. It is now a standard grid of information. Chat with Customer Support” coming soon.

    Sales Analysis

    1. New Field Added to Report-The following field has been added to the Salesperson Sales by Customer Report include Customer Group. This report is located in Sales Analysis System, Salesperson Sales Analysis, Salesperson Sales by Customer
    2. New Report-New Customer YTD Comparative Summary summarizes customer invoice sales by date range and customer range.The Customer YTD Comparative Summary report is located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis, More, Customer YTD Comparative Report
    3. New Report-A new report has been added to view customer sales by year, “Customer Sales by Year” located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales by Year

    4. New Option on Report-The final page of the Customer YTD Comparative Report now shows totals for each month as well as a final total for the entire report. The Customer YTD Comparative Report is located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis, More, Customer YTD Comparative Report.
    5. New Field Added to Report-New optional cost columns added to Product Sales & Profit grid. The Product Sales & Profit report is located in Sales Analysis System, Product Sales Analysis, Product Sales & Profit

    6. New Field Added to Optional Column-New optional column for All Sales has been added to the Customer and Salesperson’s Monthly and Annual summary grids. All Sales and % of All columns will only be available to users that have security access to the Sales Analysis System.

    Utilities

    1. New Report Feature- The Export Slsm/Cust/Product Report can now be sent to grid so it can be exported to Excel. This report is located in Utilities, Export File Data, Export A/R Information, Export Sales, Export Slsm/Cust/Product Report
    2. New Feature-We try to avoid it when we can but there are times when new releases will require workstation applications to be upgraded. The 2018 release is one of those times. Some of the new features in this workstation upgrade include: Upgrade Chromium browser core from 47 (2016) to 64 (2018), Improved performance and stability, Better window handling and memory management, Support for HTTPS/SSL communication, Support for secureIDs, Mitigations for Spectre Attacks

    VMI Mobile

    1. New Feature-If VMI Mobile is being used with a normal user (not a “web user”) the Product Inquiry option will be included in the side menu when an active internet connection is detected.

    User Flags

    1. New User Flags- Printer Flags now include PO Receiving, PPO Picking, PPO Packing, PPO Receiving, PPO traveler, Transfer Pick, and Transfer Pack


Release Notes January – May 2017

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Field- Enter & Edit Order Detail Lines users can now choose to see Customer’s last sale information which can include Date, Quantity, Price, Extension and the percentage change.

  2. New Field- Purchase Order / PPO column added to the Shipping Schedule by Date report located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Scheduling & Expediting Reports, Shipping Schedule by Date.
  3. New Flag- Orders-Warn if no sell? If a detail line is allocated for zero unit price a flag will warn you. This will only affect non-tracked items and will only run the test if the system flag, “Orders-Warn if no sell?” is set to Yes. This flag is in Entity & System Flags, Order Entry.
  4. New Field- Line Comment and Internal Comment added to the Orders in Excess of Stock report located in Order & Quote Entry, Order Reports, Order Requirements Reports, Orders in Excess of Stock.
  5. New Field- Internal reference, Job number, FOB, Counter sale, Customer group Code, Customer group description and Function added to the shipping schedule-show documents report located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Scheduling & Expediting Reports, Shipping Schedule – Show Documents.
  6. New Field- Over ship, Allow back order, Cust PO Line number and when track ROHS compliance is set to Yes: require ROHS added to Enter & Edit Orders, detail lines.
  7. New System Flag- Counter Sales flag added that will show the “Contact Name” field in Enter & Edit Counter Sales based on the system flag “Show Order Contact on Main Screen?” located in Entity & System Flags, Order Entry.
  8. New Option- In Enter & Edit Counter sales. Now, there is a button called “Customer Contacts” in the “Options” accordion that will bring you to Enter & Edit Contacts. You can also get to Enter & Edit Contacts by clicking on the ( + ) button on the optional information grid for Customer Contacts.
  9. New System Flag- In the Graphical Interface “Password to Override Edit Price Security”. If a password is not entered they cannot override the security and will only see an Access Denied message. This flag is in Entity & System Flags, Order Entry.

  10. New Option- When entering a Brighton Best Purchase Order from within Enter & Edit Orders you will now be prompted to select a package group & type.
  11. New Field added to report- The following fields have been added to the Back Order by Product report- salesperson code and name. This report is in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Sales Order Back Order Reports, Back Orders by Product.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – Users will now get a warning message if they select a Purchase Order in Enter & Edit PO’s that has already been confirmed. PO’s are marked as confirmed on the Final Screen of Enter & Edit PO’s or through the Open PO’s not Confirmed List.
  2. New System Flag-Quick Receive P.O. & Post Accrued? When this flag is set to “Yes” the “Quick Receive P.O. & Post Accrued” menu item will be included in the “Actions” toolbar menu. This flag is in Entity & System Flags, Purchase Orders Page 4 of 4.

  3. New Feature- The Purchase Order Inquiry detail line screen will show information related to BBI, Kanebridge or XL Screw if the Purchase Order was entered as an electronic Purchase Order. The Purchase Orders entered as standard Purchase Orders will continue to show costs the way they have in previous releases.

  4. Kanebridge PO
  5. Standard PO
  6. New Option- in Brighton Best Purchase Orders you now have the option to change all detail lines to one warehouse. This is in the detail lines of a Brighton Best Purchase Order.

  7. New Option- in Brighton Best Purchase Orders you now have the ability to override Brighton Best Pricing, but still submit the Purchase Order electronically. This is located on the final screen of a Brighton Best Purchase Order

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Field- Entered by, Entered date and Entered time added to the PPO Component Expediting Report located Processing P.O. System, Processing P.O. Reports, PPO Component Expediting Report

Inventory

  1. New Fields- Available Quantities and Line Comment fields are now available on the Enter/Edit Transfer Detail line.
  2. New User Flag – Show Stocking Info in Selection Grid – This new flag will allow Users to add stocking information columns to the product selection grid.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Fields- Extra Description and Line Comment columns added to Customer Inquiry, Most Recent Sales.

  2. New Report- “Who Does Not Buy What” This new Inquiry enables a User to Enter a Product Code and see what Customers are not buying that item. It is located in Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Activity Reports, Who Does Not Buy What.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Feature-In Process Checks by Date you now have the option to update without printing the checks. This would be used when paying vendors via ACH

General Ledger

  1. New Feature- Income statement dates are now available. If you enter * as first beginning date of the Income Statement the periods will be set to Jan 1, of current and previous year and the last day of last month for the current and previous year. Example: today is Aug 10, 2016 an * entry will set the periods to be:

  2. New Feature-The executive summary can now be viewed in an exportable grid located in General Ledger System, General Ledger Reports, Executive Summary Grid.

  3. New Feature-There is a new button on the Executive Summary screen that will show the invoices and values that the numbers in the “Customer Invoices” field set come from.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Fields- Customer Group Code, Group Name, Department, Master Customer for Invoice, Master Customer for Alternates and Master Customer for Contracts. added to the Customer Sales & Profit report located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales & Profit.
  2. New Column- Salesperson Code added to the Salesperson Comparison report located in Sales Analysis System, Salesperson Sales Analysis, Salesperson Comparison Reports, By Salesperson
  3. Report Change- The “Customer Sales 12 Month Report” has been renamed “Customer Sales By Month” and now asks how many months to include. It is located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales By Month.

Utilities

  1. New User Flag- Include recent notes next information next to code. When this is set to YES, the system will join the recent notes information next to product codes, customer codes, vendor codes, etc.
  2. New Feature- In the Back Up system there is now a full error message and a possible cause description added to the backup failure warning screen located in Utilities, Backup System, Review Backup History.

  3. New Report- User Security Inquiry. This new Inquiry enables a User to see the User Security Level, Level Name and Full Name for the Users in The Business Edge. It is located in Utilities, System Administrator, Employee System, User Security Inquiry.

Graphical Interface Changes

  1. New User Flag- “Button Alignment”, allows users to select left or right alignment for the buttons on the lower screen. Some people have asked them to be moved away from the part of the screen where Microsoft notifications popup and hide our notifications.

Brighton Best

  1. New System Flag- Override BBI Price-This override screen will show you the current Brighton-Best Price and allow you to enter a different price. You can click the “Delete” button to remove the override and go back to using the price supplied by the Brighton-Best system. The screen will show who over-rode the price and when. It will also show the price that was overridden. This flag is in the final screen of Enter & Edit Purchase Order.
  2. When the PO is submitted, it will have an asterisk in the remarks to indicate to you that the BBI price was overridden. This not used by the BBI system, it is only for your visual reference. The remarks are limited to 40 characters. You will have to call your sales representative and follow the same procedures you use now when prices are being overridden. If your sales representative does not make a change on his side then BBI will use their system’s price.
  3. New System Flag- “Electronic PO Pkg Qty Rule” will tell the system what to do with quantities that don’t divide evenly with master distributors’ package quantities. All existing systems are set to round up. “Round Up” will be the default setting for new installations. If the quantity is less than half of a package quantity if will round down, if it is half or more it will round up. This flag is in Utilities, System Administrator System, System Set Up, Miscellaneous Setup, Enter & Edit Entity Flags, Purchase Orders Flags.

Release Notes June-December 2016

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Fields added to report – The following fields have been added to the Allocated Orders report when presented to the screen – Ship to City, State, Zip, First Ship Date and Shipper information including Freight and Date Shipped on. This report is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Allocated Order Reports.

  2. New Field added to screen – The Ship Via field has been added to Print Picking Tickets Not Printed. When choosing what Pick Tickets you would like to pick this is useful information. This is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Output Options, Print Orders & Packing Lists, Print Picking Tickets Not Printed.
  3. New Field added to grids – Order Entered By has been added to the Open Orders by Customer and Open Orders by Customer All Detail reports. These reports are located in Order Reports, Open Order Reports.
  4. New Field added to grid – The Description field has been added to the Backorders by Product Report. This can be found in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Sales Back Order Reports.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Feature – Excel option added – The following report will now be presented in a grid and can be exported to excel – Order Reports, Lost Sales Reports, Lost Sales Report – By Customer.
  2. New Field added to grid – The Freight field has been added to the following report when presented to the screen: Accounts Receivable System, Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, By Salesperson, By Salesperson.
  3. New Optional Information Grid – Customer Contacts have been added to Order and Invoice Entry and Inquiry screens as an optional information grid.
  4. New Fields added to grid – Original Invoice Amount, Entered By, Date & Time has been added to the Accounts Receivable Aging grid.
  5. New field added to Reports – Inside Salesperson has been added to the following reports:

    Customer Sales 12 month Report located in Customer Sales Analysis.

    Customer Sales & Profit Report located in Customer Sales Analysis.

    Customer Last Sales Detail Report found in Accounts Receivable, Customer Activity Reports.

    Contract Price List – located in Inventory, Inventory Reports, Cost & Price Table Lists, Customer Contract Prices.

  6. New Information on Screen – When using the Customer Bin System you can now view the PO # when you click or enter on a Bin record. This is located in Accounts Receivable, Customer Bin System, Enter & Edit Customer Bins.
  7. Customer Balance Change – When displaying Customer Balances the system was taking the Grace Period for Credit Warning flag into consideration when displaying past due balances. The system will now break out the actual past due balance and only use the flag for the Credit Warnings. This will give a more accurate picture of what a Customer owes.
  8. New Field Added – Average P.O. Cost has been added as an optional column in the VMI Sales Report By Customer. This is located in Accounts Receivable, Customer Bins, VMI Reports.
  9. New Print Option – List Customer Classifications can now be Output to paper or Adobe. This is located in Accounts Receivable Maintenance, Customer Classification System.
  10. New Fields added to grid – Order Type, Inside Salesperson, Salesperson have been added to the Sales Journal by Customer. This is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, By Customer.
  11. Change to email notification method – When a customer is put on credit hold the Salesperson associated with that Customer receives an e-mail. In the past the e-mail came from the Administrator. The e-mail will now come from the person that put the Customer on credit hold as long as they have a valid e-mail address.
  12. New Feature – Create Invoices from Expedited List. When this flag is turned on this feature will enable Users to create invoices without going through the Allocation screens. All Allocated Orders will be presented in a grid. When a User clicks or enters on an Order they will be in the Create Invoice screen. This feature was previously only available for clients using the Warehouse Management System. To use this feature a new flag Allow Create I in Expedite List must be changed to yes. This is located in Entity Flags Accounts Receivable Screen 4.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Warning – When entering a Purchase Order through Enter & Edit Orders using Set PO, a message will appear if the product you are entering is already on the Purchase Order.
  2. New Information on screen – Total Charges & Total Credits are now displayed in the heading in Vendor Inquiry, Vendor Financials, and Summarize Financials.
  3. New Field added to screen – Standard Cost has been added to the detail lines of a Purchase Order.
  4. New Field – Discount Date has been added to the grid information on the Cash Requirements Report. This is located in Accounts Payable, Accounts Payable Reports.
  5. New Feature – Debit Memo Totals – when in Update Debit Memo when you type in the Debit Memo number the totals will be displayed on the screen. It is very important to be sure that the totals are correct before updating a Debit Memo.
  6. New Flag – Require Po Confirmed before Receiving. If it is your procedure to be sure PO’s are confirmed this flag will help ensure the accuracy of Receipts. When this flag is set to Yes, a PO must be confirmed before a User will be able to receive it in the system. This flag is in Entity Flags – Purchase Orders, screen 4
  7. New Flag – Copy Vendor PO/PPO Message to Final Message. When this flag is set to Yes and there is a PO/PPO Message setup in the Vendor Master record, the system will automatically copy it to the Final Message on the PO or PPO. This flag is located in Entity flags – Purchase Orders, screen 4.
  8. New Receiving Option – Quick Receive and Post Accrued. When this option is activated there is an additional Receiving program available where the first prompt is the PO Number instead of the Vendor. The flag to turn this on is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders, screen 4

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Date Field on PPO Heading – “Date to Send to Processor” this works just like the Date Requested and or Schedule Date on Sales Orders. This is the date that the warehouse is to ship out the PPO to the Processor. In the past the system would use either todays date (default) or the Date Requested. This date will be used in Open Documents and the ARS System.

    When using the Wireless Warehouse this date must be filed in in order to get into the picking queue. The queue will use this date to figure out when the product for the PPO should be pulled.

    When using the Documents to be Picked report – this date will be used as to when to pick them.

    When entering new PPO’s the system will default today as the date to send the PPO. The user can change or blank out the date. When the date is blank, most reports will put the document at the bottom of the list just as it does with Orders without a requested date.

  2. New feature in the ARS System – When Traverse PPO’s is answered “Yes” while Preparing Parts for Replenishment in the ARS, the system will now suggest replenishing the raw material when it is suggesting a PPO for the finished good. There is no longer a need to run the ARS multiple times.

    If the quantity on the PPO is changed in the batch the components will need to be manually changed, the system will not re-calculate within the batch

Inventory

  1. New Field added to screen – Receipt Date has been added to the Current Location Status Inquiry. This can be found in Inventory, Inventory Reports, Inventory Balance Status Reports, Tracking Balance Status Reports, Current Location Status Inquiry.
  2. New field added to screen – Default Location (an optional field) has been added to the heading screen in Change Product Locations.

Accounts Payable

  1. New field added to screen – Invoice Discount Date has been added to the Cash Requirements Report. This can be found in Accounts Payable, Accounts Payable Reports, Cash Requirements Report.
  2. New Date Range Option – When viewing Purchase History in a Vendor Inquiry, you can now put in a date range to narrow down the history you would like to view.

General Ledger

  1. If you enter * as first beginning date of the Income Statement the periods will be set to Jan 1, of current and previous year and the last day of last month for the current and previous year. Example: today is Aug 10, 2016 an * entry will set the periods to be
  2. New Date options for Income Statement and Balance Sheet – In the past the Income Statement and Balance Sheet could only be generated for full month periods. You can now generate these reports with any date and the information will only reflect the data for that period.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Field – Inside Salesperson in the following report: Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales & Profit.
  2. New Field – Inside Salesperson – added to Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales 12 Month Report.

Utilities

  1. New Flag – Include Recent Notes Info Next to Codes – In the graphical interface notes can be seen very easily in the optional information grids. This makes it unnecessary to show the last note date next to the Code in the system. Changing this flag to “No” will remove the follow up date taking space on the screen. This flag is located in Edit, General Flags.

Brighton Best

  1. The Brighton Best Integration programs have been re-written with improved functionality. Below are some of the changes/options you will see in the new version

    General – Any system that had New Jersey (Logan Township, NJ) as the default warehouse will automatically change to default to the Sayreville (Sayerville, NJ) warehouse.

  2. Inquiries:

    You will no longer have to enter a quantity before seeing available values.

    Both package and bulk values will be shown on one screen for pack quantities, available quantities, standard and discount prices.

    Case and Pallet quantities will be displayed when applicable.

  3. E&E PO:

    There are 2 flags that control the Package Quantity Rules for Brighton Best. Enter & Edit PO Package Rule and Convert PO Package Rule. The options are – Round Up, Round Down, Change to Closest or Do Not Change. These flags can be changed in the Brighton Best Flags which are located in the Entity Record

    There is a New P.O. Submission confirmation screen that will display the Vendor Sales Order Number, Confirmed Time, Ship Via, FOB, Total Amount and Line Count.

  4. E&E PO Detail Lines.

    The system will warn when a P.O. quantity ordered is higher than what is available for the selected warehouse.

    If the quantity is not evenly divisible by the package quantity you are now prompted to select from a list showing the over and under quantities. The sequence of values is based on the “E&E P.O. Package Qty. Rule” flag: Round up, Round Down, or Round Closest.

    New columns when selecting a pack type, the columns are now – Group, Package Type, Package Quantity, Discount Quantity, Price, Discounted Price and Unit of Measure.

    New Columns when selecting a Brighton Best warehouse are Bulk Available, Package Available and Distance (approximate distance to warehouse).

    The system now has a flag for “Default Package Type”. The system will use this value unless the product selected is not available in the default package type. This flag can be changed in the Brighton Best flags located in Utilities, System Administrator, Entity System, Edit Entity, Supply Chain Network.

    The default minimum BBI order is $25.00. This can be changed in the Brighton Best flags located in Utilities, System Administrator, Entity System, Edit Entity, Supply Chain Network.

    New grid tip will show up next to the warehouse name when there is not enough available. Mouse over will show the warehouse name and availability.

    “Review Electronic P.O.” and “Submit Electronic P.O.” now use the same validation logic with the ability to drill in and edit line items.

TBE Mobile

  1. We have begun to roll out some of the features in the new TBE Mobile. Currently available is the CRM – Customer Relationship Management App. This includes Customer and Product Inquiries with up to the minute information available to run on any (iOS or Android) smart phone, tablet or notebook computer as well as other devices. The system provides real time two-way communication between mobile users, wherever they may be, and the live system. The screens vary automatically based on the size of the screen on each device. The intuitive interface is the same style as any app on the devices so it is very easy for the remote users to navigate.

    The cost for the CRM Module is $600 and $60 per Quarter for the first User, $300 and $30 per Quarter for any additional Users.

    Call Client Support if you would like a 30 Day Trial.

  2. Coming soon – Signature Capture and new Vendor Managed Inventory Apps.

Release Notes – May 2016

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. Sort Option added to Inquiry – Order Shipping Inquiry – This inquiry now allows users to view this inquiry by Date Shipped. The Date Shipped is located in the Shipper Information from within a Sales Order. The Date is filled in automatically for UPS Shipments if you have the optional UPS Integration module. This inquiry is the last menu item in the Order Reports Menu.

  2. New field for export – Ship Schedule by Cust-Part-Date will now include PO Status. This is useful for companies that tie Sales Orders to Purchase Orders for direct ship orders. If the status shows as received, technically it should be billed to the customer.
  3. New Feature Duplicate Order from Order inquiry – When in an Order Inquiry an Order can now be duplicated. This new feature is located under Options. This feature is often used to duplicate a Quote so that you can retain the original and edit the duplicated document for shipment.
  4. New Flag – Days Added to Order Import Date Requested – When importing VMI Orders, the system used to automatically fill in the Current Date as the Date Requested on the Order. There is now a flag that can be set to the number of days you would like to add to the current date to create the Date Requested. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 7 of 7.
  5. New Feature – Move Unallocated Lines to new Order – When Allocating a Sales Order Users now have the ability to Move unallocated lines to a new order from within the Detail Lines of an Order. This will bring up a confirmation box to verify that you want to move the unallocated lines, and then take you into the new order.
  6. New Feature Duplicate Order from Order inquiry – When in an Order Inquiry an Order can now be duplicated. This new feature is located under Options. This feature is often used to duplicate a Quote so that you can retain the original and edit the duplicated document for shipment.
  7. New Optional information in the graphical interface – Users can now view Customer Item Instructions that are setup for an Individual Customer/Product in a new Optional Information Grid available when in an Order Detail Line.
  8. New Inquiry – Closed Order Inquiry – This new inquiry will present all Closed Orders within the date range selected. The Line Items on the Order will be show as well as the User, Date and Time the Order was closed.
  9. New Field – Default Customer Job Number has been added to the Customer Master file, when this field is filled in, it will automatically copy to the heading of the Sales Order.
  10. New Field in Customer Order Inquiry – In the graphical interface when viewing Open Orders for a Customer a column has been added for Packing List Printed. When selected it will show the User, Date and Time the Packing List was printed.
  11. New Report – Customer Bin Turn Report – This new report can be generated by Customer and Invoice Date Range. The report shows all the active customer bins, and then for the given date range: the quantity sold, # times sold, and # of turns (based on Bin Minimum). It also shows bin information, and inventory availability. This report is located in Accounts Receivable, Customer Bin System, VMI Reports.
  12. New Report – Documents to be Picked – This new report is similar to “Print Picking Tickets Not Printed” and the “Pick List Report”. This report would be used to help decide which documents should be printed to be processed. This can include Orders, PPO’s and Transfers. After selecting / deselecting the documents, pick tickets will be automatically printed.

    The options for the report are shown on the screen below:

    The shipper range is so the user can run the report for a specific shipper (like UPS) so you can “batch” the orders going through the warehouse. Will Call and Customer Waiting should go out first, and then truck shipments, and then UPS shipments. Leaving the default as Beginning and End simply includes all orders.

    The Beginning and Ending dates are the Date required based on the document dates. For PPOs and Transfers, they are the date the PPO and Transfer are due.

    If you answer Yes to Include Orders with Printed Picking Tickets, then the system will include those orders in the list. Typically if you have already printed the Pick Ticket you would not need to re-print it.

    The sorting program will go through all the orders, PPOs and Transfers that meet the criteria and put them in a grid. Any document that can be fully picked will automatically be added to the list of picking tickets to be printed. In the grid, the user can add/remove individual documents to be printed, clear all documents, print a specific picking ticket, and drill into the document for further information.

    When they exit the grid, if there are documents marked to be printed, they will be prompted to print the picking tickets.

Purchase Order System

  1. The Brighton-Best part number will no longer be shown as a static line below Product Code. Instead the information will be available in a new optional information grid for electronic vendors. This will include Brighton-Best and Kanebridge parts that have relationships setup. As new electronic Vendors ae added this area will expand.
  2. New Optional information in the graphical interface – Users can now view Vendor Item Instructions that are setup for an Individual Vendor/Product in a new Optional Information Grid available when in a PO Detail Line.
  3. New Optional Information Grid – When in a Debit Memo Inquiry – Users can now select to view Detail Lines, Output History and the Ship To Address Information in a Debit Memo Inquiry.
  4. Automatic Replenishment change – The ARS (when Traversing Bill of Materials) will now suggest replenishing the raw material when it is suggesting a PPO for the finished good. Users will no longer have to run the ARS multiple times. The quantity of raw material that is suggested is based on the quantity the ARS is suggesting to replenish of the finished good.
  5. New system flag – Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders (4 of 4) Mark PO Delivered Method 2 options:

    1. Mark Entire PO Delivered (what it has always done).

    2. Input Vendor Packing List Quantities

    Changing between these at random will cause confusion. If the flag moves from option1 to 2, then you will need to go through all the delivered PO’s and mark which lines are delivered -otherwise the system will show that the PO is delivered at the heading level, but none of the items in reports will be marked as delivered.

    If you have it set at option #1 (the default), when you mark a PO as delivered, it marks the entire PO as delivered – you get a “Delivered” note in open documents.

    If you have it set at option #2, when you mark a PO as delivered, the system will also prompt you to put in the vendor packing list quantity for the lines that were received. Only the lines with vendor packing list quantities will show as being “delivered” – the following screen shot shows that line #2 of PO 83940-06 has only been partially delivered.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Columns added to PPO Inquiry when in a Product Inquiry – Original Promise Date, Current Promise Date and Product Description are new columns in the graphical interface.
  2. New columns added graphical interface only – When receiving a PPO you can now select the Extra/Non Stock Description, Line Comment and or Internal Comment as columns on the screen.
  3. New Columns added to report – Open Processing Purchase Order By Vendor has 5 new column in the graphical interface or exporting to excel. Next Document Type, Date, Code and Name. Based on the open documents, this will be filled in with the document information (sales order, outgoing PPO, etc) that the PPO is needed to fulfill.

Inventory

  1. New Columns when doing a Product Inquiry – the logic for available quantities has been improved. When doing a Product Inquiry the columns on the screen will now include On Hand, Allocated, Reserved, In Warehouse, Committed, Available to Sell, Coming In and Available to Promise.
  2. New fields added – The Product Entry inquiry is an easy way to check on new Products that have been added to the system. This inquiry will now include additional columns that can be viewed – Classification Code, Classification Description and Weight will be available for all systems. Stocking values are available for all non-branch systems.
  3. New Menu – Supply Chain Network – This menu is the last choice in Inventory Reports. This menu will contain The Brighton Best Product Lookup, Kanebridge Lookup, XL Screw Lookup as well as the Fastener Connection Product search. This menu will expand as we continue to add Vendors to the Supply Chain Network.

    In the Graphical Interface there is also a new selection under Inquiries called Supply Chain Network where there are Product Lookups for the Vendors we are partnering with.

  4. FCH Connection – New menu items & options.

    FCH Product Lookup (also found in the Inquiries toolbar menu in the Supply Chain Network sub-menu)

    Use the “Download FCH Attributes” to get a fresh download of FCH Attributes. This can be used to search for inventory on the FCH site. Key in text to search for or select an attribute or any combination. See the example below.

    Below are sample screens if you are uploading products from your inventory to the FCH Website. You must be signed up with FCH in order to use the upload feature.

    Update FCH Upload Flags

    Select a range of products that you want to affect then select how you want the flag set.

    Upload Products to FCH

    Use this to upload your current values to FCH.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New – Customer Annual Sales Summary – this new inquiry is available in the graphical interface – Customer Inquiry, Invoices & Checks. This will present a grid showing by year the Annual Sales, Cost, Change is Sales both dollars and percentage from year to year along with the number of line items, total profit and profit percentage. This will go back to the Customers first sale.
  2. New flag Default – When creating Periodic Invoices there is a question – Show Customer Selection List – The default for this question was No, this has been changed to yes. Now Users will be able to view the Customers that the system is going to create Periodic invoices for before proceeding. This will prevent Users from accidentally creating invoices they did not want to create.
  3. New Optional Feature for Periodic Invoices. There is a new system flag Create Single A/R Invoice for Periodic Invoice? When this system flag is set to Yes the system will create a single Periodic Invoice for your customer. When this new flag is set to Yes the system will create a single invoice that totals all of the periodic invoices that were created. The invoice number will be the letter P followed by the Date and Customer Number, example if you created an invoice for Customer # 1234 on March 13, 2016, the invoice number will be P160313-1234. You can then simply pay the individual periodic invoice. All of the invoices that were included on the Periodic Invoice will be listed under paid invoices and the check number will be the Periodic Invoice Number.

    Single Periodic Invoices cannot be canceled once any type of payment or adjustments has been applied so it is important to be sure all invoices are correct before creating the Periodic invoice.

  4. New Flag – Confirm UPS Worldship data during Invoice creation – There are 3 options for this new flag – Confirm, Do Nothing or Required. If your company has the optional UPS Integration Module, Users will now get a warning when creating an invoice that has a Ship Via of UPS without UPS Tracking information when this flag is set to Confirm. If this flag is set to required they will not be able to create the invoice without Shipper information.
  5. New Flag – Save One-Time Ship to Address as New Address? When entering a One Time address in a Sales Order Users have an option to save the address in the Customer Master file. When this new flag is set to Yes that will be the default answer for all users. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order.
  6. New Fields added to the Customer Inquiry – The Customer Group and the number of Products with Contract Prices the Customer has been added to the main screen of the Customer Inquiry.
  7. Fields added to Customer Selection Grid – these optional columns now include Customer Classification Code and Description as well as Customer Group Code and Description.
  8. New Output Option for Customer Credit Report – This report can now be presented to the screens so that it can be exported to Excel. This report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Status Reports.
  9. New Columns added to Customer Detail Sales History from within a Customer Inquiry – Last Receipt Date, PO #, PO Line Number and On hand balance.
  10. New information in Customer History – Graphical interface only – The history section has been split into 2 sections – Financial History and History. In the History accordion there is a new On Hand & Usage Inquiry that will show the on hand values and usage of items that have been invoiced to the selected customer.
  11. New option – Periodic Invoices can now be generated by PO Number in addition to Customer and Customer Ship to Address.
  12. New Field in Customer Master file – Inside Salesperson – There is a secured flag that needs to be turned on to use this new field. Inside Salespeople Codes are entered in the Salesperson Maintenance System located in A/R File Maintenance. Once they are entered they can be assigned to Customers in Enter & Edit Customers. The inside Sales person will show on the main Customer Inquiry screen. It will be added to some reports as an optional column as requested.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Feature – Vendor Certificates – An unlimited number of Certificate Types can be setup for Vendors. Examples might be ISO, Liability, Workman’s Comp or AS9100. If your system had the ISO Certified Flag set to Yes they will automatically be setup with an ISO Certificate with a blank expiration date.
  2. Certificates can be added to the system in Accounts Payable File Maintenance, Enter & Edit Vendor Certificates. They can then be added to the Vendor in Enter & Edit Vendors – Vendor Certificates under Options. When adding a Certificate to a Vendor, an expiration date and comment can be added.
  3. When there is an expiration date, a pop-up window will appear when Users select the vendor. A listing of expired certificates can be viewed in Accounts Payable Reports – Vendor Expired Certificate Report.
  4. New Optional Information Grid – In Vendor Inquiry Users can now choose to view Vendor Default e-mails.
  5. New columns in List Vendors – ISO Certificate, Expiration Date and Certificate Comment have been added to the List Vendors report found in Vendor Lists & Labels.

General Ledger

  1. New Option in Balance Inquiry – When viewing the General Ledger Balance Inquiry there is now an option for Summary. Users can choose by Month or Year. Balances will be displayed for the selected option. In the past the balances were only presented by Month.

Sales Analysis

  1. New fields added for export – the following fields have been added to the Customer Detailed Sales by Product grid: Classification Code, Classification Name, Primary Vendor Code and Primary Vendor Name. This report is located in Customer Sales Analysis.

Utilities

  1. New My Menu Option – Duplicate Users My Menu – This new option will copy the My Menu settings from one user to another. They will then each have unique My Menu’s that can be further edited for either User independently.
  2. New Subject option for invoices – When e-mailing invoices there is a new option for the subject line. Ship To Name, Document Type, Document Number. This is setup in the Forms section related to Documents. If you would like to change this contact Client Support for assistance.

VMI

  1. When using Production Cells, there is an option to make a Production Cell inactive. If the Production Cell is used in any Bins the system will now display a message indicating the Bins must be deleted before making the Production Cell inactive.
  2. New Deletion Option in Bins – Bins can now be deleted by Production Cell in Enter & Edit Customer Bins.
  3. New Flag – Days Added to Order Import Date Requested – When importing VMI Orders the system used to automatically fill in the Current Date as the Date Requested on the Order. There is now a flag that can be set to the number of days you would like to add to the current date to create the Date Requested. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 7 of 7.

Graphical Interface Changes

  1. The system will now remember a user’s grid settings when new columns are added, removed or renamed.
  2. There is a new user flag “Default New Columns”: Hidden/Visible. The new columns that are added in patches and upgrades will default to the user’s setting.


Release Notes – April 2015

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. The optional information grid that displays previous line items on an Order will now include Quantity, Price and Units of Measure.

  2. New columns available – When viewing the Detail Lines in Enter & Edit Orders Tax Authority and Tax Amount are now available columns. This is helpful if you have customers that pay tax on some items and not others. If you would like to see these fields, mouse over the heading screen, click on the down arrow and then click on columns to choose your fields.
  3. New field – When in the Detail line of a Sales Order you can now see the Item Extension. In the past you had to be at New Line to see the total value of each line.
  4. New Fields in Shipping Schedule – Show Documents. In the graphical interface Users can now select columns for On Hand and Available Inventory when viewing this menu item. Shipping Schedule – Show Documents is located in Order Reports, Scheduling & Expediting Reports.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Sort – Open PO’s shown in the optional information grids will now sort by Date Requested
  2. New information on screen – Vendor Phone Number is now visible on the Detail lines screen for convenience.
  3. New Fields Added – When viewing the Detail Lines of a Purchase Order in the graphical interface there are new fields that can be chosen. These include Landed Cost and Branch Values.

Inventory

  1. New Feature/Changes to Editing Lot information – There have been a few changes to the Lot Tracking Maintenance Menu. Enter & Edit Product Mfg Info is now called Enter & Edit Lot Information. This will allow for editing and updating on hand lots as well as lot history. The following fields can be edited: Manufacturer, Manufacturer’s Lot Number, Date of Manufacturer, Country of Origin, Heat Number, Country where Melted, RoHS Compliant, DFARs Compliant and Expiration Date. This is located in Inventory System, Lot Tracking Maintenance.
  2. New Feature/Menu Item Name Change – Edit Product Label Comments is now called Edit License Plate Information. In addition to enabling the updating of the Label Comment, Weight and Package Quantities can be edited here. This will only change on hand lots.
  3. New Report Option – Product Sales Activity Report can now be generated by Branch. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Usage Reports.
  4. New Sort on some inquiries – Systems that have branches may see a difference in how some of the inquiries sort. Some screens were sorting by branch name and others by branch code. All inquiries will now sort by branch code.
  5. Report Branch enabled – The Detailed Inventory Report will now show Branch Values on Branch enabled systems. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists, Detailed Inventory Report.
  6. View Change – Text Interface Only – The F4-Basic Information screen in Product Inquiry has been changed to make it easier to read while adding some new sub-totals. The Quantities On Hand, Coming in and Going out have been organized so that Users can get a quick view of what inventory is Available for Sale as well as Available to Promise based on all of the incoming and outgoing documents. Costs, List Price and Total Value can now be viewed in F10 – Lot Tracking Availability on tracked Products or F10- Detail Cost Availability on non-tracked Products.
  7. Columns added to Product Selection grids for Non-Branch enabled systems. When Users are looking up a part in the graphical interface the Product Selection Grid appears with the parts in the range they are searching. Additional columns have been added as optional columns for Users to view. The available fields now include On hand, Allocated, In Warehouse, Going out and Coming In. On Hand minus Allocated equals In Warehouse. Going out equals Available if your system is not set to add PO’s coming in to the Available. If your system is set to add PO’s coming in to the Available then they will be included in the Coming in value.
  8. Additional columns available for Substitute Products – In the graphical interface Substitute Products can be viewed as an Optional Information grid. Additional fields have been added so you can customize what you would like to see. On Hand, Available to Sell, Allocated, Reserved, Coming in and Available to sell are now options.
  9. New Optional Information Grid – When in Enter & Edit Transfer for Branch enabled systems, Users can now choose to see the Branch Stocking Values when in a detail line.
  10. New Fields in Inquiry – While in a Product Inquiry and viewing Customer Quotes or Sales Orders under the Documents Section, Users can now choose to see the Salesperson code and or Salesperson Name in the graphical interface.
  11. New Default in Enter & Edit Product Classifications. If your company pays commission based on profit you can now set a default percentage of profit for new classifications. In some cases it is the same for every class, setting it up in this new default ensures you do not omit adding the commissions to new classifications.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Feature – When the Ship Via on an Order/Invoice is set to Customer Pays freight, the system will force the User to add Freight to an Invoice. If freight is not being added to the Invoice, the Ship Via needs to be changed. Customer Pays freight is a flag that is setup in each individual Shipper record. Enter & Edit Shippers is located in Accounts Receivable File Maintenance as well as under Master Files on the toolbar.
  2. New Inquiry – Graphical Interface only – Customer Sales by Class Family – When in a Customer Inquiry there is a new screen available under the History Tab – Product Class Families. After choosing a range of Class Families and Dates the system will provide a grid by Class Family showing Sales, Cost, Profit, Percent of Profit and Percent of total Sales. When Summarize is answered Yes it will be a summary by Family, when it is set to No each Class will be displayed with the Family.
  3. New Inquiry – Salesperson Sales by Class/Family – When in a Customer Inquiry there is a new screen available under the History Tab – Product Class Families. After choosing a range of Class Families and Dates the system will provide a grid by Class Family showing Sales, Cost, Profit, Percent of Profit and Percent of total Sales. When Summarize is answered Yes it will be a summary by Family, when it is set to No each Class will be displayed with the Family.
  4. New Flag in Miscellaneous Charges – Copy to Backorder. Miscellaneous Charges can be setup to copy to backorders on an individual basis. Mandatory Miscellaneous Charge flags will over-ride this flag. When the flag in the Miscellaneous Charge is set to Yes, the Miscellaneous Charge will copy over to every revision of an Order. This is very helpful when using Miscellaneous Charges for Certificates.

Sales Anaylsis

  1. New Column in Sales by Product Classification Family – A column has been added that represents the % each line represents from the entire report. This makes it easier to see which products are the largest portions of sales.
  2. New Column in Product Sales and Profit – when this report is presented in a grid a column has been added for Product Classification.

Release Notes – New User Interface Application: TBE4

» Download Release Notes «

Here are some of the things that are new in tbe4

  1. The tbe4 application is all around faster. Improvements have been made to memory management, speed of response evaluation, reduced size of responses, removed redundant processing.
  2. There is a new contemporary default theme. The old default theme is still there, it has been renamed “Classic Theme”.

  3. The menu tree now has a settings gear that allows you to choose if you want to allow multiple open folders and if you want the tree to automatically resize so that the menu item descriptions always have enough room.

    Click on the gear icon to get the menu

    Use the checkboxes to make your choices.

  4. We removed “The Business Edge” splash screen tab which allows for wider tabs that can show longer descriptions.Here is an example of a tbe4 window on top of The BUSINESS EDGE 2.0 window with the same tabs open.

  5. The “Optional Information” lists now have a heading with options to (-)Hide All and (+)Show All

  6. The moving options and reset to default options have been moved to the settings menu. New setting options for Optional Information grids have been added: Hide, Copy Grid Data and Visible Rows.

  7. Visible Rows in optional information grids allows you to set the number of rows to show. The grids now have a More/Less tab under them when appropriate. The number of visible rows is now user definable, the default is 9 for the maximum. If you expand it to everything it will remember and always show everything. An example is Lot Tracking Detail or Order Detail Lines that can be hundreds of lines. This feature can also be used to reduce the number of things shown. For example you might only want to see the last three recent customer notes instead of the last nine. The Business Edge shows a 10th row with “More Information…” in the first cell and you have to click the (+) button to drill in to see more information.

    The Business Edge looks like this, notice the last row says, “More Information…”

    The system will now show a “More” tab instead of a row with “More Information…” The limit can be configured by the user with the settings gear and can be temporarily expanded to show everything by clicking on the “more” tab at the bottom of the grid. Click on the gear icon to get to the “Visible Rows” option. The + button still works the way it always has and drills into the information by using the entire tab space.

    Click on “Visible Rows” to change the value, in this example I will change it from three to seven.

    Click the “More” tab at the bottom to expand it to show everything. This will make it expand to show everything and the “More” tab will turn into a “Less” tab to use to collapse the grid back to your “Visible Rows” size.

  8. If you have your products associated with Able Label categories there is now an option to see the label image on your screen.

  9. If you are using our mobile signature capture feature you can now have the option to see the signature on the screen.

  10. All grids now have a heading with options to (-)Hide All and (+)Show All columns


Release Notes – January 2015

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Feature- Lot Tracking Only- When Allocating a Credit for a Customer if the User puts in the Original Lot Number that was sold to the customer they will prompted with a question- Put the historical lot information into the tracking? If the Users answers Yes to this question the original lot information will be copied to the lot tracking information for the quantity going back into stock.

    If there is more than one lot for an item being returned, separate lines must be entered for each lot number.

  2. New Order types – The system now has a new set of Order Types – VMI Orders, these are typically used for Orders imported with the Vendor Managed Inventory System. VMI Orders can be Firm, Hold, Pending or Quotes. Order Reports and some historical reports used with the new Contract System can isolate orders of different types
  3. New Optional Information – graphical interface only – Recent Product Receipts will now be an optional information screen that can be chosen in the Detail Line of Enter & Edit Orders. It will be limited to the information in the first grid, it cannot be expanded.
  4. New Inquiry – Order Detail Line Inquiry – this new inquiry will show by Month or Year the number of Orders/Quotes that were entered along with the number of Line Items, an average line item count as well as how many orders had over 100 lines. It also includes a total for the detail lines as well as an average. This report can be found in Order Reports, Order Analysis Reports.
  5. New Feature – Prepaid Orders – If a Customer Pre-pays for an Order that payment can be entered into the Sales Order in the Totals Screen located on the Final screen of an Order. Prepayments will be accumulated and can be added to a Deposit by clicking on F5-Prepaid Orders from within a deposit. When the deposit is updated the prepayment will post to the Customers Account as an unapplied balance. When the order is eventually allocated and invoiced, the payment will be automatically posted to the Invoice when the Invoice is updated.
  6. New System Flag – Quotes-Set Unit Cost to Average Cost? When entering a Quote by default the system copies the Default PO Cost to the Cost field in the Detail Line of the Quote. Users have the ability to over-ride the Cost in a Quote by simply typing in a new Cost. When this new flag is set to Yes the system will automatically copy the Average Cost to the Detail Line of the Quote.
  7. New Feature – Enter & Edit Customer Item Instructions is now a Menu Item. In the past Customer Item Instructions could only be entered through Enter & Edit Customers. This new menu item enables Users that do not have permissions to be in Enter & Edit Customers to be able to add or edit Customer Item Instructions. This is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Entry File Maintenance.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Flag Option – The system flag to update the Default Po Cost – has two new options – Update Default Po Cost with Raw Cost when Editing a PO or Update Default PO Cost with Landed Cost when Editing a PO. In the past Default PO Cost was only updated when PO Receipts were updated. Choosing one of these options will update the Default PO Cost upon entry of the PO. . This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 1 of 4.
  2. New Flag – PO.s – Change Vendor-Update Detail Alternates? If a Vendor is changed on a PO and this flag is set to Yes the system will Update Alternate Product Codes to be those associated with the new vendor on the PO. The system will have the User Confirm before making the change. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 4 of 4.
  3. New Flag – PO’s – Change Vendor-Update Detail Costs? If a Vendor is changed on a PO and this flag is set to Yes the system will Update Costs to be those associated with the new vendor on the PO. If you use the Vendor Contract Pricing this should be set to Yes. The system will have the User Confirm before making the change. . This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 4 of 4.
  4. New Feature – Duplicate PO – A menu item has been added to the Purchase Order System to Duplicate a PO. The next numeric PO Number will be assigned to the Duplicated PO. The system will prompt for a Promise Date for the New PO. After the PO is duplicated the User will automatically be in Enter & Edit PO and can make any changes that are needed.
  5. New Flag – Use Vendor Contacts for Salesman Lookup – When this flag is set to Yes the system will only allow the Salesperson field on the Heading of a Purchase Order to be populated from an existing Contact in the Vendor Contact file. If this is set to No any information can be entered in the Salesperson field on the Heading of the PO. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 4 of 4.
  6. New Feature – Duplicate PO Line – Graphical interface only – When entering a Purchase Order there is a new button to duplicate a line on a PO. Highlight the Line you would like to duplicate and click Duplicate (F9) under options. Alternatively you can right click on the line and choose duplicate. The new line item will be at the end of the PO Lines. This is helpful if you have multiple dates for the same item. You also have the ability to sort the line items if you want to be sure they are grouped together. The sort options are on the right side of the Detail Line screen.
  7. New field available – Open PO Report will now include a field that can be selected for viewing on the screen – Last Output. This will indicate the last time a PO was printed, faxed or emailed. Users might check this report to make sure all PO’s were sent out.
  8. New Field available – Vendor Comment on RFQ Line. When in Enter & Edit RFQ’s a vendor comment can be added to each line item. The comment is then viewable in an RFQ Inquiry in the Detail Line. The comment can be added in the Comment Screen under Options in the graphical interface and under F6-Comment in the text interface when on the line item.
  9. New field on PO Heading – Vendor Phone Number will now be displayed on the heading of a Purchase Order when in Enter & Edit Purchase Orders. This is only available in the graphical interface. In the text interface the phone number can be viewed under F5-Vendor Inquiry on the same screen.
  10. New Feature – Add Alternate Part Number on the Fly in Purchase Orders. When in a Detail line of a PO an Alternate Product Code can be added while editing a PO Line by selecting Add Alternate Product under Options in the graphical interface or by pressing F8-More and then Add Alternate Product in the text interface.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Flag – Default P.O. Cost during PPO Receipt Updated – In the past the options to update the cost for PPO’s was combined with PO’s. PPO’s can now be set differently than PO’s – the choices are to Update the Cost with Raw, Landed or Do not Update. The default is how they were originally set. Most companies update the Default Cost with the Raw Cost. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 1 of 4.
  2. New screen totals – The values seen under the Totals screen in a PPO Inquiry have been expanded. The system will now show the Value of the Products Needed for Process and the value of the Raw Material Sent. Once a PPO has been received it will then show the Accrued Value Received, Raw Material Value Used and a total.
  3. New Feature – New warning – when entering a Bill of Material if a component is entered that already exists in the bill of material the system will pop up a warning message for the user. This is helpful when entering Kits with a lot of components.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Customer Flag – VMI Import Order Type – When VMI Orders are imported this new flag will designate how the Orders will be imported. Some companies want to differentiate Order types for Tracking and or Pricing. This new flag can be changed in Enter & Edit Customers.
  2. New Feature – Change History to Customers Salesperson – this new program will re-assign sales history for any date range to the Salesperson that is currently assigned to the customer in the Customer Master file. After entering a beginning and ending date the system will go through the order and invoice files and change the records. A screen will then display the number of Order and Invoice lines were changed. This can be found in Accounts Receivable Maintenance, Miscellaneous Customer Maintenance, Change History to Customers Salesperson. Once this is done it cannot be reversed
  3. New Export – Customer Part Information – This new export provides options to isolate products purchased or on Order for a specific customer. The fields that can be included are Customer, Product Code, Product Description, Alternate Product Code, Alternate Description. This new export is located in Utilities, Export File Data, Export A/R Information.
  4. New Report – List Contacts by Customer – This will enable Users to put all Customer Contacts in the system into an Excel spreadsheet – it will include the Customer Code, Customer Name Contact Name, Phone, e-mail as well as the other fields in the contact file. If you were trying to locate a person and were not sure which company they were with you could find them here if they were entered as a contact in the Customer record. This is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Lists & Labels.
  5. New Flag – Save One-Time Ship to Address as New Address? When entering a One-Time Ship to Address on an order the Default answer to this question has always been no. There is now a system flag if you would like to default it to yes. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable screen 4 of 4.
  6. New Flag – Invoice in Process Register-Separate Reports by Branch? – This new flag enables companies that are branch enabled to set a default for the Invoices in Process Report. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable screen 4 of 4.
  7. New Feature – CC Salespeople on Customer documents. When sending out a document such as a Quote or Order Acknowledgement via e-mail to a Customer you can easily copy the default salesperson assigned to the customer. On the output email screen there is now a button under options CC Salesperson. If something is already in the CC field the salesperson will be joined to the end of it.
  8. New Optional Information in Customer Inquiry – Customer Product Class Sales History – this new optional information screen will display YTD and LYR Sales, Cost, Profit and Profit % for each Product Classification in your Inventory. Users can select from 18 available fields by clicking on the arrow on the Heading and then clicking on Columns.
  9. New Customer Contract System – The new Contract System cannot be used at the same time the current Contract System is being used. If your company would like to use the new contract system, the data can be loaded and then after it is complete, a flag is changed to switch to the new system.

    New Customer Contracts – The new Customer Contract system has extra flags that enable Companies to force a minimum line quantity and track min and max obligations. A Customer might have multiple Contracts due to different contract dates or Order Types. They may have once Contract for VMI Orders and/or Regular Orders and then third for Work Orders. Some companies might only offer Contract Pricing on VMI Orders. Parts / Contract Prices cannot be duplicated for the same Customer / Order Type in different Contracts.

    Customer Contracts are assigned an internal number and a Description – a good practice might be Customer Name-some type of description when a customer has multiple Contracts. This could be ABC-2013 or ABC-LINEA. Beginning and Ending Date are entered on the Heading of the Contract entry. There are then Yes/No questions as to whether the contract prices are used for Firm Orders, VMI, Orders and or Work Orders. This enables a Company to offer Contract Prices on VMI Orders and not on other types of Orders.

    When entering Contract Prices manually – Select the Product, enter the Contract Price – optional fields are Minimum Quantity per Order, Estimated Usage, Estimated Usage Period, Customer Liable for Stock, and Maximum Liable Quantity.

    If there is a Minimum Quantity per Order the system will not allow the User to enter a quantity less than the minimum in the contract on an Order.

    Estimated Usage can be used for Contract Analysis Reports – and if the flag on the heading of the contract – Warn if Order Goes over Est. Usage is set to Yes Users will get a warning if the customer Orders over this quantity.

    Min Obligation will be used for Contract Analysis Reports.

    Products can be marked as In-active if they have not been ordered for a period of time or based on some criteria. If they are marked in-active the customer will not get the contract price. They can later be marked as active from within the contract detail line.

    When you are at the New Line screen there are options to Import parts into a particular Contract or Delete all Records in a Contract. The File layout for importing is a Text Tab Delimited file with the following Fields:

    Product Code Mandatory

    Alternate Code Optional

    Contract Price Mandatory

    Commission % not currently used but must be a column

    Min Quantity Per Order Optional – zero if none

    Estimated Usage Optional – zero if none

    Max Liable Quantity Optional – zero if none

    Estimated Usage Period CAQMW

    Liable for Stock Y/N to indicate if the Customer is liable for stock.

    The new Contract System is located in Accounts Receivable, Accounts Receivable File Maintenance, Customer Contract System

  10. New Customer Contract Reporting – There are a number of new reports for the new Customer Contract System. These reports can be found in the Customer Contract Menu which is only visible when the new contract system is being used.

    Contract Inquiry – after selecting a Customer Contract the information will be displayed in a grid on the screen and can be exported to Excel.

    Contract Over Estimated Usage Report – This report can include all products on a contract or only those that are over the Estimated Usage. The flag- Warn if Order Goes over Est. Usage must be set to yes on the first screen of a contract to produce this report. The information will be presented in a grid and can be exported to Excel.

    Customer Contract Analysis – This report will show Products on a particular contract along with the contract fields and the sales within the contract period. Parts that are in-active or were not sold while on Contract can be omitted. The information will be presented in a grid and can be exported to Excel.

    Customer Contract Consumption Date Report – This report will provide similar information as the report above but will allow the User to define the Date Range instead of automatically using the contract beginning and ending dates. The information will be presented in a grid and can be exported to Excel.

    Customer Production Cell Bin Detail Report – When using Production Cells with the VMI System this report will include all Products that are on a Production Cell and also in a VMI Bin. This includes an extensive amount of data and is presented in a grid for exporting.

  11. New Feature – When using Production Cells with VMI Bins there is now a feature to Delete Bins by Production Cell in Enter & Edit Customer Bins. There is a button on the right under options in the graphical interface and F3 in the text interface.
  12. New Feature – Credit Hold notifications to Salespersons. When a Customer is put on Credit Hold or taken off of Credit Hold the system will now e-mail the Salesperson that is setup in the Customer Master file. The Salesperson’s e-mail address must be entered in Enter & Edit Salespersons to take advantage of this feature.
  13. New Option in Tax Authorities – Tax Authorities can now be marked as in-active. If a tax authority is inactive it cannot be assigned to a Customer. If it is already assigned to a customer when it is made inactive it will not be affected, this will prevent Users from selecting a Tax Authority that is no longer in use. This can be changed in Enter & Edit Tax Authorities which is located in Accounts Receivable Maintenance.
  14. New Report – Salesperson Overview – After selecting a Date range and Salesperson Range the system will produce a report showing each Salesperson along with the number of invoices, Sales, Cost, Profit, Gross Profit % and YTD Sales. This report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, Sales Journals by Salesperson.
  15. New Inquiries – Invoice History and Invoice Detail History – These inquiries will provide invoice information for all invoices created in The BUSINESS EDGE. The Invoice History Inquiry provides summary invoice information including Customer information, User that created the invoice, and when the invoices were sent out. The Invoice Detail History will give detail down to each individual line item. These new Inquiries are located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals, and Invoice History
  16. New Functionality with Credit Card Integration – While in the CREDIT CARD TRANSACTIONS screen of Enter & Edit Orders there are options to either “Refund” the entire transaction or do a “Detail Refund” at the invoice or order level. A “Refund” will credit the entire transaction amount and all orders or invoices will be credited the original applied amounts. A “Detail Refund” can be for any amount equal to or less than the original transaction amount and applies the amount you enter to the individual invoice or order you are currently drilled into or have selected in a grid. Users can also access these options from within the Credit Card System menu in the Accounts Receivable System. This is what you would do if the invoice has been updated and you can’t access it through Enter & Edit Invoices.
  17. New Flag in Miscellaneous Charges – Copy to Backorder. If you are not using Mandatory Miscellaneous Charges this flag can be used. When this flag is set to Yes Miscellaneous Charges will copy to Backorders. This is helpful when using Miscellaneous Charges for Certifications when you want them to go with the original Order as well as backorders.
  18. Deposit System has been re-written – There are some changes in the New Deposit System. Some fields that are no longer needed or rarely used were removed or re-arranged; therefore some screens may look a little different.

    On the Detail Screen where all of the checks are entered, Non-Accounts Receivable Checks can be added to the deposit by Clicking on Add Dist Check or F3 in the text interface. There is also a new button for Pre-paid orders which will be explained below.

    On the check screen there are fewer fields since the Non-A/R information is no longer needed there and two flags were moved. The ability to scan a customer document typically a check has changed positions. Two flags – Sequence Invoices by and Ignore Check Amount can now be changed on the fly under the Options button (F4). These two flags pick up the Users Default settings and can be changed on individual checks.

  19. New Feature – Prepaid Orders – If a Customer Pre-pays for an Order that payment can be entered into the Sales Order in the Totals Screen on the last screen of an order. Prepayments will be accumulated and can be added to a Deposit by clicking on F5-Prepaid Orders from within a deposit. When the deposit is updated the prepayment will post to the Customers Account as an unapplied balance. When the order is eventually allocated and invoiced, the payment will be automatically posted to the Invoice when the Invoice is updated.
  20. 21. New features in Customer Aged Analysis Report – When a Customer Aged Analysis is presented to the screen it is now interactive. If all of the invoices are listed Users can drill into a specific invoice by clicking on it or pressing enter. This puts the User in an Invoice Inquiry for that specific invoice, where you could look at the detail or email it to your customer.

    When running the Aging and answering Yes to Summarize, entering or clicking on a Customer on the screen will put the User into a listing of all of the Customers open Invoices. Options on this screen include Customer Notes, Marking an invoice as Contested and Send Statement.

    These features, along with the ability to run the Aging for only past due accounts makes collection calls quick and easy. There is no need to print out reports; Users should be entering follow up notes into the system as they make the calls. They can enter a follow up date so the system will remind them to check and make sure the Customer followed through with any payment commitments.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Feature – Vendor Item Instructions – Instructions can now be setup by Vendor and Product. If you have special instructions that you would like to print on forms such as the PO, PPO or Merchandise Receiving Document that are Vendor specific you can now set those up in the Vendor Master File.

    These are entered and editing in the graphical interface under Document Parameters and then Vendor Product Instructions. In the text interface they are located under Additional Information, F4-Instructions, F2-Vendor Item Instructions.

    If you would like to incorporate these instructions into your forms, the changes are billable at our normal hourly rate. Documents can be marked up and faxed or emailed to us to make changes.

  2. New fields – Two new fields have been added to the Vendor Remit to Address Screen. Bank Routing Number and Account Number.

Inventory

  1. New Feature – Updating Alternate Descriptions – When the system detects that the Internal Description for a Product has been changed it will now prompt the User if there are Alternate Product Codes asking if they would like to update the Alternate Descriptions. After answering yes all Alternate Descriptions will be updated with the same Description as the Internal Product Description.
  2. 2. New Flag – Track Expiration Date on Lots – This new Flag is in Products and only applies to lot tracked Products. The choices are Yes, No and Optional. If a Product is set to Yes, an expiration date must be entered when receiving inventory. If it is No the field will not be shown and if it is Optional it can be entered or left blank when receiving.

    This flag can be changed in Enter & Edit Products, in the graphical interface it is under Kits & Specifications and then Shipping & Quality. In the text interface it is located in Stocking Information, Shipping & Quality. The flag is also available for importing and exporting.

  3. New Report – Expired Lots Report – This report can be generated for any range of Products. Report Options include a Date – Show Lots that expire before Date as well as an option to Include Lots with Missing Optional Expiration Dates. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Balance Status Reports, Tracking Balance Status Reports, and Expired Lots Report.
  4. Product Flag change – Track Melting Country is now a System level and Product Level Flag. If the System Level Flag Track Melting Country is set to No, Melting Country will not be seen in the system. This is setup in Enter & Edit System Tracking Flags.

    The flag Default Force Melting Country during Receiving is the default Yes/No flag on the Product Level and can be over-ridden in the Product Records. If you company only wants to force the Melting Country to be filled in on select Products, the System Default should be set to No. Then specific Products can be set to yes. The System Flag for the Products is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 2 of 4.

    To change the flag on a part by part basis, in Enter & Edit Products, in the graphical interface it is under Kits & Specifications and then Shipping & Quality. In the text interface it is located in F6 Stocking Information and then F2 Shipping & Quality. The flag is also available for importing and exporting.

  5. New fields on report for export – Date of Manufacture and Expiration date have been added to the Current Tracking Status Report. This is a very detailed report by Product, Location and Lot Number. It is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Balance Status Reports, Tracking Balance Status Reports, Current Location Status Inquiry.
  6. New Flag – Confirm List Price Change? – If this flag is set to Yes and a User changes the List Price in Enter & Edit Products the system will prompt them to confirm they wanted to change the List Price. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Inventory, Screen 4 of 4.
  7. New Menu Item – Enter & Edit Customer Item Instructions – In the past Users needed access to Enter & Edit Customers in order to add Customer Item Notes – these are notes that can be setup for a specific Product by Customer. A new menu selection has been added so that Users can add these notes without being in Enter & Edit Customers. This is located in Order Entry File Maintenance, Enter & Edit Customer Item Instructions. Forms must be formatted to include these notes. Form changes are billed at our normal hourly rate if you are not using these and would like to add them to your customer’s documents.
  8. New Optional Information Grid in Product Inquiry – Vendor Contract Pricing is now available as an option to view on the first screen of the Product Inquiries and Enter & Edit Products.

General Ledger

  1. New Inquiry – G.L. Account Trans Inquiry by Update – This new Inquiry will show transactions by GL Account Number with the Posting Date and the Date the transaction was actually entered. This is useful when trying to find out why a particular balance changed back in time. If posting date ranges are left open and a transaction is done back in time it can be difficult to figure out why balances change. This new Inquiry will enable you to find those types of transactions. This report is located in General Ledger Reports, G.L. Account Trans Inquiry by Update.

Sales Analysis

  1. New field for export – When running the Customer Detailed Sales by Product to the screen, the Extra Non Stock Description is now an available field when the data is put into excel.

  2. New Report – Salesperson Sales by Product Class – After selecting a Date Range, a Range of Salespeople and a single Product Classification the system will present a listing of Sales and can include Quantities, Costs, as well as optionally including Customers with no Sales in the selected Class. This report is located in Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis, More, Customer Inventory Class Sales

Utilities

  1. New import – Salesperson Import – If a large amount of customers need the Salesperson changed in the Customer Master file there is now an import that will accomplish this. A text tab delimited file with Customer Code and Salesperson Code can now be imported in the Accounts Receivable Import Menu.
  2. New Security Level Flag – Allowed to Duplicate Products? Duplicating Products is quick and convenient; this new flag enables you to limit this ability by Security Level. There are 10 possible Security Levels that are assigned to Users in the Security System located in System Administrator.
  3. New Security Level Flag – Allowed to Assign Price Table to Inventory? Assigning Price Tables to Inventory is a powerful program that will enable you to assign Price Tables to any Range of Inventory. If you are using Price Tables in The BUSINESS EDGE this flag should be set to No for any levels of employee’s that have access to inventory but do not have authority to change tables on Products.
  4. New Security Flag – Graphical Interface only – Allow Edit Tool Bar Menu – the default is Yes – when this is changed to No the User will no longer be able to change their preferences. If something does need to be changed, such as a default report printer, they need to be granted permission to make the change and then the permissions can be removed again.
  5. New User Flag – Graphical Interface – Include Hidden Columns – This new User flag enables Users to only consider selected fields when using the Find feature or sending data to Excel from a grid. In the past the system automatically included every possible column. When this new flag is set to yes the Find (Ctrl-F) and exporting of grids to email or Excel will only use the columns you have set to be visible. If this flag is set to No there will be no change. This flag is located in, Edit, General Flags.
  6. New Feature – Graphical Interface – Grids will now use each User’s column sequence in the exported information when sending information to Excel.
  7. New Feature – Graphical Interface – Optional Information Selection – Optional Information screens that display information between the main screen and the Options on the far right can now be managed company wide. Optional information Grids that are not needed by Users can be turned on and off freeing up memory on the individual PC’s. This can be changed in the menu below:
    Utilities
    	System Administrator System
    		System Set Up
    			Miscellaneous Set UP
                                 Optional Information Inquiry
  8. New System Flag – Graphical Interface – Allow Users to Change Themes? When this flag is set to No, Users cannot change their Themes. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – General.
  9. New Feature – Graphical Interface – My Menu – Users can create a My Menu at the bottom of the Standard Menu on the left side of the screen. This makes it easier to organize the items that are used on a regular basis. My Tasks on the Tool Bar is handy to store items but it can get unorganized once several items are stored there.

    If you right click on My Menu, you will have an option to Create Folder. You can name the folder anything you would like. You might have a folder called Inventory Reports, Financial Reports or Accounting. Once you create sub-folders you can then drag items from either the Tool Bar or other Menu’s into your sub-folders. Once you have items in your folders you can right click on them to move them up or down or simply drag them with your mouse.

  10. New Feature – Graphical Interface – My Options – Users can setup a custom set of Options on every screen where there is more than one section of choices on the right side of the screen. Setting this up enables Users to quickly get to the items they use on a regular basis with fewer clicks.

    Example – When Users are at the final screen of a document there are always sections for things like Addresses, Output Options and documentConnection. When in a Product Inquiry there are sections for Availability & Activity, History and documents to name a few. When there are more than one set of choices the last section is called My Options.

    Items can be added to My Options by right clicking on an item or by dragging it down to My Options with the mouse. Once there are multiple choices in My Options they can be re-arranged by dragging with the mouse or right clicking on an item and choosing Move up, Move down or Remove.

    Many Users would benefit by having – Heading Screen, Detail Lines, Final Message, Shipping Address, Output Order/Quote, and Output Picking Ticket all grouped together on the final screen of an Order. Give it a try and add the other items you use on a regular basis to see how much more efficient you will be.

  11. My Menu Only – You can now setup Users so that they only have access to a custom My Menu. An Administrator can log in as a User and create a My Menu which can include custom sub-folders. Any items from the Tool Bar or the Menus can be inserted into a My Menu. Then in Enter & Edit User Security you would change the flag Use My Menu Only to Yes. The User will only see their My Menu; they will not have access to the standard Menu or the items on the Tool Bar.
  12. New Logic for Reload button – The reload button in the past would close the application and log users back in. This was causing problems when the button was used in situations where it should not be. The reload button will now close the most recently used tab and clear any associated locks. Computer Insights will also get an e-mail indicating the User that clicked on reload.
  13. New Optional Information Grid in Invoice Inquiry – Order Notes can now be viewed when in an Invoice Inquiry
  14. New Feature – My History – There is a new Toolbar option My History, this will show the User the last 9 things they did in the system. Users can double click on an item and it will open it in a new tab. Administrators can also view what employees were in via the same inquiry by Use found in Employee System, User History Inquiry.
  15. New User Permission Flag – Allowed to Export Grids? When this flag is set to No, the User will not be able to export information from Grids throughout the system. This can be changed on a User by User basis in Security System, Enter & Edit User Permissions Screen 4 of 5.
  16. New Security Level Flags – The following flags have been added to Security Levels. Each User is assigned one of ten possible Security Levels. The flags below are located in Entry & Deletion Options screen 2 of 2

    Allowed to Duplicate Products? In the past Duplicating Products used the same security as Enter & Edit Products, now they can be individually set.

    Allowed to Assign Price Table to Inventory? If this flag is set to No Users in the selected Security Level will not be able to run the Program Assign Price Tables to Inventory. This is a powerful program that can change Price Tables to a range of Products

    Allowed to Edit Costs in Receiving? Some users may have access to Costs in Enter and Edit PO’s and Inquiries but you may not want them to have the ability to change Costs when Receiving PO’s. If this flag is set to No they will not be able to accidentally change costs while receiving.

    Allowed to Add Alternates on the Fly – Alternate Product Codes can be entered while in a Sales Order or Purchase Order. If this flag is set to No Users will not have access to this feature.


Release Notes – November 2013 – Order Type Change

» Download Release Notes «

New Order Types

The Business Edge now has the ability to have three different Order Types. Regular Orders, Work Orders and VMI (Vendor Managed Inventory) Orders. This gives us the ability to add new options for Contract Pricing and Sales Analysis. You could have separate Contract pricing for Regular Orders and VMI Orders, or only offer Contract pricing on VMI Orders.

Each Order Type supports all levels of Orders – Quote, Pending Order, Hold Order, Firm Order and RMA.

The new options are:

  • Quote
  • Pending Order
  • Hold Order
  • Firm Order
  • RMA

  • Work Order Quote
  • Pending Work Order
  • Hold Work Order
  • Work Order
  • Work Order RMA

  • VMI Quote
  • VMI Pending Order
  • VMI Hold Order
  • VMI Firm Order
  • VMI RMA

We have combined the two fields into one selection for the user.

When running reports that ask for order types, the types are split out:

Please note that you have to answer yes to at least one question in each section to have any documents show up in the reports


Release Notes – September 2013 – October 2013

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Feature – When entering and editing orders, if there are no products on the order, the system now takes you directly into the detail form to put in a new product – this will save the user from having to click on New Line on every order. This is a universal change to the system.
  2. New Feature/Flag – There is now a way to enter multiple lines on an Order/Quote without having to press Enter or click on New Line. In the graphical interface this is a separate Program found under Documents called Quick Enter & Edit Orders. In the text interface there is a new flag – Use Quick Order Entry in tui found in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry screen 7 of 7.

    When using the new program or when the flag is set to Yes, Users will continually be automatically brought into a New Line. If a User is editing a line in the system it will bring them back to the detail lines. Once done with all of the line items Esc or Ok will take the user back to all of the line items. This speeds up the entry of an order significantly.

  3. New Comment Field – An Internal Comment field has been added to the Enter & Edit Delivery Log. This comment can be viewed in the Delivery Log Inquiry.
  4. New Feature – If your company has the flag set to automatically pop-up open Quotes, it will no longer do so if a User is entering an Order for a Product that has a contract price. This eliminates the possibility of overwriting the Contract Price with a Quoted Price.

Counter Sales System

  1. New Feature – Convert Allocated Order to Counter Sales – In the past Counter Sales would only allow direct entry into the Counter Sales System. This new feature will enable Users to start an Order in Enter & Edit Orders and then convert it into a Counter Sales Order. This enables Users to enter an order and print a pick ticket for later pick-up by the Customer. Once the Order is converted into counter sales it will finish processing like all other counter sales Orders where the payment is integrated into the counter sales system. Payments made by Cash, Check or Credit card get automatically posted to the invoices.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Report – Vendor 12 Month Receipt History – This new report can be generated for any range of Vendors. Users enter a Date representing the 12 Month ending date. Users can choose to sequence the columns from Oldest to Newest or Newest to Oldest. When presented to the screen it can be put into Excel.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Flag – Default P.O. Cost during PPO Receipt Updated – In the past both Purchase Orders and Processing Purchase Orders shared the flag indicating how to update the Costs of the receipts. This new flag enables companies to change the Update default for PPO’s so it can be different than PO’s. The choices are to Update the Default PO Cost with the Raw Cost, Landed Cost or Do not Update. The setting that your company had for PO’s was copied to the new PPO flag. This can be changed in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders, screen 1 of 4.
  2. New Feature – Reverse PPO Status added to Reverse PPO’s. When reversing a PPO there is now a new question on the first screen which enables to User to choose what to do with the PPO that is being reversed. The choices are Received, Sent, Open or to Delete the PPO. This saves extra steps of un-sending for instance if you need to change the PPO before re-sending and re-receiving.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New fields available – The Salesperson Paid Commission Report will now include the Check Number and Date Paid when presented to the screen making it available in Excel.
  2. Default Output change. The flags in Enter & Edit Customers, Invoice and Statement Output have been changed so they are more logical. There is a new question on the screen Batch Processing Output Option replaces the old Send During Batch Processing question.

    The Choices are None, E-mail, Fax, Print, E-mail and Print, Fax & Print, E-mail & Fax. The E-mail addresses and Fax number are still stored in the same screen. All Systems will be upgraded to send invoices that same way you have in the past for each Customer.

  3. New Field – Customer Default PO number in Ship To Address. Default PO Numbers can now be stored in the Customer Address record, enabling Customers to have multiple Default PO Numbers. The Default PO can be entered on the first screen in the Address record. If there is a Default PO in the chosen address it will over-ride the Customer Default PO in the main Customer record. If you would like to utilize this feature you will also want to change the flag below so that the PO gets filled in while the User is on the first screen.
  4. New System Flag – Save One-Time Ship to Address as New Address? When entering a One-Time Ship to Address for a Customer this default answer Yes or No will be defaulted for all users. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags Accounts Receivable.
  5. Flag Change / New Flag – Previously there was a System Flag called Prompt for Ship Address before Order Detail, this has been changed to “when to Prompt for Ship Address”. The choices are Never, When No Default Ship Address or Force for every order.

    There is also a new Flag Where to Prompt for Ship Address, with two options: Customer Selection pop-Up or After First Screen in Order Entry. Selecting an Address before proceeding into the Order insures that the Shipper associated with the Ship to Address is filled in ahead of time as well as the Default PO Number if Uses are utilizing these fields in the Address record.

    The two flags together determine if and when the User gets the automatic screens.

  6. New Flag – Invoice in Process Register-Separate Reports by Branch? If your company has multiple Branches and you answer Yes to this flag, the Invoices in Process Reports can be generated separately for each Branch. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable.

Accounts Payable

  1. Flag activated – The flag in Enter & Edit Vendors – Vendor Part # Required will now prevent Users from selecting an Alternate Part Number on a PO, PPO or Debit Memo if that Alternate Product Code is not related to that Vendor in Enter & Edit Alternate Product Codes. This is a strict flag that can be customized from Vendor to Vendor. If this flag is set to No any Alternate Product Code can be selected on the Vendor Documents.
  2. New Feature – Change History in Vendor Inquiry – Changes made to Vendor Master records can now be viewed in Vendor Inquiry – Basic information – Change History.

Inventory

  1. New Options – The newly re-written Non-Tracking Physical Counts can now be done by Product Code, Descriptions, Class or Alternate Product Code.
  2. New Flag – Allow Deletion of Used Contract Prices? By Default the system does not allow Users to Delete Customer Contract prices that were used. This is so that Contract History can be maintained for your Customers. This new flag will allow Users to removed Contract Prices that have been used. If the contract pricing is removed reporting based on old Contract Prices will not be available. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Inventory – Screen 3 of 4.
  3. Menu Items moved to Tool Bar in graphical Interface. Enter & Edit Transfers has been added to Documents on the Tool Bar. Send and Receive Transfers has been added to Actions on the Tool Bar.
  4. New Feature – Cost Estimates – This is an optional feature that is available at a cost. The new Estimating System
  5. New Feature – Prompt Update of Alternate Descriptions when Product Description is changed. If a User changes the Internal Description on a Product the system will now Prompt with a question – Update Alternate Descriptions. If the User answers Yes all Alternate Descriptions will be updated with the same Description as the Product.

General Ledger

  1. New Inquiry – G.L. Account Trans Inquiry by Update – This new Inquiry will show all transactions in a particular General Ledger Account with the Posting Date and also the Transaction Date. This is very useful if you find that a balance changed and suspect something was back dated.

Utilities

  1. New Security Level Flag – Allowed to Duplicate Products? If this is set to No Users will not be able to use the Duplicate Products feature.
  2. New Feature – Graphical Interface only. Lock Users after failed login – The system will now lock a User out of the system if they login incorrectly nine times. An e-mail will be sent to the User setup as the System Administrator in Enter & Edit Entity – Notifications. The Administrator can unlock or lock workstations in the Workstation Inquiry found in System Administrator.
  3. New Report – Failed Outbound Document History – The report options include User (choose a specific user or all) and a Date Range. It will show all the documents that were e-mailed or faxed that do not have “Sent” as their status. This will include submitted documents. It will not include failed faxes/e-mails when the document was successfully re-sent.
  4. New – Pop-up Notification When logging into the text interface, this report will show the user their failed documents for yesterday and today. When logging into the GUI, this report will open a new tab to show the user their failed documents for yesterday and today. “Yesterday and Today” on Monday means Friday, Saturday, Sunday, and Monday.

Release Notes – February 2013 – August 2013

» Download Release Notes «

Graphical Interface

  1. Additional Information Grids have been added throughout the system. Users can choose which information grids they would like to see on their screen by clicking on Optional Information button on the bottom left side of the screen. The Product Inquiry now has 20 different choices.
  2. Displaying Optional Information Grids – The system will now check the screen resolution before displaying the Optional Information Grids. If the resolution is too low or the screen is too small the Optional Grids will not display, the system automatically sets the User Flag – Show Optional Information Grids to No.

    If there appears to be room the system will attempt to guess at how many columns can fit. Users can then change the column width and or choose what columns to view. When an optional information grid is created for the first time (per user) it makes a guess at when it will run out of space and hides columns after that.

  3. New Feature – Enable/Disable Auto-Expanding Columns – Users now have the ability to enable and disable auto-expanding columns within informational grids. This feature allows users to choose to auto-expand the informational grid columns to take up all available space (default behavior), or to display grid columns at the exact width the user specifies.
  4. New Feature – My Menu – Each Users My Menu is located on the bottom of the system menus on the left side of the screen. Users can now customize their own menu adding Individual programs and or sub-folders. This enables Users to categorize their often used programs in their own Menu System.

    When you right click on My Menu there is an option to Create New Menu, after clicking on this a window will pop up to Add New Folder – type in what you would like to name the folder. Some examples might be Order Reports, Sales Reports, A/R and A/P. Once the new folders have been created, folders or programs from within the main menu system can be dragged into the appropriate folder. When dragging an item to your folders look for the green check to indicate that your mouse is in the right position to release the mouse click.

    Someone in accounting might want to put the Cash Receipts System and Checks by Date and the Customer and Vendor aging reports in their Accounting Menu. Someone in purchasing may have their own Purchasing Menu that has the ARS System and purchasing reports that they use on a regular basis.

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Flag – Internal Reference Required. If you are utilizing the Internal Reference field on the Heading Screen of a Sales Order, this new flag can enforce that users put in the required information. The options for this flag are Not Required, Always Required and Required in Allocation. The default is Not Required. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags Order Entry, screen 7 of 7.
  2. New Option– Customer Blind Drop Shipments – In the past when you wanted to ship product to one of your Customers Customer as a blind shipment you would enter your Customers name and address in the entity file.

    This new procedure does not require editing the entity file. On the Final screen of an Order in the graphical interface – Click on Order Options under the Options section and change the Blind Ship Order for Customer Flag to Yes. This will automatically print the Customers Bill to Name on the Heading of the Packing List.

    In the text interface Order Options are located in F5-Addresses.

  3. New Flag – Automatic Mark Delivery Log Out/Delivered? When using the Order Delivery System and when this flag is set to Yes the system will allow you to skip two steps in the delivery system. Deliveries will no longer need to be marked as out on Delivery or as Delivered. This allows you to go directly to Close Delivery Log and Create Invoices. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags Order Entry – screen 7 of 7. If this process works within your procedures it will speed up the billing process significantly.

Purchase Order System

  1. In the ARS System, when you create a P.O. for Brighton Best and you are setup with the Brighton Best Connection the P.O. will no longer print, fax or e-mail their P.O.s when you complete the ARS process. The system will tell the User to submit the P.O. to Brighton Best and put the P.O. in the Users recent list. If the User has a Brighton Best P.O. as part of a list of P.O.’s being processed the BBI P.O. will be skipped when sending the others. If the user uses Create 1 PO they will not have the options of Printing, Faxing or e-mailing the BBI P.O.

    Then, the user can then go into E&E Purchase Orders, bring up the PO, and then use F10=CV BBI / Convert BBI PO to convert it to a BBI PO and then submit the PO electronically.

  2. New Feature – If your company has the documentConnection scanning feature in The BUSINESS EDGE, documents attached to Products can now be attached to an RFQ. In the graphical interface the button for dC Attachments is in the Options. In the text interface it is F9 on the Detail line.
  3. New Feature – Use FOB File for PO’s/PPO’s. If you would like Users to select an FOB on a PO from a file of pre-setup options versus typing in whatever the User wants to type that is now possible. There is a flag located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 4 of 4 – Use FOB. Before changing this flag clients that are live on the system will need to have Computer Insights run a program to preserve the FOB’s in existing PO’s. Please call Software Support to have this done.

    FOB’s are stored in the same file used for Customer Orders and can be Entered and Edited in Accounts Receivable File Maintenance, Shippers, FOB’s and Package Sizes.

  4. New Flag – Use Vendor Contacts for Salesman Lookup – on the Heading screen of Enter & Edit Po’s there is a field for Salesperson. If you would like the system to store the contacts that can be selected here from the Vendor Contact file this flag should be set to Yes. If this flag is set to No, Users can type in anything they would like and it will only be stored in the PO record.
  5. New Feature – When a User Closes a Purchase Order, the system will now prompt the User for the reason it was closed. When in a PO Inquiry, the Document Status will indicate that it was closed and the user that closed it. The reason can be viewed in the Final Message screen.
  6. New Feature – Open Closed PO – In the past when a Purchase Order was closed it could not be re-opened. The system will now prompt the User to open a new revision. If PO 1000 was closed and the User chooses to Open it again the system will create PO 1000-01 as a duplicate of PO 1000.
  7. New Field on report – Re-Order Point Report – When this report is presented to the screen to export to Excel it will now include the last Vendor your company received a PO from.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Flag – Non Tracked Products Only – Create/Rcv Auto PPOs in Alloc All when Needed. When this flag is set to Yes the system will automatically create and update PPO’s for products on Sales Orders that have Bill of Materials setup when the Allocate All option is used in Allocate Inventory. There has to be enough stock on hand to create the Product. After the Automatic Send and Receive of the Product the system will then allocated the line item. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Screen 7 of 7.

Accounts Receivable

  1. Menu Change – The Print & Fax Invoice Menu has changed – All of the In-Process routines are now consolidated in a single menu – Invoices In Process. This is where you will find Print Invoices in Process, Fax Invoices In Process and Send Invoices in Process. This change was made to accommodate some new EDI processes.
  2. New Feature – Commission Minimum Gross Profit – When paying Commission based on percentage of Sales. Salespeople can now be setup so that they will only receive commissions if the gross profit is over a certain percentage. The commission is figured on a line by line basis. This new field is in Enter & Edit Salespersons – Commisisons and can be setup differently for each Salesperson if needed.
  3. New Feature – Contested Invoices – Customer Invoices can be marked as Contested – indicating there is a problem/dispute with a particular invoice. When an invoice is marked as contested the User can type in a note as to what the issue is with that particular invoice. Then when viewing the customer invoices in a Customer Inquiry or Cash Receipts there will be and indicator (!) to the left of the invoice so Users can easily identify contested invoices.

    Invoices can be marked as Contested in two places. In a Customer Inquiry, Open Invoices, highlight the invoice and in the graphical interface the Contested button is under Options, in the text interface it is F4. This can also be done in Edit Posted Invoices located in AR Invoice Routines.

    When choosing the contested option there are 4 choices – None, Mark Contested, Remove Contested, Remove Contested/Notes.

  4. New information on Sales Journal – When producing the Sales Journal by Date and choosing Screen as the output, it will be presented in a scroll box/grid. Columns have been added for Number of Line items per order and Total Weight. If you are using the graphical interface you may choose these columns when viewing the information on the screen. In both interfaces when the information is sent to Excel you these columns will be included.
  5. New User Flag – Aging Date to Age By – Users can default how they would like the Accounts Receivable Aging to default. The choices are Invoice Date or Due Date. The normal default is Invoice Date. This new flag is located in User Flags – Accounts Receivable – Aging Flags.
  6. Menu Consolidation – A new Menu was created in the Customer Activity Report Menu. The new Last Sale Activity Menu now contains the Customer Last Activity Report, Customer Last Sales Detail Report and Product Last Sale Inquiry.
  7. New Report – Salesperson – Customer – Inventory Analysis – This new report was customized for a particular client so it cannot be changed. This report is designed to provide Salespeople with information pertaining to their customers. It gives visibility to what their customers are purchasing as well as the stock status – On hand, On PO, Lead Time and Usage. This report can be generated for any range of Salespeople and Customers. The report asks for an As of Date and will include products the customer purchase in the 12 previous months.
  8. Additional information on Aging – Extra fields have been added to the Accounts Receivable Aging Report. Payment Terms and Accounts Payable Contact have been added next to the Customer Name. A new column was also added for Days which is the number of Days the Invoice Date is open from the date the report is generated.

Accounts Payable

  1. New report option – When using Process Checks by Date the Invoices Prepared for Payment report now has a new question – Print Accrued Documents. If this is answered yes when the report is printed to paper it will list the Accrued PO Documents that were selected on the invoices you have chosen for payment. This will only show when printed to paper.

Inventory

  1. New Feature – Sort Transfer Lines – If you have multiple branches and transfer Products between branches – this new feature may be helpful. After entering a Transfer in the system there is a new option on the Final Screen – Sort Detail Lines. This works the same way as sorting other documents like the Order. Line items on the Transfer can be re-numbered or sorted by Product Code, Description, Classification, Alternate or Default Location. Once a Transfer has been “sent” it cannot be re-sorted.
  2. New Flag – All Product Partial Matches During Selection? When this flag is set to Yes and Users are looking up a product the system will show all items that begin with the characters typed in even when there is an exact match. The default to this flag is No so that the system operates as it did previously – when an exact match it entered that Product is selected. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Inventory.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Report feature – Salesperson Sales and Profit report will now be presented in a scroll box/grid when selecting output to Screen. If you would like to view the full report on the screen simply choose Adobe as output and it will appear in report format on the screen.
  2. New Report feature – Customer Activity Variance Report – This report will now be presented in a scroll box/grid when selecting output to Screen so that it can be exported to Excel.

Utilities

  1. Previously forms had an option to include an attachment to be sent along with the form when utilizing PDF forms. An example might be including the signed Packing List with the Invoice after it is scanned into the system using documentConnection. There are now flags with each document where the system can be setup to include the attached document when different output is selected. The attachment could be included when the document is faxed or e-mailed but not when it is printed.

ISO / Quality System

  1. The Country file has been replaced with a more sophisticated file structure. This was done so that Users can put the ISO Code for the country in the file which is a requirement for EDI transactions. There is now a recent list options for countries as well.

Vendor Managed Inventory

VMI/Mobile Application

  1. New Feature – When using the VMI Scanning system Users can now do a partial lookup on Products if they are looking for a product manually instead of scanning a barcode.
  2. New Feature – The system can now be setup so that Salespeople can only view their customers. This is setup in VMI Mobile User Access to Customer located in Web and VMI Flags.

Credit Card Integration

  1. The BUSINESS EDGE now offers secure Credit Card Integration with Marathon Systems. Click on this link for more details: http://www.ci-inc.com/marathon-credit-card-integration/

Release Notes – September 2012 – January 2013

» Download Release Notes «

Graphical Interface

  1. New Feature – Multiple Window support – Users that have multiple monitors or would like to run multiple copies of the graphical interface at the same time can now do this with this new feature. Any item in the menu or tool bar can be launched in its own window by right clicking on the item and selecting “Open in New Window”.
  2. New Feature – Re-organizing My Tasks – Users can now re-organize their My Tasks Menu. Click on My Tasks to display the items you selected to be in your personal Menu. Right Click on an item and choose Move Up, or Move Down to change the Order of your tasks. Users can also right click on and item and drag it to a different location in their My Tasks.
  3. New Inquiry and additional information. There is a new version of the Product Inquiry called Product Inquiry-Expert. This new inquiry is available under Inquiries from the Tool Bar. The first screen of this inquiry has different information including Stocking and Usage information. In both Product Inquiries, users will now have additional information available which is optional. This includes Product Sales History, Recent Sales, Recent Receipts, Open Documents, and Lot Tracking Availability. Users may have to adjust screen resolution to view all of the information easily. Next to each of the categories there are (+) that users can click on to see all of the transactions in each category. This additional information can be turned on or off with a User flag found in Edit, General Flags, Show Additional Information Grids. Users that do not have a large screen may not want this flag turned on.
  4. New Information added to Customer Inquiry – The system will now display additional information on the first screen of the Customer Inquiry. This includes Sales History, Recent Invoices, an Aging of their Open Invoices as well as Recent Payments. Clicking on the + in the top right hand corner of each category will show additional detail for each category. This is an option and can be turned on and off by changing a User Flag. To change this flag, click on Edit, General Flags, Show additional Information Grids can be set to Yes or No. This additional information can be turned on or off with a User flag found in Edit, General Flags, and Show Additional Information Grids. Users that do not have a large screen may not want this flag turned on.
  5. New Information added to Vendor Inquiry – The system will now display additional information on the first screen of the Vendor Inquiry. This includes Recent Invoices, Aging and Recent Payments. Clicking on the + in the top right hand corner of each category will show additional detail for each category. This is an option and can be turned on and off by changing a User Flag. To change this flag, click on Edit, General Flags, Show additional Information Grids can be set to Yes or No. This additional information can be turned on or off with a User flag found in Edit, General Flags, Show Additional Information Grids. Users that do not have a large screen may not want this flag turned on.
  6. New information added to Sales Order Detail Lines – The system will now display on the detail line – Customer Recent Product Sales, Lot Tracking Detail, Product Notes and Recent Sales to all Customers. Clicking on the + in the top right hand corner of each category will show additional detail for each category. This additional information can be turned on or off with a User flag found in Edit, General Flags, Show Additional Information Grids. Users that do not have a large screen may not want this flag turned on.
  7. New Feature – My Options – The My Options menu is a feature recently added to The BUSINESSEDGE 2.0 which allows you to create your own options menu for quicker access to your commonly run options. The My Options menu is located at the far right area of every task/tab and is always the last menu in the list. You can add any of the options on the right to the My Options by simply dragging the item and dropping it on the My Options menu or right clicking on the option you would like to add.

    You can view your My Options menu by clicking the My Options bar on the right or by pressing the Hot Key combination ALT-0. This will expand the My Options menu and display all the available options.

    When you add an item to the My Options menu the item is automatically added to the bottom of the My Options menu and assigned a Hot Key combination from F1 – F12. You can organize the My Options menu items to appear in the order you want by dragging and dropping items on one another. The dragged item will appear above the item that it was dropped on and the Hot Key combination will be updated. You can also reorganize your list by right-clicking on a item and selecting “Move Up” or “Move Down”. To remove an item from the My Options menu right-click on it and select “Remove Item”.

  8. New Options for new information added to screens – Many screens now have optional additional information available as explained above. Some of the information may not apply to all Companies. Users can now re-organize the information by dragging and dropping with their mouse. Users can hide information they do not want to see. If your company does not use Price Tables for instance, that information can be removed, by right clicking on the heading and clicking on Hide. On the bottom left of each screen there is a button for Optional Information, Users can check or un-check items here as well. If an area was set to hide, it can be displayed again by clicking on the box in the Optional Information. Each of the information grids can also be customized as in other areas by sizing the columns as well as choosing which columns you would like displayed.

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New System – Customer Promotional Pricing – This new system enables you to select Customers that are eligible for Special Pricing on select Products for a defined time period.

    There is a new Question in the Customer Master File as well as the Customer Default file for new Customers. In Enter & Edit Customers, Additional Information the new question is Allow Promotional Prices. If this is set to Yes the Customer will receive special pricing based on the Promotional Prices entered.

    Promotional Prices are entered in Inventory File Maintenance, Selling Price Maintenance, Promotion Price Maintenance. There are two menu items, Enter & Edit Promotions and List Promotions.

    In Enter & Edit Promotions a Promotion Code is entered. An example might be a Nov2012, the description would be November 2012. Items are then entered along with the Price, Beginning Date and Ending Date. The list can be edited at any time by selecting the Promotion Code. Customers that are set to receive the Promotional Pricing will automatically receive the special price for the time period indicated in the Promotional pricing. The promotional pricing is based on the Order Date.

    Multiple Promotions can be maintained with different Promotion Codes. If you have a new promotion starting in the future you simply make the Beginning Date a future Date.

    When an Order is entered the system checks to see if there is a price table for the specific Customer and Product, if so they will get that price. Then the system will check to see if there is a promotion, if there is the price table price will be over-ridden by the Promotional Price. The system will then check to see if the Customer has contract pricing for the item and if they do that will over-ride the Promotional Price.

  2. New System Flag – Show Customer Pick/Pack Inst in Order Entry? When this is set to Yes Users will see the following:

    In a detail line in F6=Comments (GUI F3=Comments), you will see three lines of the customer’s Picking Instruction and 3 lines of the Packing Instruction. In the GUI, you will see both in their entirety, as well as the Order Heading Instructions.

    In Final Order and Pick Instructions, you will see two lines of the customer’s Picking Instructions and Packing instructions in the TUI. In the GUI, you will see both in their entirety and also the Order Heading Instructions.

    There is also a new Fkey in the Detail Line Comments and Final Comments that will let you view the Customer’s Comments (Order Heading Instructions, Picking Instructions, and Packing Instructions).

  3. Report Addition – When running the Open Orders by Customer Report to the screen, totals will now be presented in the heading.
  4. New Feature – There are now new options to change the One Time Ship to Address on a Sales Order. These options are located in Addresses, One Time Ship To – the new selections are Entity and Vendor.
  5. New Feature – Re-Price Orders – Sales Orders can now be re-priced based on current selling prices based on price tables, contract prices or special prices. This can be useful if an Order is duplicated or imported and the current prices are not up to date. When in an Order at the Detail lines there is an fkey/button to Re-price/Update Sell Prices.
  6. New Flag – Limit Lot Tracking on PDF Picking Ticket to – For companies that are Lot Tracking and Printing available lots on the pick ticket, this new flag will limit the number of Lot/Location’s printed on the Picking Ticket. The default is to Show All and a percentage such as 10% can be entered here so that products with an abundance of stock locations will be limited. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry – Screen 7 of 7.
  7. New Flag – Orders – Price Change Option – When a quantity is changed on a Sales Order some companies would like the price to reflect the new quantity, other companies do not want to change the price automatically. This new Flag enables companies to choose how they want the system to handle pricing when the quantity on an order is changed. The choices are Confirm Change, Don’t Change or Change Automatically. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry Screen 4.
  8. New Flag – Send Shipping Confirmation to Contact after Invoice Created – This new flag only applies to companies that have the Integrated UPS feature. If this flag is set to Yes the Contact assigned to the Sales Order can receive a copy of the Packing List with the UPS Tracking Numbers. This only applies to PDF forms and regular orders; it is not used for Counter Sales Orders. If you would like to utilize this new feature the Packing List format will need to be changed to include the UPS Tracking Information – normal hourly charges would apply to the form changes.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Warning – When in Print Purchase Orders if the User chooses to print more than 24 Purchase Orders at one time they will not receive a warning.
  2. New System Flag – Warn Zero Quantity on PO? When this flag is set to Yes Users will get a warning when they do not enter a Quantity on a Purchase Order. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags Purchase Orders.
  3. ARS – The graphical interface will now work the same way as the text interface when pulling up existing batches. After preparing documents when a User goes into Select Documents for Products they will automatically go into the batch they most recently created. If a User wants to go into a previously prepared batch they can do so by going into Auto Replenishment Maintenance, Open Batch Inquiry. Click or enter on the batch you would like to make the active batch. When the user returns to Select Documents for Products the selected Batch will now be the Active Batch.
  4. New Report Feature – Open Request for Quote Report – There is a new option to include detail on this report. This report is located in Vendor Request for Quote System, Request for Quotes Reports.
  5. New System Flag – Show PO Message Screen before Final Screen – If this flag is set to Yes, Users will have an additional screen in Enter & Edit PO’s before proceeding to the final screen. This new screen will provide the opportunity to type in a Final Message, Special Note Comment or enter a Receiving Location for that particular PO. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 4. The default answer will be No.
  6. New System Flag – P.O’s Change Vendor-Update Detail Alternates – When this flag is set to Yes and a User changes the Vendor on a PO the system will update the Alternate Product Codes to match the new Vendor. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 4. The default answer will be No.
  7. New System Flag – P.O’s Change Vendor-Update Detail Costs – When this flag is set to Yes and a User changes the Vendor on a PO, the system will update the Costs on the PO based on the new Vendors Contract Costs. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders screen 4. The default answer will be No.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Report Location – The PPO Receiving Document can now be accessed from the Processing PO Menu, Print & Fax Processing PO’s. The Faxing options have been consolidated to allow for this menu addition. In the past you could only print a PPO Receiving Document from within the document.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Inquiry – Customer Inventory Report – This report enables Users to select a specific customer and list all products that have an alternate product code for that customer. There is an option to only include items that are either on hand or on PO. The fields included are Customer Code, Customer Name, Product Code, Quantity On Hand, Quantity on PO, Description and Alternate Product Code. This report can be viewed on the screen or exported to Excel. This new inquiry is located in Customer Sales Analysis, More Customer Sales Analysis. This report was created custom for a client so it cannot be changed.
  2. New Feature – You can now send a Packing List to Order Contact during the Invoicing process. There is a new System flag – Send Shipping Confirmation to Contact after Invoice Creation – When this flag is set to Yes, and the order has a contact assigned to it with a valid e-mail address, then the system will pop-up an e-mail screen after the invoice is created to send the packing list to the order contact. If there is no valid e-mail address, but the fax is valid, then the user will be prompted to fax the packing list to the order contact. If there is no contact, or the contact has no e-mail or fax, then the system does not prompt to send the packing list. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable.
  3. New Flag – Print Invoice Detail on Invoice in Process Register? If you normally would like the Invoices in Process Register to include the Detail this flag can be set to Yes. This way the User does not have to remember to change the answer each time the report is generated. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Field – Graphical interface only – When selecting Accrued Documents while entering a Vendor Invoice the Vendor Sales Order field will now be a column that Users can chose to see on the screen. This may be helpful when matching up Invoices with Purchase Orders that have Backorders.
  2. New Feature – The System can now e-mail and/or instant message specified Users when a check run or deposit is updated. The e-mail will come from the User logged in the system when the check or deposit is updated. The Users that receive the email are setup in Enter & Edit Entity – Notifications.
  3. New System – Send ACH Payments – If your company is sending Vendors ACH payments this new system will enable you to Fax, E-mail or Print ACH Advices to send to your Vendors. The Vendors method of delivery is setup in Enter & Edit Vendors. After creating a batch of checks the advices can be sent out in the new ACH Remittance Advices Menu below. They can be sent individually or in a batch similar to the way Customer Invoices are sent. Detailed instructions can be found in our tips located at www.ci-inc.com/tips under Accounts Payable.
    Accounts Payable System
    	Check Routines & Reconciliation
    		Process Individual Checks
    			Print AP Checks
    				ACH Remittance Advices
    				
  4. New Feature – Merge Vendor History – This new feature will enable Users to merge history for two vendors into one. This is useful if you would like to combine two vendors into one or if you would like to merge old vendors you do not want to have in the system anymore into one obsolete vendor. All Purchase and Payment History will be merged into the Main Vendor. Optionally Alternate Product Codes, Unique Contact Prices, Notes, Addresses and Contacts can be merged into the Primary Vendor. This process cannot be reversed.

    This new feature is located in Accounts Payable, Vendor Misc. Maintenance, Merge Vendor History.

Inventory

  1. New Column in Open Documents (Graphical Interface Only) – When viewing Open Documents there is a new column that can be included by clicking on the Heading screen and then Columns. The new field will represent the Total Quantity on Orders – this will include Open, Allocated and Reserved Quantities.
  2. New Field in Inquiry – In a Product Inquiry when viewing RFQ’s there is now an additional field that can be chosen in the graphical interface – Vendor Reference from the heading of the Request for Quote screen.
  3. Menu Change – There are multiple menu items that can be used to increase/decrease Cost and List prices in ranges. These five menu items have been consolidated into a single menu located in Inventory File Maintenance, Selling Price Maintenance, Assign Changes to Inventory.
  4. New Flag for Expert Product Inquiry – Text interface only – Expert Product Inquiry Qty Shown as – When viewing product that is on documents due to ship or be received the system can present this information either grouped by document or as In/Out and Available Quantities. This is a system flag located in Entity & System Flags – inventory, Screen 4.
  5. New Menu Options – Adjust Using License Plate & Split License Plate. The License Plate is the internal tracking number used with the Wireless Warehouse. These options were only previously available on the Wireless scanners. They will enable users to type in a License Plate and either adjust or split it into two license plates. These options are available in Inventory File Maintenance, Lot Tracking Maintenance.
  6. Menu Change – Edit Product Lot Cost has been moved to Inventory File Maintenance, Lot Tracking Maintenance. This item was previously in the Inventory Menu.
  7. New information – When Product is Reserved with the new Order Reservation System, the reserved quantity will now be included along with any allocated quantity when looking at Lot Tracking Detail or Allocated Inventory screens.
  8. New Flag – Comment to Use for Open Documents – When viewing Open Documents in a Product Inquiry there are now options of what information to show for Open Purchase Orders in the Comment column. The choices are Final Message, Line Comment or Schedule Line Comment. This flag can be changed in Entity & System Flags – Inventory. The default is the line comment for the Order line.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Report – Customer Inventory Report – This new report can be generated for a specific Customer and will only include Product that has an Alternate Product Code for that Customer. After selecting the Customer there is an option to only include Products that are either on-hand or on P.O. The columns included are Customer Name, Customer Code, Product Code, Customer Product Code, Product Description, Quantity On Hand, and Quantity on Po.

Utilities – documentConnection

  1. New Feature – Vendor Documents can now be scanned into the Vendor Record in Vendor Inquiry – Choose Images & Faxes and then Scan Vendor Documents.
  2. New Feature – Default Output method is now available for all Documents. Each document can be defaulted the most common way you sent them out. If you typically Fax Order Acknowledgments and Email Purchase Orders the system can be setup to default with those selections.

    The System default is Paper and each document can be changed in the document setup which is located in the menu below.

    Utilities
    	System Administrator System
    		System Set Up
    			Miscellaneous Setup
    				Entity & System Flags
    					Document Flags
    						Document Form Numbers

    Once in Document Form Numbers, click on Form Options and select the document you would like to change. Enter or Click on the document type and the first question is Default Output to. You can choose from Paper, Adobe, Fax or E-mail. If you would like assistance making these changes simply call our Customer Support team.

ISO / Quality System

  1. New Feature – Users can now enter a reason the Customer Order was late. There is a new input screen where possible reasons for being late can be entered. This is located in Quality Assurance System Setup, Scorecard Setup. Then when viewing the Customer Scorecard report, Users can drill into a late entry and choose the reason that it was late. This might be that the product was out of stock for instance.

    There is also a “Late items” button from the main Customer Scorecard Report screen that shows all late items for all customers for the time period.Users can drill into each of those to enter the reason why the item was late and also use the Pareto Report Button to analyze why orders are late:


Release Notes – November 2011 – August 2012

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Flag – Orders-Calculate Unit Cost from BOM? If this flag is set to Yes and a Product that is added to an Order has a Bill of Material, the system will calculate the current cost based on the Default PO Cost of the components in the Bill of Material. The cost that will be used for purposes of Posting to the General Ledger will be the actual Cost at the time the Product is allocated. This gives the User a more realistic idea of the cost of the product when adding it to an order. The default for this flag is Yes. This Flag can be changed in Entity Flags – Order Entry.
  2. New System Flag – Skip Backorder Screen with Tracked Products? Companies that Track Lots/Locations on Products can now skip the Backorder screen when Allocating Orders when there is no backorder. Unless you need to change order prices or add line comments during the allocation process this flag should be set to yes to reduce keystrokes and speed up the allocation process.
  3. New System Flag – Default Quote Output – This flag should be set to the most common method used companywide to send out Quotes when in Order/Quote entry. In the past the default Output was automatically set to Paper. If you tend to Fax or E-mail more than print a Quote this flag should be changed. Users still have the option of changing it on the fly when processing a Quote. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry Flags, Screen 5 of 6.
  4. New System Flag – Default Sales Order Output – This flag should be set to the most common method used companywide to send out Sales Order Acknowledgements when in Order/Quote entry. In the past the default Output was automatically set to Paper. If you tend to Fax or E-mail more than print an Order Acknowledgement, this flag should be changed. Users still have the option of changing it on the fly when processing an Order. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry Flags, Screen 5 of 6.
  5. New System Flag – Allocate Orders in Order Entry – If your procedure is to Allocate Orders before printing a Pick Ticket, this new flag may speed up the Order entry process. When this flag is set to Yes, after each line is added to an order the User is automatically brought into an Allocation Screen where that line can be allocated. This way each line is allocated as it is entered instead of allocating as a separate process on the final screen. The default for this flag is no. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  6. New System Flag – Use Order Internal Reference in TUI? – An additional Sales Order Heading field has been added to the graphical interface. This field can also be used in the Text interface if this flag is set to yes and if there is enough room to add an additional field. This is simply an open field that can be used for any purpose. If you would like to have this field print on forms those changes would be billable at our normal hourly rate. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  7. New System Flag – Use Order Job # in TUI? – An additional Sales Order Heading field has been added to the graphical interface. This field can also be used in the Text interface if this flag is set to yes and if there is enough room to add an additional field. This is simply an open field that can be used for any purpose. If you would like to have this field print on forms those changes would be billable at our normal hourly rate. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  8. New Feature – FOB System – If you would like to print an FOB on your Sales Orders, Invoices and or Purchasing Documents, there is now an FOB System. In the Text interface this can be used on the Purchase Order and can only be used on a Sales Order if there is enough space on the Heading Screen. There is a flag that is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6, if this flag Use FOB is set to yes the field will be available and the FOB Codes can be setup in Accounts Receivable File Maintenance, Shippers & FOB.
  9. New System Flag – Warn Packing List not Allocated? If this new flag is set to Yes and a User prints a Packing List they will receive a warning that the Order has not been allocated. . This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  10. New System Flag – Prompt to Print Acknowledgment After Order? – If you always send and Order Acknowledgement to your customers you may want to turn this flag on for convenience. After entering an Order the Print Order Acknowledgement will pop up automatically, every time a User enters an Order. If they do not want to print the document they can cancel out of the print screen. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  11. New System Flag – Prompt to Print Quote After Quote? – If you always send a Quote out after entering it you may want to turn this flag on for convenience. After entering a Quote the Output Quote will pop up automatically, every time a User enters a Quote. If they do not want to print the document they can cancel out of the print screen. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  12. New System Flag – Prompt to Print Pick Ticket After Order? – If you always print a Picking Ticket after entering an Order, you may want to turn this flag on for convenience. After entering an Order the Output Picking Ticket screen will pop up automatically, every time a User enters an Order. If they do not want to print the document they can cancel out of the print screen. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  13. New System Flag – Prompt to Packing List After Allocation? – If you always print a Packing List after Allocating an Order, you may want to turn this flag on for convenience. After allocating an order the Output Picking Ticket screen will pop up automatically, every time a User allocates an Order. If they do not want to print the document they can cancel out of the print screen. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Screen 6 of 6.
  14. New Report – Order Fulfillment Time Report – This report allows you to view all orders for any date range. The Order Fulfillment Time Report will show you the total orders entered for the time period selected as well as the time elapsed between the time the Order was entered and Invoiced. The information in the data grid can be exported to Excel and in the graphical interface, the screen can be customized to show the following columns: Order Date, Order Number, Customer, Order entered by/time/total, Pick ticket printed by/date/time, Released to wireless warehouse by/date/time, Pack list printed by/date/time, Invoice created by/date/time.

    This new report is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Order Analysis reports.

  15. New Feature – Lot Reservation – This new feature allows users to reserve specific Lots for a specific Sales Order in the system. This would replace Allocating an Order to reserve stock. When an order is Allocated there are restrictions such as you cannot edit an allocated order, and it is considered an Allocated Order which will not show up in certain reports or inquiries unless you specify to include Allocated Orders.

    To reserve lots on an order there is button/function key in the sales order detail line. You have the option to reserve or un-reserve lots as well as view the lot details of each available lot. Once a quantity is reserved to a specific line item, it cannot be reserved or allocated to another order.

    When Allocating an Order the system will allocate the reserved inventory for that particular line item.

  16. New Report – Order Exception Report – This report will show you any orders that have a cost or sell that is less than zero. The Order Exception Report can be modified to your discretion to show allocated/unallocated orders and orders which the cost/sell is less than zero. The information in the data grid can be exported to Excel or in the graphical interface the screen can be customized to show the following columns: Order Number, Line Number, Customer, Product Code, Description, Quantity Shipped, Sell, and Cost. This new report is located in the Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Allocated Order Reports
  17. New Report – Lines Allocated by User – This new report can be generated for any Date Range and can be used as a gauge for the productivity of personnel. It will present the number or Orders/PO’s/PPO’s and inspections by User for the Date range selected. The information will be presented to the screen and can be exported to Excel. In the graphical interface the columns on the screen can be customized to show the following columns: User, Order lines, PPO lines, Received PPO lines and inspections. This new report is located in the Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, and Allocated Reports.
  18. New Report – Shipping Summary by Customer – This new report can be generated for any range of Dates and/or Customers. It will present in summary form all of the Orders that are open for the Date Range selected based on the Date Requested on the Orders. When generating this report the Beginning Date should be entered as far as you could have an un-shipped Order if you would like to capture late orders. Users can choose to include Quotes, All Order Types, RMA’s, and Work orders. Additional options include Zero Work Orders and Consider Allocated Open. The information can be printed, exported to Excel or Adobe. In the graphical interface, the data grid can be customized to show the following columns: Customer, Order Date, Order Number, Date Requested, Ship Via, Order Total, Customer Code and Salesperson. The Shipping Summary by Customer report is located in the Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Scheduling & Expediting Reports, Shipping Schedules by Customer.
  19. New Inquiry – Open Orders Ship Schedule Inquiry – This new Inquiry can be generated for any Date Range and any Range of Customers. Designed as a custom report it cannot be changed but may be useful if you are trying to expedite a specific Customers Orders. This Inquiry will present all line items scheduled to ship in the Date Range selected sorted by Customer, Product Code and Order Number. The data can be put into Excel for further sorting. The fields that are include are Order Number, Order Date, Date Requested, Customer PO #, Quantity on the Order, Quantity On Hand, PO Number or “various” if it is on an Open PO, Vendor if it is on a single PO, Quantity on PO and PO Cost.
  20. New Options in Merge Orders – buttons/function keys have been added to Select all Orders and De-Select all Orders.
  21. New System – Free Freight for Customers – You must be using the Shipper System in order to use this new system. The flag to turn this system on is Use Customer Free Freight System which is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable.

    This new system allows you to set up customers up with a Free Freight amount for Orders Over a specified dollar value. The system will check each order total against this amount and decide whether or not it needs to automatically charge freight on the invoice. If an order total is over the customer’s free freight amount, it is flagged to receive free freight and the free freight will carry over to all back orders as well. If the order total is less than or equal to the customer’s free freight amount and the shipper freight terms are Prepaid – the order is flagged to automatically put the freight charge on the invoice.

    When this flag is set to yes – the Free Freight for Orders Over amount will appear in Enter & Edit Customers – Additional Information in the graphical interface and in Additional Information, More in the text interface. This field is also protected by User Security so you can limit which Users can adjust this amount.

    There is also a system flag – Create Inv-Force Frt Charge on Prepaid Orders? When this is set to Yes, it will force users to enter freight charges in the (prepaid) shipper(s) before the order is invoiced (if the shipper is not UPS). That is the key to getting correct freight charges on the invoices. The orders with UPS shippers will pull the freight charges from the ups system at the time the invoice is created so they do not need to be entered manually. If the order is flagged to bill freight, the system will use the shipper freight charges entered to calculate the invoice’s freight charge.

    In Enter & Edit Shippers there is an option to give the shipper a Default Freight Amount (excluding UPS). If there is a default freight amount on a shipper, it will fill in the freight amount on the order when the user selects the shipper.

    It the order/invoice is flagged for free freight – the invoice will either not show the freight/shipping charge at all, or it will show what the freight/shipping charge actually was and then show the shipping allowance to show that the customer will not have to pay for it.

  22. New Feature – Order Delivery System – The Order Delivery System can be used to create delivery logs for in-house drivers and automate the Invoicing Process based on the Orders being delivered. Sales Orders must be allocated before they can be added to a Delivery Log.

    Before using this system Drivers and Trucks need to be setup in the Order Delivery System. Delivery Logs can then be created by selecting the Driver, Truck and the Orders that you would like to include on the log. Logs are assigned an internal number starting with 10000. Only Orders that are allocated and not invoiced can be added to a log.

    Delivery Logs can be assigned 4 statuses from within the Order Delivery System Menu which is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Expediting & Delivery, Order Delivery System.

    In Process – The log is in process and has not been marked for delivery

    Out for Delivery – The Orders are being delivered

    Delivered – The Orders have been delivered

    Closed – The log is closed and can no longer be changed.

    There are two options when closing the Delivery Log. Close Delivery Log and Create Invoices or Close Delivery Log. If you choose to just close the log, the orders must be manually invoiced.

  23. New System Flag – Comment to use for Open Documents – When viewing the Open Documents for a product the default Comment field is the Line Comment on the order. This can be changed to be the Schedule Line Comment by changing this flag. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Inventory.

Purchase Order System

  1. New System Flag – When reversing a PO Receipt there are choices to make the PO and Open Purchase order or Received Status. The default has been changed to Open Purchase Order since that seems to be the most common choice. This flag can be changed in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders.
  2. New System Flag – Auto Show PO Received Back Order Screen? If this flag is set to Yes, when receiving a PO if there is an open backorder quantity the backorder screen will be prompted automatically. If the Users that are doing the receiving have the knowledge and authority to change the back order quantity or change the Promise Date this flag should be set to Yes. When this flag is set to No Users must click on the Backorder option to over-ride it.
  3. New System Flag – Use Estimated Freight in Receive Accrued? This new flag enables Users to type in an estimated freight cost to be added to the cost of product being received on a PO. The cost entered will be applied based on dollar value to all line items on the PO. This added cost will be in the Landed Cost for tracked products.
  4. New System Flag – P.O.s-Warn if no cost – When this flag is set to Yes and a User enters a PO Line without a cost they will get a warning. The warning can be over-riden. The default for this new flag is No. This flag can be changed in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders.
  5. New Inquiry – Brighton-Best PO Inquiry – This inquiry will show all P.O.’s placed through the system integration with BBI for any date range selected. This will include PO Number, Number of Lines, Value, User that Submitted the P.O. and the date it was submitted.
  6. Feature Change – Buyers – If your companies assign Buyers to Product for purchasing through the ARS system the way the buyer is setup has been changed. In the Past the buyer was a User Name. This made it complicated when an employee would leave the company. The Buyer field in Enter & Edit Products will now come from a client controlled lookup list. Enter & Edit Buyers can be accessed in the Auto Replenishment Maintenance Menu. If you run the ARS using Buyer Logic the system will ask which Buyer’s Products you would like to look at if there is more than one Buyer in the ARS batch. Products without buyers will be assigned to a user called unassigned.
  7. New Feature – Expedite Documents – Late Documents Report – This report in the past only looked for Late Purchase Orders that were needed to fill requirements. There is a new question – Include All PO’s Due Before. The system will now include all Late Documents before the Date you type in this field even if there is no requirement for the Product.
  8. New Display – Total Weight on the Purchase Order Inquiry found on the Final Screen will now display the weight based on what was received after a P.O. has been received.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – Users can now insert a line in a Bill of Material. This is helpful if you are adding a product to a BOM and you would like it inserted in a specific sequence.
  2. New Feature – When in a Bill of Material in Product Inquiry or Enter & Edit Products the system will now display an estimated cost in the heading of the screen. This estimated cost is based on the current Default PO Cost of the Components in the Bill of Material.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Document – Commercial Invoice – You can now produce a Commercial Invoice from within The BUSINESS EDGE. This requires having Tariff Codes assigned to your products since they are a required field on the form. If you need the commercial invoice please contact Software Support. The document will then be added to your system. Once the form is there the system will prompt the User to Print the Commercial Invoice after the Packing List is printed if the order is for a country other than your company country. The Commercial Invoice can also be printed from the Order Output Options.

    PDF Forms are required to use this new form. This is a standard, generic form with no letterhead. These cannot be completely customized like the normal invoice and do not include User Defined Fields.

  2. New Document – Pro Forma Invoice – This document can be utilized when your customer requires an invoice so they can pre-pay for an Order before it is actually shipped. It will not include all fields that are on a normal invoice.

    If the Order you are printing the Pro forma invoice for is allocated it will only include the allocated quantities. If the line items are scheduled it will only include the first scheduled quantities. If the Order is not allocated or scheduled all line items will be included. This new document is available in Output Options from within a Sales Order.

  3. Menu Change – The A/R Invoice Routines menu has changed. A new In Process Report by Salesperson was added and all Invoices in Process Reports are now in a separate menu. This moved some of the other options below those reports up. Update invoices used to be the 7th choice and now it is the 6th choice for instance.
  4. New Report – Invoices in Process by Salesperson – This new report will provide a listing of Invoices that have not been updated grouped by Salesperson with a sub-total for each Salesperson. The original Invoices In-Process by Salesperson report has been re-named to indicate that it has each detail line, it is now called Invoices in Process by Slsp Detail. Both reports are located in the new sub-menu Invoices in Process Registers.
  5. New Report Option – When running the Sales Journal Tax Reports, they can now be generated by Branch if the branch system is being used.
  6. Flag Change – Master Customer – There are now three flags that can be used for a Master Customer. You can choose a Master Customer for Alternate Product Codes, Contract Pricing and now invoicing. In the past there was one shared flag that covered both Alternates and Contract Pricing. Now in addition to the new Invoicing feature described in #7 below you can have your customer share either Alternates or Contract pricing as well as they could be setup to share with different accounts.

    Master Customer Flags are located in Enter & Edit Customers. In the graphical interface they are in Financial Settings. In the text interface they are in Additional Information, Master Customer.

  7. New Feature – Master Customer for invoicing – This new flag enables you to setup one Master Account for billing and statement purposes while all Orders and History go to another account. This new feature can be helpful if you have a Customer with many ship to locations that all bill to the same billing address. You can setup the Billing Address to be the Master Customer. All invoices will bill to the Master Customer. Each Shipping Address would be setup with their own account and select the Billing Account as the Master. All Sales and History would be linked to the Shipping Account while all invoices for accounting purposes would be posted to the Billing Account.
  8. New Feature – If you have Customer Notes set to Pop-up when a Customer is selected, they will now pop up when you choose a Customer in Enter & Edit Deposit.
  9. New Feature – In Enter & Edit Deposits, if a check is entered and there is an unapplied balance the system will put an asterisk next to the check amount in the text interface or a red warning in the graphical interface. This makes it easier to find a check that has not been completed without generating the edit report.
  10. New Flag – Force UPS Collect Customer Acct. # – If this flag is set to Yes, Users will not be able to setup an order as UPS Collect unless there is a UPS Account Number entered in the Customers Address record. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable.
  11. New Information – When a Customer is past due and a credit warning comes up the system will now display the oldest open Invoice Number, The Date and how many days old it is along with the amount on the Credit Warning screen.
  12. Report Change – Sales Journal – In the past the Sales Journals included invoices that were in-process, not updated. These invoices will no longer be included in the Sales Journal. You can see the same type of information, sales, profit etc. by viewing the Invoices In-Process Reports found in Accounts Receivable, AR Invoice Routines. The reason this change was made was to insure complete accuracy of the Sales Journals. Cost on In-Process Invoices can change before the Invoice is updated which could change the information.

Accounts Payable

  1. Report Name Change and Screen Total – the Accounts Payable Purchase Journal has been re-named to be Vendor Invoice report. When presented to the screen the total is now presented on the Heading.
  2. New Report – Vendor Invoice Distribution Report – This new report can be generated for any date range by either Invoice Date or Posting Date. It will list all invoices for the period sorted by the General Ledger Account the Invoice was posted to. Each General Ledger Account will be subtotaled by Debits, Credits and total amount posted. This report is located in a new menu in Accounts Payable Reports, Vendor Invoice reports.
  3. New Inquiry – Canceled Vendor Invoice Inquiry. This new Inquiry can be generated for any date range. The information presented is User, Date, Time, Vendor, Invoice Number and Reason. When a Vendor Invoice is canceled it can be put back in process to be changed or deleted from the system.
  4. New Inquiry – Deleted Vendor Invoice Inquiry – This new Inquiry can be generated for any date range. The information presented is User, Date, Tim, Vendor Invoice Number and Reason.
  5. New Inquiry – Vendor Entry Inquiry – this new inquiry will present all new Vendors entered in a selected time period. The information presented is Vendor Code, Vendor Name, Entered By, Date and Time. This new inquiry is located in Accounts Payable Reports, Vendor Lists and Labels.
  6. New Inquiry – Product Family Vendor Inquiry – A Product Family can be assigned to Inventory Classification. Vendors can be assigned to Product Classifications. This new Inquiry will enable a user to select any range of Product Classifications and will then display all Families tied to those classifications along with the number of products within each Family. Users can then drill into any particular class and view all Vendors setup in that particular Classification. While viewing the associated Vendors there is a button/function key to edit those Vendors, new ones can be added or existing Vendors can be removed.

    This new Inquiry is located in 2 places – Accounts Payable System, Accounts Payable Reports, Vendor Lists and Labels and

Inventory

  1. New Report – Product Change History Report – This new report will show changes of audited fields in the Inventory Master records. Users can select any range of products by Product Code, Description, Classification or Alternate Product Code. Users can select an individual field such as Unit Cost or view all field changes. There is also an option to include deleted Products. This report is located in the path below:
    Inventory System
    	Inventory Reports
    		Miscellaneous Inventory Reports
    			Product Change History Report
  2. New Flag – Confirm List Price Change? – If this flag is set to Yes and a User changes the List Price in Enter & Edit Products the system will prompt them to confirm they wanted to change the List Price. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Inventory, Screen 4 of 4.
  3. New System Flag – Force Reference for G.L. in Man Adj? – When doing a Manual Adjustment Users can enter a Reference on the first screen which is designed to be the reason the adjustment is being made. When this flag is set to Yes, Users must enter some data in this field in order to proceed to the second screen. The Reference in a manual adjustment can be viewed in the Cardex and is very useful when looking at historical transactions.
  4. New System Flag – Brighton-Best System – There are 3 options for this flag. Inquiries Only, Purchase Orders and Inquiries or Not Used. Based on the level of integration companies want in the system this flag can be setup in Entity & System Flags – Inventory, Screen 4 of 4.
  5. New field on report for Excel – The Default location field has been added to detailed inventory list when presented to the screen and put into Excel.
  6. New field on report for Excel – The Default location field has been added to the List Inventory by Location report.
  7. New fields added to inquiry for export to Excel – When viewing Recent Product Sales for a Customer in a Customer Inquiry or from within a sales order, available location and lot information has been added when exported to Excel.
  8. New Field in Inventory Master File – Max Stocking Objective – This new field is used in the Automatic Replenishment System with the Stocking Objective option. When using this option, the system calculates what your Order Point is on the fly based on the period of time you have setup in the Stocking Objective field in Inventory. You can now set a Max Stocking Objective so that you can have the system suggest you order once you are at the Stocking Objective and then replenish up to the Max Stocking Objective. The default value is 2x the Stocking Objective. If the Max Stocking Objective is blank the system will use the Max Qty to Stock field.
  9. New System Flag – Text Interface Only – Expert Product Inquiry Qty Shown as – The options are Group by Document Type or In/Out Available. – This flag applies to the Expert Product Inquiry. The default setting is to show quantities on Sales Orders, Allocated, To Send to PPO’s, and Sent to Processor. This new flag will show Quantity in Warehouse, Qty Going Out, Qty Coming In and Available Qty. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Inventory on screen 4 of 4.
  10. New System – Fastener Clearing House Integration – This new feature will enable you to upload designated inventory to the FCH website. The information that is uploaded is Product Code, Selling Description, Branch and Quantity Available (On-Hand less Allocated and Committed). You must have a member ID that is entered into The BUSINESS EDGE in order to utilize this new feature.

    There is a flag in the Inventory Master file that indicates if a particular Product should be uploaded. In the text interface this flag is in Stocking Information, Web. In the graphical interface it is located in Additional Information. Items can also be set to upload from within the Dead Inventory Report as well as from a new report located in the Dead Inventory System – FCH Product Report.

    Once you have products setup to be uploaded you can upload a file to the Fastener Clearing House Website at any time with FCH Web Update selection found in the Dead Inventory System.

  11. Screen Change – Cardex Inquiry – Quantities, Prices and Costs are now all displayed in the Cardex based on the Stocking Unit of Measure. Costs, Sales and Quantities are now comparable in the Cardex. If your company has the same unit of measure for stocking, selling and purchasing on a product you will not see a change. In the graphical interface there are additional columns that can be added to your screen display to show the actual unit of measure items were bought or sold at.
  12. New Option – Tracking Cardex – Users can now view the tracking Cardex by Branch.
  13. New Inquiry – Order Inquiry is now available from within the Cardex. When viewing Cardex transactions if you click on a sales transaction there is now a button/fkey to view the order that the line you are viewing was on.
  14. New Flag – Confirm List Price Change – If this new flag is set to Yes when a User Changes the List Price in Enter & Edit Products they will now get a confirm box to be sure they meant to change the List Price. If you would like Users to get this warning this new flag can be set to Yes in Entity & System Flags – Inventory, Screen 4 of 4.

Utilities

  1. New Feature – Printer Name Change – Names of Printers can now be changed in Enter & Edit Printers. Some companies may attach User Names to Printers, this new feature makes it easier to change the names if employee’s change departments or leave the company. Enter & Edit Printers is located in Utilities, Printer Control System.
  2. New Feature – Default Options for Email/Fax Subject Line and Email Message. If you are using PDF forms you can indicate by form how you would like the Subject line and Message to Default by Document. The Subject line also applies to faxes. By default the system fills in the Document Type and Document Number and the Subject line indicates the type of document and Attached.

    The Email/Fax Subject can now be Document Type & Document Number, Document Type from Entity Name, Document Type & Document Number from Entity Name or Blank. The Message Line can be Document Type – See Attached or Blank.

    These settings are changed on each individual form in Entity & System Flags, Document Flags, Document Form Numbers under Form Options, Select the form that you would like to change double click or enter on it and then go to Email/Fax options.

ISO / Quality System

  1. New Report – Product Lots Missing Certificates – This report will provide a listing of all Lots that were received that did not get a required Certificate attached to the Lot. This report is located in Purchase Order System, Purchase Order Receipt Reports.

  2. New Report – Open P.O.’s No Product Specification – This report can be generated for any date range and will only include products on Open P.O.’s that do not have product specifications assigned to them. All Products can be included or just Products that require specifications.

VMI Mobile app

The optional VMI Mobile App has been re-designed in the past year. The current VMI Mobile app will run on iOS products like the iPhone, iPad, iPod, Android and possibly others to follow in the future. There is a Bluetooth version and a serial connection version to meet your salesperson and customer needs.

The Bluetooth Scanner scans orders into the smart phone app which runs on all iOS devices (ie. iPhones & iPads) and Android devices. The user can view detailed information about the scanned item instantly. The user can upload orders at any time from wherever they have cell phone coverage or wifi access.

The USB Scanner stores the order internally until the User is ready to upload it to a PC, where detailed information is then shown to the User. The Order is then transmitted to your server over the internet. This is particularly useful for customers scanning and submitting orders themselves.

Please visit our website or give us a call for more detailed information and pricing.


Release Notes – August 2011 – October 2011

» Download Release Notes «

Graphical Interface

  1. Grid Tips will now stay on the screen for 30 seconds or until you click the [x] button in the top right corner. Some of the grid tips have a lot of information and it was too difficult to read all of the information in the few seconds they were previously displayed.

    An example of a grid tip is for instance when you do a Product Inquiry and do a partial lookup. If you have a product with activity there is an icon next to the Available Quantity that will change in color based on the type of activity. Blue means there are open commitments or product coming in. Yellow indicates negative availability that has been put on a PO or PPO. Red indicates negative availability that has not been covered with a PO or PPO. When you move your mouse over the grid tip the system will display the values for that product.

  2. New button on Tool Bar – Reload. If you are in a tab that is not responding to anything, the Reload button will re-sync the workstations application with the server which may fix the problem.
  3. New Feature – Process recovery – If a workstation loses power or connectivity, the next time the application all of the tabs that were open will re-appear. This feature is tied to the login name so it is important that each workstation has a unique login. If a user logs in as a user on another machine the application will be closed on the other machine and the newly logged in User will take over their tabs.
  4. New Feature – when a record is locked by another user the system will now show an icon of a lock. When you mouse over the lock icon it will indicate the User Name, Date and Time of the lock.
  5. New Feature – The application on the workstation can now detect changes on the server and will only download what is needed. This will increase the speed of starting the application.
  6. When using the recent list where the system will show your recent documents or records that were previously selected a new icon will appear if the record is locked. The icon is a yellow padlock. If you see this icon that means that the record is being changed by another user or you possibly have it open in another tab. Two Users can not be editing the same record/document at the same time.

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Inquiry – Open Orders by Type with Detail – This new report can be generated for all Order types or an individual Order type. Some companies want to isolate quotes for instance. There is also a question which will enable both open and closed orders to be included. The heading will include a summary including the Number of Orders, Number of line items and the value of those Orders.

    Each line item on an order will be included in this Inquiry. When put into Excel the order and line items are included including Salesperson information, Product information and more detailed customer information.

  2. New Feature – If a user clicks on Create Invoice and the Order has not been allocated the system will now prompt the user to confirm that they really want to create an invoice.
  3. New Flag – Warn User if Printing Packing List for Un-Allocated Order. When this flag is set to Yes, Users will get a warning if they attempt to print a packing list before an order has been allocated. The default setting for this flag will be No since not all companies allocate before printing a packing list.
  4. New Options – Print Pick Tickets not printed – Two new options have been added to this program. Include Allocated Orders and Skip Orders without stock Available. This program will show all order that a Pick Ticket has not been printed for. These new options enable users to create a more useful list based on their procedures.
  5. New Flag – Allow Backorders on an Order Detail Line. On a line by line basis users can over-ride the Order Shipping Option on the heading screen of sales orders. In the graphical interface this can be found in the Detail Flags and in the text interface it can be found under the F7-More options.
  6. New Inquiry/Report – The first screen of this new report will present Sales Orders for a specified date range in a grid. There will be a summary on the heading showing Booked Sales, Booked Costs, Booked Gross Profit and Gross Profit %. The Costs are based on the Unit Cost in the Order Line when the Order was entered. If the Order is immediately allocated which is not common then the allocated cost will be used. This is not necessarily an accurate cost since actual cost will be dependent on the on hand inventory at the time of allocating and invoicing.

    There are buttons on the bottom of the screen representing Changed Orders, Deleted Orders and a Salesperson Summary.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – When viewing a Purchase Order Inquiry for a Purchase Order that has already been received the system will now show the Raw Cost, Landed Cost and Extension based on the values the Purchase Order was received at. Previously the inquiry displayed the original values on the PO.
  2. New RFQ Detail Line options – When using the graphical interface there are additional inquires now available – Under the Inquiries button users can now view Purchase History and a Cardex Inquiry.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New report Option – When running the Customer Last Activity Report users can now select a specific sales person to generate this report for. This report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Activity Reports, Customer Last Activity Report.
  2. Report Change – Sales Journal Report – In the past this report would include Invoices that were created but not updated. Un-updated invoices will no longer be included in this report. Un-updated invoices could report incorrect costs if a lot cost was changed between the time the invoice was created and updated.
  3. New User Flag – A/R Invoices Range Sequence By – Each User has new options when viewing invoices in a Customer Inquiry. The new choices are Newest to Oldest by Invoice Date or Newest to Oldest by Due Date. This flag can be set in User Flags – Accounts Receivable on the second screen.
  4. New Feature – Accounts Receivable Checks will now be presented with the most recent check on the top of the grid. In the past the oldest was presented first causing users to scroll to the bottom to see the most recent payments.
  5. New pop-up box – Clear UPS Worldship Info on Order. If you have the integrated UPS Worldship and an invoice is canceled the system will now prompt the user to clear the UPS Worldship information on the order. If they select yes the system will consolidate the shippers into one and when a new Picking Ticket is printed the system will re-write the information to the tbeinfo file on the server for UPS to read the next time the order is processed in Worldship.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Feature – When using the new Reconcile Cash System there is a new button to enter a journal entry while clearing the transactions. The entry will automatically assume the cash account that is being reconciled is part of the entry. The journal entry will be dated the same as the Bank Statement Date. After updating the entry it can be immediately cleared in the listing of un-cleared transactions.

Inventory

  1. New Feature – When viewing detail lines in document inquiries such as the Order Inquiry, Invoice Inquiry, Po Inquiry, PPO Inquiry the system will now display the available information for that product on the screen.

Utilities

  1. New Feature – Customize Forms Default E-mail/Fax Subject Line. The subject line can now be customized when E-mailing and Faxing documents from The BUSINESS EDGE. Each document can have a different subject line. The choices are Document Type and Document Number which is the current default, Document Type from Company Name, Document Type, Document Number from Company Name or Blank so users can type in their own subject line.

    This is setup in Utilities, Document Flags, Document Form Numbers. Once in the Forms Number setup click on Form Options which can be selected by clicking on the button or pressing the Fkey. After highlighting the document i.e. PO format make your selection at the E-mail/Fax Subject line. No other settings should be changed on this screen as they will affect the printing of your forms.

  2. New fields for export – When exporting Customer Master File information from the Export Menu the following fields have been added as choices to export -Order Heading Instructions, Picking Instructions and Packing Instructions.
  3. New fields for export – Shipping and Quality Flags have been added to the system for exporting Order Detail Lines and Inventory records.

Release Notes – December 2010 – July 2011

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New fields added to report – The following fields have been added to the Orders In Excess of Stock report – On PO Current Promised Dates, On PO Numbers and On PO Vendor Names. These fields will be included when the report is put into Excel as the last fields on the report.
  2. New Feature – Recording reason Orders were closed. When a Sales Order is closed, Users will now be prompted for a Reason. This reason will be stored in the Order File and the Lost Sales Record. When doing an Order Inquiry the Reason can also be viewed in the final Message field.
  3. New Inquiry Options – Open Orders by User. Users can now select what types of documents they would like to include in this Inquiry. In the past all Order types were presented. Users can now choose to include or omit particular Order types.
  4. New Flag – Allocate Orders in Order Entry – If it is your practice to allocate and print a packing list before picking the product this flag will automatically prompt users to allocate each line as they are entered in a Sales Order.

    If you are in Enter & Edit Orders – Detail Lines and drill into an allocated line, it will go directly into the allocation screen.

    If you are in Enter & Edit Orders and drill into an unallocated line, it will go into the Enter and Edit screen.

    In the graphical interface there are allocate buttons available on the screen. In the text interface users must drill into the line to change allocations. The flag to turn on this feature is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry.

  5. New Feature – Days can Ship Early on Sales Orders. Users can now input the number of days they can ship an Order early. This field can also be left blank or press spacebar and ASAP will fill in the field. This field applies to Sales Orders, Order Schedules, Purchase Orders and Purchase Order Detail Lines.

    Defaults can be entered in the Customer and Vendor Master Files. This field can be added to existing forms. Our normal hourly charges apply to form changes.

    This is a standard feature in the graphical interface and it is optional in the text interface. There is a flag for the text interface located in Entity & System Flags – General, Use “Days Can Ship Early” in TUI. The default answer to this flag will be No for existing clients.

    In the text interface, if this flag is set to Yes adjustments will be made to accommodate the extra field due to lack of space. Those adjustments would be possibly losing a User Defined Field or the Entered by line. In the Purchase Order it would be losing the PO Entered by or line comment on the first screen. This information would still be stored, just not displayed on the first screen.

    This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Use Order Shipping Option in TUI?

  6. New Report formats – Most reports have now been converted so that the information goes into a scroll box. This makes the information easily available to export to Excel or E-mail. In some cases due to the format of the report if it was not logical to present them in a scroll box/grid then the Screen function was disabled. If a User would like to view a report on the screen and they do not have an Output Option for screen Adobe should be selected and the complete report can be viewed in Adobe on the screen.
  7. New Flag – Use Order Internal Reference in TUI – (Text User Interface). The Order Reference field is standard in the graphical interface and can be used as an extra field to store data on the Heading of an Order. In the Text Interface it is an optional field that may be used to move current User Defined fields to if clients would like to move to the graphical interface. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry.
  8. New Flag – Skip Backorder Screen with Tracked Products. After allocating lines on an order the system automatically brings the User to a backorder screen where the Unit Price or Line Comment can be changed. This creates an extra keystroke or click when allocating an order. If you never change this information on the backorder screen this flag could be set to skip the backorder screen. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry.
  9. New Feature – Gross Profit Margin Warning – Currently Inventory Classifications can be setup to have a warning Pop up in a Sales Order if the Gross Profit is lower than a defined percentage. There is a new Flag that can be set to pop-up a warning if the Gross Margin is too high. This is an optional feature and must be setup in the Product Classifications. The new field is called Maximum Allowable Gross Profit.
  10. New Flag – User Job # in TUI – (Text User Interface). The Job # field is standard in the graphical interface and can be used as an extra field to store data on the Heading of an Order. In the Text Interface it is an optional field that may be used to move current User Defined fields to if clients would like to move to the graphical interface. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry screen 6.
  11. New Feature – Order Discount – When this new flag is set to Yes Customers can be setup to get a flat discount percentage taken off all Orders. This flag is in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry – Use Order Discount – the default is set to No. The discount is setup in Enter & Edit Customers, Additional Information. If you would like to use this new feature your forms will need to be changed to reflect the Order discount. Normal hourly charges apply to form changes.
  12. New Options to show Customer Instructions. There are Picking and Packing instructions that can be assigned to Customers in Enter & Edit Customers. There are new options to automatically pop up these instructions when Users select an Order. They can pop up automatically when Users are in Order Entry, Allocating, Both Order Entry & Allocating or Never. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry, Show Customer Instructions.
  13. New Feature – Order Shipping Options – This is a standard option in the gui interface and is optional and based on space availability in the tui. The four options are partial shipments as available, ship complete lines, backorder partials, consider complete ship available and one shipment when all lines complete. These options will be defaulted based on the two existing customer flags in Enter & Edit Customers – Allow Back Orders and Ship Complete and can be changed from Order to Order. When the flags are set to One Shipment when all lines are complete and the User prints a Packing List without all lines being allocated the User will get a warning but it will not prevent them from printing a packing list. Forms can be changed to include this new field, normal hourly charges will be billed for form changes. Below is how the defaults will come up based on the way the two customer flags are set:
    Allow B/O Flag	Ship Complete
    Y	Y	Ship Complete lines, backorder partials
    Y	N	Partial shipments as Available
    N	Y	One Shipment when all lines complete
    N	N	Consider Complete – Ship Available
    

    The flag to turn this on in the tui interface is in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry.

  14. New Flag – Force UPS Collect Customer Acct. # – If this system flag is set to Yes and a Customer is setup with a Collect Ups Shipper a UPS Account Number must be setup in the customer record before the order is entered. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags Accounts Receivable, Screen 3.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Entity Flag – Use Vendor Name as Manufacturer for Lot. When Lot Tracking if this flag is set to Yes the Vendor Name on a Purchase Order Receipt will automatically get copied to the Manufacturer field in the lot tracking information. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders. When receiving the User also has the ability to change the information.
  2. New Feature – Blanket PO’s – If a User is entering a Blanket PO, they can leave (or blank out) the Current Promise Date field and instead fill in the Earliest and Latest Blanket Dates. The Earliest Blanket Date is the earliest date that your Vendor can ship product to you. The Latest Blanket Date is the latest date that you vendor can ship product to you.

    When using the Automatic Replenishment System (ARS) it will look at the incoming inventory as coming in based on the earliest date so that you do not accidentally place another PO for the same product. All other inquiries will show the inventory as expected to be received in as of the latest date (Product Inquiry and Open Documents)

    When a release date is received the Original Promise Date or Current Promise Date need to be filled in either on the Heading of the Purchase Order or on the Detail Line(s) to indicate that a firm date has been received and the PO will be treated as normal.

  3. New Report – Blanket Purchase Order Report – This report will provide a listing of which Purchase Orders have Blanket Purchase Order Dates so that Users can see what PO’s need to be released. This report is located in Purchase Order System, Purchase Order Reports, Open PO Reports, Blanket Purchase Order Report.
  4. New Feature – Split Purchase Order Line – This is an alternate method of dealing with multiple Vendor lot numbers on a single PO Receipt. When receiving a Purchase Order if you would like to split one line into 2 separate lines while receiving you can now do so with the new Split Line Feature. The procedure is to highlight the line and then either clicking on or pressing the option Split line. The system will prompt the User for the quantity to split out of the original line item. This would then create a unique lot number for each quantity since the line number is part of the lot number.
  5. New Flag –Force Manufacturer’s Lot during Receiving – This new flag can be defaulted in Entity & System Flags to either Yes or No. All products will default to whatever the system default is set to. On a Product by Product basis this flag can be over-ridden. The options on a Product Level are System Default, Yes or No. When set to Yes, Users can not complete the receipt of a line on a Purchase Order unless a Manufacturers Lot Number is entered.
  6. New Flag – Force Country of Origin – This new flag can be defaulted in Entity & System Flags to either Yes or No. All products will default to whatever the system default is set to and then on a Product by Product basis this flag can be over-ridden. The options on a Product Level are System Default, Yes or No. When set to Yes, Users can not complete the receipt of a line on a Purchase Order unless a Country of Origin is entered.
  7. New Feature – Mark Purchase Order Delivered. If the receiving department gets backlogged a Purchase Order can be marked as delivered so that Users can see that it has arrived and is just not checked in yet. A location can also be assigned to indicate where it is being stored.

    This new selection is in PO Receipt Routines, Mark Purchase Order Delivered. Users simply type in a PO Number and enter a location. If for some reason it needs to be unmarked as delivered the Delivered status can be changed back to NO.

    In the PO Inquiry the Document Status Line will show Delivered, the Location and the Date it was marked as delivered.

  8. New System – Expedite Purchase Orders – this new system is located in the Purchase Order system, Purchase Order Reports, Expedite Documents System, there are six menu items.

    Late Documents Report – This report will go through the Open Purchase Orders to find the dates that incoming Purchase Orders are due. It will show which documents already have expedite requests. You can drill into each line item to create a new expedite request. This report can be generated for any range of Products and there is also an option to Traverse Bill of Materials. There is an indicator before the PO Number so Users can tell if it has been selected to expedite, sent to the Vendor or if the Vendor has already responded. Those indicators are + = Open Expedite; * = Sent to Vendor; > = Responded.

    A comment can be added to the line item and printed on the expedite request to the vendor. Users can also view Open documents for a particular line item by selecting the Open Documents option.

    Open Expedite Request Report – This selection will show any Expedite Requests that have been setup but not yet submitted to the Vendor.

    Send Expedite Requests – This selection is where you will send the Expedite Requests to your Vendor. Expedite Requests are only available in PDF format. If you have a default E-mail address setup for your vendor the system will default to E-Mail Yes. Through the buttons on this screen, Users can select to Print, Fax and or E-mail the Expedite Requests. After the selections have been made the next screen will prompt the User for the Output options such as time to fax, printer to print to and return E-mail Address.

    Enter & Edit Expedite Request – This selection enables a User to enter an Expedite Request by selecting the Purchase Order and expediting the individual Lines. After selecting the Lines the User can choose how they would like to Output the individual Request.

    Expedited Documents not confirmed – This inquiry lists all of the line items that Vendors have not confirmed. Users can drill into each line item and enter the new Date that the Vendor has confirmed. This will be updated on the PO Detail Line as the Current Promise Date. There will also be an indication that the particular line item has been confirmed. The indicators a User will see on a PO line are + = Open Expedite; * = Sent to Vendor; > = Responded.

    Expedited Documents Report – This report can present a list of PO Line Items that are Open, Sent or Confirmed. If you are viewing the Closed Documents you can clear the confirmed status – this can be used if a line item was confirmed in error.

  9. ARS Enhancements – The Cut-Off Date is now the date that the system will look at when calculating the available to test against the Re-Order Point. There are also new options where the system could suggest a higher order quantity if the incoming Purchase Orders are considered late. The User can specify how many days past due is considered late. There is also new optional forecasting logic based on past usage. There is a flag in the ARS Maintenance Menu in Edit Auto Replenishment Options – Use Usage for Qty Needed & Date Est – if this is set to no the system will not project future usage. If it is set to Yes the ARS will suggest ordering extra stock to cover future usage based on past usage.
  10. New Feature – Sort Lines in Request for Quote. When on the final screen of Enter & Edit RFQ, there is a new option to Sort Detail Lines. The lines can be sorted by Product Code or Description.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Flag – Skip Tag Detail in Quick PPO – This flag when set to Yes will speed up the Quick PPO option Enter & Receive PPO. If there is no need to enter manufacturer information such as Manufacturers Lot Number, County of Origin etc changing this flag to yes will decrease the number of screens that a User is brought to for each receipt. The Product is automatically updated, there is not an in process report or update questions.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Credit Hold Options – In the past when Customers were past due or over their Credit Limit they had to be manually put on Credit Hold. The Credit Hold System has been enhanced with the following options:

    Customer Credit Test – System Flags
    There are 5 system/entity flags that can be used to prevent users from printing pick tickets/pack lists, allocating sales orders and/or creating invoices for customers who are on credit hold, over their credit limit or past due. These flags are located in Accounts Receivable Flags. They include:

    • Allow Printing of Pick Ticket?
    • Allow Printing of Packing List?
    • Allow Allocations?
    • Allow Wireless Warehouse Allocations?
    • Allow Creation of Invoice?

    These flags will be tested at the appropriate times and if they are set to “No”, the corresponding action will not be allowed unless the sales order has an override stamp on it.

    Credit Test Override
    When a sales order has a credit test override stamp on it, the system will bypass the customer credit test for that order and allow all actions.

    There is a flag in Enter & Edit User Security to give users access to override the customer credit test: Allowed to Override Customer Credit Test?

    Users who are set to Yes have 2 ways of overriding the customer credit test/stamping the sales order:

    If while trying one of the above actions, a customer fails the credit test, the user will get a message that the action is not allowed and a question asking whether they would like to override the credit test. If the user answers yes to override, that will put an override stamp on the sales order and allow the user to continue with the action. Once the order has been stamped, all users will be allowed to perform all actions on that order no matter how the five system/entity credit flags are set.

    There is also a menu item in the Order Entry File Maintenance menu to Override Sales Order Credit Test. In this program the user can select a sales order # and switch the credit override stamp on or off for that particular order.

  2. New options on Customer Credit Report – When running the Customer Credit Report there are two new options – Include Only Over Credit Limit/Credit Hold? If this is answered Yes it will only include customer that are Over their Credit Limit of on Credit Hold. Print Order – If this is being generated to paper a copy of their Open Orders will be automatically printed.

    This will enable companies to be pro-active with customers when utilizing the new credit hold features. This report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Status Reports, Customer Credit Report.

  3. New Feature – Pop-Up Notes are now for the user that created the not, or based on the security level of a user. When creating a pop-up note, when a users chooses Security Level List, it will bring them to a screen to choose which security levels to pop-up the note on. By default they will all be set to see the notes so the system will continue to work as it does now. In the gui interface there are also new icons / mouse over messages informing users what the notes are set to do.

    Security Levels are setup in the Security System and assigned to each User.

  4. New Feature – F9-Undo in the check application screen in Enter & Edit Deposits will now prompt the User to confirm that they would like to un-do the payments in the check being processed.
  5. New Report formats – Most reports have now been converted so that the information goes into a scroll box. This makes the information easily available to export to Excel or E-mail. In some cases due to the format of the report if it was not logical to present them in a scroll box/grid then the Screen function was disabled. If a User would like to view a report on the screen and they do not have an Output Option for screen Adobe should be selected and the complete report can be viewed in Adobe on the screen.
  6. New field available for editing. Users have the ability to edit certain fields on a Customer Invoice after it has been updated. These are fields that do not affect the Inventory, Customer or General Ledger information. The Shipper information is now available for editing in Edit Posted Invoices which is located in Accounts Receivable Invoice Routines.
  7. New Flag – Prompt for Update in Send Invoices in Process. A new flag has been added so that Users can be prompted to Update their Invoices after Sending Invoices in Process. There was an existing flag to Prompt for Update when Printing Invoices in Process. If you are transitioning from mailing invoices to faxing and emailing them you may want to make the Prompt for Update in Printing Invoices No and Sending Yes. This way if you print an in-house copy you will not inadvertently update before sending your invoices. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable.
  8. New Flag – Update Invoices by Branch – Companies with multiple Branches can now update invoices individually by Branch. The Update screen will prompt the User to update a single branch or all branches.
  9. New Display feature – When entering a Customer Deposit if any check in the batch is out of balance, meaning all of the funds were not applied to invoices the screen will now show an * next to the check amount in the tui or a red information display in the gui. This makes it easier to see if there is a check that needs further attention before updating.
  10. New Fields in Sales Journal Report – When the Sales Journal Report is put into Excel the customer class code and class description will be included in the data. This enables Users to sort the sales for a period of time and subtotal by classification.
  11. New Sales Journal report – Sales Journal by Salesperson/Customer Class – Summarized – After selecting a date range, a range of Salespeople and a Customer Class this report will present each customer in the selected customer class along with their Total Sales broken down by merchandise, freight, tax and miscellaneous charges along with Cost and Profit.
  12. New Fields added to A/R Aging when exported. When the Accounts Receivable Aging report is exported to Excel the Customer State and Country will be included in the Excel data.
  13. New information on Invoices in Process Report when printed with Detail. If a User answers Yes to include Detail on the In-Process Report and a line item has a current Contract price the letter “c” will print after the price.
  14. New Flags for Enter & Edit Customers – Force Customer Contact Screen and Force Customer Instruction Screen. If these flags are set to Yes, then when entering a new Customer these additional screens will pop up automatically. If these flags are set to No, the User can simply click on the option or press the Fkey to enter the information when it is available. These flags are located in Entity & System Flags Accounts Receivable.
  15. New Flag for Enter & Edit Customers – Force Edit Sales Order Tax Screen? When entering an address for a Customer there is a separate screen for Sales Tax. If you do not charge Sales Tax and have the Tax fields defaulted, Users can avoid this screen by setting this flag to No. If you do charge Sales Tax you want this set to Yes to be sure the User is prompted for the correct tax for each address. This flag is located in Enter & Edit System Flags – 2.
  16. New Feature – Periodic Invoices – The periodic invoicing system is designed for customers who would like to receive one bulk invoice at the end of each month. During the month you will create and update invoices as usual, but the system will not prompt you to send them during the Send Invoices in Process procedure because they will be sent altogether as a periodic (or summary) invoice.

    The first step to periodic invoicing is to set up the customer to use periodic invoices. The customer flag can be changed in Enter & Edit Customer, Output.

    Currently the options include By Customer, By Ship to Address or No. If the customer would like one summary invoice each month that includes all ship to addresses, select By Customer. If the customer would like one summary invoice for each ship to address, select By Ship To Address. If the customer would like to receive regular invoices, select No. The system will default new customers to what you have selected as the default in Enter & Edit Customer Defaults.

    Each order and invoice that is created will be flagged to either Yes or No to Use Periodic Invoices based on the customer’s flag. Users can change an individual order/invoice’s flag during Order or Invoice Entry. For instance, if there is an order/invoice that you don’t want to be included in the periodic invoice that month you can change the flag to No and the system will treat it as a regular invoice and send it individually. Then when they go to create the periodic invoice for that customer, that single invoice will not be included.

    Users will find the Use Periodic Invoice flag inside the Tax fkey in order entry and invoice entry. If the flag is changed on an order it will carry over into the invoice when it is created (and override the customer flag).

    The periodic Invoices Menu is located in Accounts Receivable, A/R Invoice Routines.

    Create & Send Periodic Invoices
    When Users are ready to create the periodic invoices for the month they need to make sure all of the invoices from the month have been updated. The program will not include in process invoices when creating the periodic invoice.

    They will be prompted for a “Report Date”. This date is used as a cut-off date for invoices to be included in the periodic invoice. It is also used as part of the periodic invoice #. If you enter 06-30-11, the system will create a periodic invoice numbered 110630-#### (#### represents the customer code) and it will include all invoices flagged “Yes” for the customer that have not yet been included on a periodic invoice and are dated on or before 06-30-11.

    Creating Periodic Invoices simultaneously creates periodic invoices for all customers set up to use periodic invoices. When the invoices have been created it will pop-up a message letting you know how many were created. Then it will bring the User to the “Send Periodic Invoices” screen. If you are not ready to print/send the periodic invoices at this time, simply tab and Cancel Request. The periodic invoices have been created, just not sent. Send Periodic Invoices functions similarly to Send Invoices in Process in that it uses the customer’s default output settings to decide whether to print, email or fax each periodic invoice.

    Print Periodic Invoice
    Use this option to send individual periodic invoices. You have the option of selecting a customer first or skipping the customer and hitting space/enter on the Periodic Invoice # to get a list of all customers’ periodic invoices. If you select a customer, space/enter on Periodic Invoice # will give you a list of only that customer’s invoices.

    Cancel Periodic Invoices
    Cancelling a Periodic Invoice does not affect the individual invoices created throughout the month. It only un-links the individual invoices from the periodic invoice and clears out the periodic invoice # for that customer.

    For example, if you create a periodic invoice and forget about one sales order that needed to be invoiced that month, you can cancel the periodic invoice. Then, after the order has been invoiced and updated, you can go back and run Create & Send Periodic Invoices and it will create a brand new 110630-### invoice for that customer which will include all of the previous invoices along with the missed invoice. The cancel option acts very much like the Print Periodic Invoices screen in the way you can select the Periodic Invoice.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Entity Flag – Use Estimated Freight in Receive and post toAccrued. This new flag when set to Yes will enable Users to enter the actual or estimated freight at the time a Purchase Order is being received. The freight amount will then be added to the Raw Cost to create a landed cost based on the value. The vendor invoice for the freight must then be applied to the Accrued Receipt and any discrepancy would be put into the Over/under account. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Payable.
  2. New Check Reconciliation routine – Reconcile Cash – This new option enables the User to clear all types of transactions – Checks, Deposits and Journal Entries through a single interface. The system displays the difference between the General Ledger and the Bank Statement as transactions are cleared.

    On the first screen the User is prompted for the Statement Date, General Ledger Account Number and Statement Balance which is taken from the monthly Bank Statement. There are options to include Checks, Deposits and or Journal Entries. There is also an option to include transactions that have already been cleared. Depending on the format of the bank statement users may choose to clear all of the checks first and then come back and clear other types of transactions.

    All of the selected transactions are presented in a scroll box and the Fkeys/Buttons are used to Clear/Unclear entries. Mark/UnMark entries. The feature to Mark Entries is a way of grouping several transactions into one total. If for instance 3 deposits were made in the system and only 1 deposit went to the bank the system can accumulate the 3 deposits in the system to be sure they equal the bank deposit. The User clicks on Clear All Marked when the total is verified.

    This new feature is located in Accounts Payable, Check Routines & Reconciliation, Check Reconciliation, Reconcile Cash. The first time this is used a Prompt will ask for the Earliest Un-cleared Date and it will then clear everything before that date in the system.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Report formats – Most reports have now been converted so that the information goes into a scroll box. This makes the information easily available to export to Excel or E-mail. In some cases due to the format of the report if it was not logical to present them in a scroll box/grid then the Screen function was disabled. If a User would like to view a report on the screen and they do not have an Output Option for screen Adobe should be selected and the complete report can be viewed in Adobe on the screen.
  2. New Field for Export – A column representing the Customer State has been added to the Sales Report – Major Accounts which is located in Customer Sales Analysis.
  3. New Field added for exporting. In Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales and Profit Ranking reports – the default Salesperson Code from the Customer Master file has been added as a field that can be exported and sorted. This includes the Customer Sales Ranking by Net Sales, Gross Profit and Percent Gross Profit.

Inventory

  1. New Report – Open Documents Report – This report was created to provide a listing of Products that are on Sales Orders along with the Open Purchase Orders. It is presented in Product Code Sequence and can be generated by Product Code, Class, Alternate or Description. Based on the report options this can list only products that are on Sales Orders or all Products in the selected group of Products. If Sales Order documents are included (this is an option) then all Purchase Orders and Sales Orders will be listed for each product along with a Quantity balance in date order. This will reflect the projected balance as of the document date.

    If Sales Orders are not included only Purchase Order documents will be listed.

  2. New information in Product Inquiry – When using the gui interface fields have been added to the main screen of the Product Inquiry – Package Quantity, Master Quantity and Bulk Quantity. Theoretical Weight has also been moved to the main screen.
  3. New Feature – Track Package Quantity on a lot by lot basis – When the flag to track package quantities by lot is set to yes, Users will be prompted for Lot Package Quantity when receiving PO’s, Entering or Receiving PPO’s as well as when doing a manual adjustment. Each tracking tag can have one package quantity associated with it. If there are different package quantities for one internal lot the lot will need to be split into multiple tags. This flag can be setup in Enter & Edit System Tracking Flags from the Setup Miscellaneous Menu.

    Once the flag is setup existing lots can be edited in Inventory File Maintenance, Location System,. Enter & Edit Product Mfg Info. The Package quantity is displayed by lot in the lot tracking detail screen. In the tui it is available by pressing or clicking F5-Mfg.

General Ledger

  1. New Feature – Distribution Detail information can now be viewed when Users are in the GL Account Transaction Inquiry. When viewing the transactions on the screen, when the transaction is highlighted, users can click on or press the Fkey Distribution Dtl. The System will show all Accounts involved in the transaction along with the Debit and Credit Amounts.
  2. New Feature – When viewing an Accounts Receivable Invoice, Purchase Order or Vendor Invoice or Check in the General Ledger transaction inquiry, you can now enter or click on the transaction to view the Inquiry for the selected document. This gives you complete visibility to all details of the transaction as well as the ability to re-print it when it is a printable document.

Utilities

  1. In many areas of the system such as reports Printer Options has been changed to Output Options. This provides more options such as sending a report to Adobe or a Text file.

ISO System

  1. The ISO System has been re-named Quality Assurance System. The ISO and Certificate Management Systems are optional modules. If you have interest in either or both of these modules please contact us.
  2. New Feature – Quality Assurance Certificate Management System. The Certificate Management System is an optional system that can be used with or without the ISO system. After setting up Certificate Types such as Test Reports and different types of Certifications along with default costs, these Certificate Types can be assigned to Products. They can also be added on the fly as a product is being added to a Purchase Order. When entering a line on a Purchase Order if there are required certs that are setup in the part they will automatically appear on the Purchase Order going to the Vendor. The user can edit the default cost associated with the Certs.

    If you have documentConnection Scanning, Users can be prompted upon receipt of product to scan in the required documents.

    If a customer requires specific Certificates for Products the system can also be setup so that only lots with the proper Certificates can be allocated to their Orders. The certificates can also be setup to automatically print with the Customers paperwork.

    There are indications in the system showing users what certificates are available as well as which lots are missing required certificates. Use of the new Certificate Management system will also require form modifications to include the Certs information with the individual line items on Orders and or Purchase Orders.

  3. New Feature – Enter & Edit Certificate Type – This entry screen enables the User to setup a new Certificate Type such as a Physical/Chemical Certification. There are flags to include the particular cert on the PO Form when assigned to a product. A default Cost and Sell price can be setup in the Certificate type along with the General Ledger Account to Post to. The cost and price can be over-ridden on an individual line of a Purchase Order or Sales Order. This is located in Inventory File Maintenance, UOM, Category & Certificate System, and Enter & Edit Certificate Type.

documentConnection

  1. New Feature – Document Groups – This new feature enables Users to scan in a document and attach it to multiple products. If there is a document that needs to be attached to a group or range of products a Document Group can be created and tied to the multiple products. Document Groups can be setup in Utilities, Image & Fax System, Document Groups, Enter & Edit Document Groups or in Enter & Edit Products, Additional Information, Doc Groups, Edit Document Groups. If the group of products all have the same prefix choose Product Ranges when adding the new group and all products with that prefix will be linked.

    Documents can be scanned into a document group in the Scan Manager Menu in Scan Document Group Document. The scanned documents can be viewed in a Product Inquiry the same way a product specific document is viewed. In the gui interface it is under Drawings and Images tab. In the tui it is located in F12-More Choices, F12 – Product Images, F4-Product Drawings.

  2. On the final screen of Enter & Edit Orders there is a new set of choices for documentConnection where a user can scan a Customer PO or a Pick Ticket or assign scanned documents to print with the invoice for the Order.

Release Notes – March 2010 – November 2010

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New System Flag – Show existing Sales Orders – When an item is on an Order and a User adds a new line item with the same Product the system will show the existing order(s) in the system. This could help prevent duplicate orders being entered. This flag is defaulted to Yes in the Upgrade and can be changed in Entity and System Flags – Accounts Receivable – Existing Orders Alert during Order Entry?
  2. New Feature – Move Lines Not Allocated – If you have an order that is partially allocated and you would like to call the order complete and start a brand new order with the remaining un-allocated items you can now do this with this new feature. After selecting the Order you have an option to move partially allocated lines or only lines that are not allocated at all. The system will create a brand new order with those items. This is located in Order & Quote Entry, Duplicate & Merge Orders – Move Lines not Allocated.
  3. New Feature – Merge Orders – This new feature will enable Users to combine any number of Open Orders for a Customer. After selecting a Primary Order to merge into, there are options to help the selection process. You can choose from a list of Sales Orders that is created based on your selection of criteria. Users can isolate the orders they would like to merge based on Type of Order, Purchase Order Number, Allocated or not, Backorders and Shipping Address.

    The system will present all Sales Orders for that Customer that fit the criteria you select. Orders will be presented on the screen and can be added or removed before verifying that you would like to absorb the order lines into the primary Order. When viewing Orders that were merged, the system will indicate in the Inquiries that those orders were merged.

  4. Fields added to report – When running the Expedite Salesperson Orders located in Order Reports, Scheduling and Expediting Reports. There is a new option to include the detail of PO’s and PPO’s if there are open documents for the products on Sales Orders.
  5. New Feature – Un-Allocate Orders. When in Allocate Orders there is a new option to Un-Allocate all lines on an Order. The system will ask the user to confirm and then all allocations will be removed.
  6. Expanded Options on Flag – Show Customer Instructions – previously this flag was a Yes/No Question to pop up Customer Instructions when Allocating. This flag has been expanded to give options. Customer Instructions can now pop up when entering an Order, when allocating an order, both in entry and allocation or Never. This flag is located in Entity and System Flags – Order Entry.
  7. New Feature – When in a Sales Order Detail Line, when the F3 Key is set to show Sales History, if the Customer has not purchased an item in the Past, Users will now get a scroll box with No Match Found instead of the message “This customer has never purchased this item”. This way the User can still press The F3-Product Inquiry from the sales history screen.
  8. New Inquiry – Order Exception Inquiry – This new inquiry is designed to isolate line items on Sales Orders that either have a zero cost or a zero selling price before invoicing. Options include choosing to include Allocated or Un-Allocated Lines as well as Cost and or Sell being zero. This way Orders/Inventory can be corrected before the invoice is created. This new inquiry is located in Order Reports, Allocated Reports – Sales Order Exception Inquiry.
  9. New Feature – Allocating Scheduled Orders – When allocating a Sales Order that has quantities scheduled with the order scheduling feature the system will now only allocate the first schedule quantity when using the Allocate Line or Allocate All functions. Users can drill into the line item and change the quantity shipped. A line has also been added to show the User the total quantity ordered as well as the scheduled quantity when drilling into a line item in Allocate Inventory.
  10. New Flag options – Orders-Minimum Quantity Order Warning – The options for this existing flag have been expanded. When entering a Sales Order this system flag can be set to the following warning options: No Warning, Warn when Below Minimum Quantity, Warn when Not a Multiple of Order Minimum Quantity, Warn when Below Packaging Quantity, Warn when Not a Multiple of Packaging Quantity.

    This flag can be changed in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry Screen 4 of 5.

Purchase Order System

  1. Report Change – Merchandise Receiving Document – When printing this report and answering No to include Allocated Orders the system was skipping lines that had any quantity allocated. It will now send out any quantity that is unallocated instead of skipping the line entirely.
  2. New Feature – You can now convert more than one RFQ into a Purchase Order. As long as the vendor on an RFQ is the Same as the Vendor on a PO you can convert an unlimited number of RFQ’s into one Purchase Order in the Request for Quote System.
  3. New Auto Replenishment Flag – Use Usage for Qty Needed & Date Est – If this flag is set to No the system will not forecast usage but will only consider current documents in the system along with the re-order point and max qty to stock.
  4. New Feature – Reverse partial P.O. Line items. When reversing a PO Receipt Users will now be prompted to make a choice – Reverse to Open PO or Reverse to Received Status.

    When reversing a PO Receipt to Open Po Status Users can select which lines they would like to reverse. There are function keys/buttons that can be used to toggle the reversal status. All lines Marked as Yes will be reversed. If all lines are not reversed the reversed lines will be placed on the next revision for the selected P.O. All transactions will be reflected in the Cardex.

    When reversing a PO Receipt to In Process Status the PO will be put back in process so that the line items can be changed and then updated again. When reversing a PO to In Process Status all line items must be selected for reversal. All transactions will be reflected in the Cardex.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New System Flag -Skip Tag Detail in Quick PPO – If you use the Quick PPO options and do not need to enter additional tracking information this new flag will speed up the Quick PPO Send and Receive process, skipping multiple screens that are not necessary unless you need to add Manufacturer information or multiple locations

    This new flag is located in Entity and System Flags – Purchase Orders, Screen 3 of 3.

  2. New Feature – PPO Expense items can now be written off directly to the Asset Account of the Expense Product instead of posting to the Accrued Payable Account. If you are using the PPO system for internal kits and would like to reduce an expense such as Shipping Supplies because you used a box in your PPO this new feature will enable you to do so.

    This is setup on a vendor by vendor basis. The new field in the Vendor Master File is called PPO Expense Logic, the default in the Vendor Master File is set to Accrued Payables. If you would like to change this flag it is located in Enter & Edit Vendors, More, More.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Menu Option – Print Range of Statements – This new option has been added to the Send Statements Menu. Previously you could print a Range in the first selection Print Customer Statements, this selection has now been changed so that you can repeatedly select random customers without reselecting the program.
  2. More information available – When in a Customer Inquiry and viewing additional Customer Addresses you can now drill in to see more detailed information.
  3. New Cost Option on reports. Some companies maintain a Standard Cost for the purpose of paying salesperson commissions and or pricing products. There are select reports that have offered Standard Cost as an option to Actual Cost. In the past when reports were generated using Standard Cost the Standard Cost that was used was the Standard Cost at the time of the transaction. We have now added another choice for Standard Cost. Current Standard Cost is a new option in addition to the old Standard Cost which is now referred to as the As Of Standard Cost. Now you can update the Standard Cost and run a report using the cost you most recently created. An example of one of these reports is the Sales Journal by Salesperson – All Totals which is located in the Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals.
  4. New Feature – Remove Bins by Customer – You can now remove all of a Customers Bins with a function key in Enter & Edit Customer Bins. The system will ask the User to confirm the removal of the Bins. Once they are removed they cannot be restored. You could then import new bins for the Vendor Managed Inventory System.
  5. New Report Options – Invoices in Process Register – When this report is produced and the Detail Lines are included you now have the option of including the Product Code, Product Description or Both. This will enable you to include the most important information on this report when there is not enough room for all of the data.

    The Invoices in Process Report can now also be generated to only include invoices up to a specific date. The default is the current date.

  6. Report change – When exporting the Customer Extra Address List the system will now include the Customer Code field.
  7. New Feature – Cut-off Date has been added to Send Invoices in Process. If you would like to use the Send Invoices in Process feature that will automatically either Print, Fax or E-mail your Customers invoices this new field will enable you to only send out invoices up to a particular date. This is helpful for companies that need to print an internal copy to check over before sending out the invoices. This allows time to check them over and only send those invoices from the previous day for example. Meanwhile Users can be creating new invoices to be processed the next day.

    When updating Invoices there is also a Cut-off Date question that you would make the same date as you used in the Sending of Invoices.

  8. New Question for Statements – When sending Customer Statements there is a new option – Include Un-Applied Balance Invoices – The default answer will be Yes. If you would like to skip including Un-applied Balance Invoices simply answer No to this question when sending statements.
  9. New Flag – Cost to be used on reports – When running select reports Users can choose to use Actual Cost (most common), As of Standard Cost, or Actual Standard Cost. This Flag can be set to the most common way you run these reports and can also be changed on the fly. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable. The default is Actual Cost.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Feature – Multiple Month Invoice Posting. When entering an invoice in Accounts Payable you can now spread the expense over multiple months for more accurate financial reporting. After you enter the invoice amount you would code the invoice to a balance sheet account. You can then enter an unlimited number of dates and amounts into the future using the future dates you would like to reflect the expense. An example might be real estate taxes. You could code the entire amount to a pre-paid expense account and then break out a percentage for each month covered in the bill.

    The system will move the amounts each month from the balance sheet account to the expense account enabling more accurate reporting.

  2. New Feature – When Using Prepare Checks by Date the system will automatically bring up the invoices selected for Payment after the system chooses the invoices that fall within the payment criteria. In the past Users had to go into a separate menu selection to edit the selected invoices. After exiting additional changes can be made to the batch of invoices selected for payment through Edit Prepared Invoices.
  3. New fields for export – When exporting Vendor Alternate Products through a vendor inquiry in Basic Information, Parts, The Product Classification and Primary Vendor have been added to the information that can be exported to Excel.
  4. New Report Option – The Checks in Process Report used with Enter & Edit AP Checks now has an option to include the distributions from the invoices paid. If you choose not to include the distribution information this report serves as a nice check register representing the check prepared in the batch.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Option – When viewing the Customer Recent Sales Inquiry – through a Customer Inquiry or while you are in a Sales Order there is a new option – Sort by Date.
  2. New Field for Export – Customer State has been added to the Sales Report – Major Accounts. This report is located in Customer Sales Analysis, Major Account Reports. This is not an option when the report is summarized by Major Account Group.

Inventory

  1. New System Flag – Automatically Update Standard Cost from Avg Cost? If this flag is set to Yes each time an inventory record is saved the Standard Cost Field will be updated from the Average Cost unless the Average Cost is Zero. Average Cost is a calculated field which divides the Total Value by the Quantity On hand. If there is no on-hand inventory the Average Cost is zero. Standard Cost is not a real cost and can be used in a limited number of reports and in one of the pricing structures. Some companies choose to pay commissions using a Standard Cost instead of Actual Cost. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Inventory.
  2. New Inquiry – Product Entry Inquiry. This new Inquiry will present a list of Products that were entered into the system within a chosen date range. The system will show the Product Code, Description, User that added the Product along with the date and time. This information is presented in a scroll box and can be exported into Excel.
  3. New Field added to report – Inventory Cost Status Report – When exporting this report to Excel a column has been added for the Last Sale Date of each Product.
  4. New User Flag – Add PPO Usage to Sales Qty in Expert with Stocking Inquiry. Users that have their Product Inquiry Style Flag set to Expert with Stocking have a new option. When using this inquiry style the system can now display Qty Used instead of Qty Sold on the first screen. When displaying Qty Sold – which is the default this quantity will contain the number of pieces sold. The new Option Qty Used will add the components used in PPO’s to the quantity Sold so this number would represent the total usage of the product instead of just sales. This flag Add PPO Usg to Sales Qty in Expert w/Stkng Inq is located in User Flags – Inventory. It is the 4th question on the first screen of flags.

    If you choose not to add the quantity used on a PPO you can see total usage in the Usage Screen.

  5. New System Flag – Allocate All Order/PPO Lines Based on – The choices are Default Location and FIFO or Only 1 Lot/Loc to choose from. The way the system has worked in the past is that if there is only 1 Lot/Location combination to choose from the system would automatically allocate from this location when Allocate or Send All was chosen. Now there is a new option – if you are using Default Locations the system will allocate automatically from the Default Location in FIFO order when there are multiple lots. This flag can be changed to use the new method in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry – Screen 5 of 5.
  6. New Menu consolidating Lot Maintenance routines. A new Menu has been added to the Inventory System – Lot Tracking Maintenance. This is the 5th choice in the Inventory System, replacing Change Product Cost. Change Product Cost is now located in this menu and is called Edit Product Lot Cost. This menu now also has the Change Product Locations menu, Editing of Lot Label Comments, Editing of Manufacturing Information within Lots, Entry of Weights as well as some License Plate maintenance items used in the Wireless Warehouse.
  7. New Flag – Cost to be used on report – When running select reports Users can choose to use Actual Cost (most common), As of Standard Cost, or Actual Standard Cost. This Flag can be set to the most common and can also be changed on the fly. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable. The default is Actual Cost.
  8. New Flag – Show UOM in Detail Scroll Box – If it is important for Users to see the Unit of Measure in the scroll box when entering or inquiring on documents this flag can be set to Yes. The Unit of measure will then be displayed. When this flag is set to Yes the description field will be reduced to accommodate the added unit of measure information.

    The length of each field in the scroll box can be changed in Detail & Scroll Line Flags which is located in Entity & System Flags.

  9. New User Flag – Show License Plate Number in Grid – If this User Flag is set to Yes the License Plate Number which is used with the Wireless Warehouse system will be displayed in the Lot Tracking Detail Screen next to the Lot Number. This flag can be changed in User Flags – Inventory, Inquiries.

General Ledger

  1. Report Change – The Journal Entry Report will now be presented in a scroll box/grid when presented to the Screen.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Field for Export – Customer State has been added to the Sales Report – Major Accounts. This report is located in Customer Sales Analysis, Major Account Reports. This is not an option when the report is summarized by Major Account Group.

Utilities

  1. New Display option – Companies can now choose to display the Unit of Measure fields on the detail line screens of Sales Orders, Purchase Orders and Invoices. If the system flags are changed to display the unit of measure less space will be left for the description field. This can be setup in the system setup, Detail Scroll Line Max setup.
  2. New Security Flag – Allowed to Change Customer Credit Hold Status. This new flag is located in Enter & Edit User Permissions on the 4th screen. If this is set to No the User will not be able to apply or remove the Credit Hold Status on a Customer.
  3. Document Scanning – Certification can now be scanned in during the Receiving Process in the Receive Tracking Detail Screen. There is a new Function Key/Button that will prompt the User to scan the document.

Branch Features

  1. New Feature – When entering a Branch Transfer – Branch Available Quantities have been added to the Detail lines in Enter & Edit Transfers.

Release Notes – October 2009 – February 2010

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Feature – Clear Pick Ticket Printed. If you are using the Print Pick Tickets not printed report – this new feature gives you the ability to mark a particular order so that it will show up the next time you run the Print Pick Tickets not printed report. Some companies use this report as a way to decide which Pick Tickets they would like to print based on order size and stock status.

    You can mark a Pick Ticket as not printed in Order Entry File Maintenance, Clear Pick Ticket Printed Info.

  2. New Flag – Pop-Up Customer / Vendor Notes in Document Selection – When this flag is set to Yes and there is a Note set to popup for a Vendor or Customer, the notes will pop up when a related document is selected. The default for this flag is No. This flag is located in Enter & Edit System Flags 2.
  3. New fields – When adding a One-Time Ship To on a Sales Order you can now also enter the Federal Express Account Number and Special Instructions for that shipping address. If you choose to save the new address in the Customer Master File you will not be allowed to Edit the Shipping Address from the order. Changes need to be made in Enter & Edit Customers or Enter & Edit Customer Addresses. This way any other orders with the same address will get updated.
  4. New fields for Export. When exporting the Past Due Order Inquiry you now have the option to include Order Notes to the Excel format. If there are multiple notes they will be combined in one cell of data.
  5. New Field for export – When the Salesperson Booking Report is exported the data will now indicate Order Type. If you chose to add Quotes to the Booking Report, it is helpful to know the type of Orders were booked.
  6. New Feature – Add Alternate Product Codes – You can now allow users to add Alternate Product Codes to Products without going into Enter & Edit Products. In Order Entry File Maintenance there is a new option Add Alternate Product Code. Users must have permissions to use this new feature. The permissions are setup on the last screen of the security level setup, the default is No.
  7. New Feature – Contacts can now be assigned to individual Sales Orders. When setting up the contact for the Order, Users can also choose to automatically send them a copy of the invoice. User can select the contact screen by clicking on or pressing F2. There is also a system flag that will cause the Customer Contact Screen to pop up each time a User enters an order.

    When entering Contacts users can add a new contact or select a contact from the Customer record.

  8. New Feature – When setting up Substitute Products you can now have the system automatically Substitute a Product on an Order. When entering the Substitute a new option has been added to the question Type of Order / PO Replacement – Auto Substitute. When this option is set and an order is entered for the original product the system will automatically change the order to use the substituted product. The user will also get a message so they are aware the Order was changed.

    This is handy if you are permanently replacing a product. Orders imported through the Import Orders menu option will also make the substitution.

    Product Substitutes can be entered in Enter & Edit Inventory, F5-More, F8-Subs.

  9. New Feature – In the past users could set a flag that would warn them when the order that was being entered would create a negative availability. This flag has been expanded to include three options, Negative, Below Re-Order Point or None.

    In addition, when using the warning options the messages will now be more informative. If there is not enough inventory available and there are not enough already coming in on a PO or PPO the message will say Not Enough Available!

    If there is not enough available but there is enough coming in on a PO, PPO or Work Order it will show (Inventory Incoming) next to the warning. Using the Re-Order Point Option will display This Quantity Takes the Inventory Below Re-Order Point! The Re-Order Point message will only show if the first two options do not show.

    When displaying the message that there is not enough inventory the message will also indicate if there is a Substitute Product setup in the system so the User could change offer their customer another option that may be in stock.

  10. New Feature – Move Unallocated. Lines to New Order – If you have a Sales Order that is partially allocated you can now move the unallocated line items to a new Sales Order. The line items that are moved to the new order will be removed from the original order. Partially allocated lines will not be moved, only line items where no inventory has been allocated. This new feature is located in Order & Quote Entry, Duplicate Orders Menu.

Counter Sales

  1. New Features – You can now add a New Customer on the fly in Counter Sales using the F3 Key. Customer Notes have also been added to the first screen in Enter Counter Sales and can be accessed with the F4 key.
  2. New Feature – Price table information can now be viewed in Counter Sales when entering an order. On the Line item screen F9-$ will show the price table information.

Purchase Order System

  1. New fields – Business Type is a field in the Vendor Master file. Some new options have been added to the existing Business Types – Domestic, Overseas, Secondary Process and Consumables. The Business Type is not used functionally in the system but it used for reference. It has also been added to the export of the Open PO Report with Detail when this report is exported to Excel.
  2. Report functionality expanded – Open P.O. Not Confirmed List – This report will present a listing of Purchase Orders that have not been confirmed in The BUSINESS EDGE. In the past the only place you could confirm a P.O. was on the final screen of Enter & Edit Purchase Orders.

    You can now mark a P.O. as confirmed by pressing or clicking on F2-Confirm while the PO is in the scrolling box. You can also drill into any PO to view the information in a PO Inquiry. When selecting this report there is also an option to show either the Phone Number or the Ship Via in the scroll box.

  3. Changed screens – Some of the screens have changed slightly when receiving Purchase Orders. This was due to the addition of a new optional Container System that has been added to The BUSINESS EDGE for companies that import. In making these changes improvements were made to insure that the accrued account is maintained more accurately.
  4. New Feature – Purchas Order Blanket Dates – If an Original Promise Date is not entered on the Heading of a Purchase Order the system will Prompt the User for a Beginning and Ending Blanket Order Date. Once the Purchase Order is created the Blanket Dates can be edited with the F2-Blnkt key.

    The Earliest Blanket Date is the earliest date that the vendor is expected to ship product. The Latest Blanket Date is the latest date that the vendor is expected to ship product.

    When using the Automatic Replenishment System the system will look at the incoming inventory as coming in on the Earliest Blanket Date. This will prevent users from accidentally placing another PO for the same product. Other inquiries such as the Product Inquiry and consolidated Documents Inquiry will show the inventory as expected to be received in at the Latest Blanket Date. When the system shows the Blanket PO as coming in there will be a + before the PO Number indicating that it is a Blanket PO.

    When the Vendor releases product to be shipped Users must then fill in the Original Promise Date or Current Promise Date fields either on the Heading of the Purchase Order or if it is certain line items on the Detail Lines and then the system will treat those products as normal.

  5. New Report – Blanket Purchase Order Report – This report enables users to view what Products are on blankets Pos and what Date the Po needs releasing. This report is located in Purchase Order Reports – Open PO Reports, Blanket P.O. Report.
  6. New Flag Option – Auto Select Alt Part Code on PO flag now has 3 options.

    No – If you answer this way it means that the system will not use an Alternate Product Code unless the Users selects the Product by the Alternate.

    Only if Not Entered by alternate – If you answer the flag this way and you select a Product by Alternate (even with the ! recent feature) the PO will use the alternate you chose the Product by. If you do not select the Product by Alternate and there is an Alternate assigned the Vendor you are entering a PO for the system will automatically make that Vendors Alternate fill the Alternate field. (These were the results when this flag was previously answered Yes)

    First Assigned Alternate – If you answer the flag this way if there is no alternate assigned to the Vendor no Alternate will be used. If there is an Alternate assigned to the vendor the system will automatically use the assigned alternate.

  7. New Feature – When printing a Merchandise Receiving Document the system will now warn Users if the Purchase Order they have selected has already been received in the System.
  8. New Feature – You can now use the Shipper File that is used on Sales Orders for Purchasing documents. When the flag – Use Shipper List for PO/PPO/Work Orders is set to yes the Ship Via field will force Users to select a valid Ship Via on the heading of Purchasing Documents. Default Shippers can also be assigned to Vendors in Enter & Edit Vendors if you would like that field to automatically populate.

    Sales and Purchasing documents use the same shipper file. When adding Shippers to the Shipper File, a generic shipper could be setup to handle odd shipping companies that you may not want coming up in the Shipper list. You can do this by assigning a generic name such as LTL and then in the Shipper file designate that the Extra Shipper Description be sent to the form instead of the Shipper Name.

    If you would like to start using this feature, the flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders on the third screen.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – When viewing a Cardex Inquiry for an Item that came in on a PPO, Users now have the option to view the PPO Inquiry. If you enter or click on the transaction where the Quantity is Received there is now a key to view the PPO.
  2. New Feature – When using the Quick PPO option Enter & Receipve PPO’s where you can Enter, Send and Receive all in one step a flag has been added to further speed up the process. This can only be used by companies that do not need multiple tags, do not need to enter the weight, manufacturing information and label comments.

    When the flag – Skip Tag Detail in Quick PPO is set to Yes the system will create one tag for the quantity received and skip two screens, the In Process and Update screens will also be eliminated as the product will be automatically received. This flag is set in Entity & System Flags on the last screen.

  3. New Feature – You can now use the Shipper File that is used on Sales Orders for Purchasing documents. When the flag – Use Shipper List for PO/PPO/Work Orders is set to yes the Ship Via field will force Users to select a valid Ship Via on the heading of Purchasing Documents. Default Shippers can also be assigned to Vendors in Enter & Edit Vendors if you would like that field to automatically populate.

    Sales and Purchasing documents use the same shipper file. When adding Shippers to the Shipper File, a generic shipper could be setup to handle odd shipping companies that you may not want coming up in the Shipper list. You can do this by assigning a generic name such as LTL and then in the Shipper file designate that the Extra Shipper Description be sent to the form instead of the Shipper Name.

    If you would like to start using this feature, the flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders on the third screen.

  4. New Feature – PPO Receipts can now be updated by User. Multiple Users can be Receiving and Updating PPO Receipts at the same time. When a User goes to Update their PPO Receipts the system will default their user name as the batch to update.
  5. New Feature – PPO Auditing – PPO’s are now audited to track when fields on the document change. In a PPO Inquiry, F3-Basic Info, F2-Change History will display this information.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Inquiry fields – when in a Customer Inquiry and viewing Customer Addresses there are now options to see Tax, Shipping Info and UPS
  2. Changed Screens – Enter & Edit Deposit. When entering a check for a customer the Unapplied Balance is now accessed by clicking on or pressing F2-UB instead of being presented as a line with the open invoices.

Accounts Payable

  1. Changed Screens – Enter & Edit Vendor Invoices – When entering Vendor Invoices some of the screens will appear slightly different as this module was re-written to accommodate a new Container System. All of the same information is entered but in a slightly different order. When entering invoices for Inventory Vendors all accrued documents will now be selected under F5-Accrued Documents. Once you select Accrued Documents the first prompt will be the Type of document and will default to Purchase Order, you can change the type by pressing spacebar enter to select a Processing Purchase Order for instance. You can then enter the document number you would like to select.

    There is a very handy option that you can use without changing the document type – F2-Document Inquiry. If you select the Document Inquiry the system will automatically show you all Open Accrued Items for the Vendor you have chosen. You can then use the F2 and F3 in that screen to add an remove documents. You can drill into a specific document if you need to adjust the values.

    Other options that changed on the main Vendor invoice Screen include F6 which is now used to apply Container documents, F7 is now Laid in Cost and F8-Images will bring you to any documents you have tied to the Vendor you have chosen via inbound faxes or scanned documents.

  2. New Feature – Stricter Date Control when entering Vendor Invoices for Accrued Documents. The system will no longer allow an invoice to be entered with a date in a prior month to an inventory receipt. This will ensure that the Accrued Document List does not get out of line with the general ledger. In the Past the system would allow an invoice to be entered in January and applied to a Purchase Order received in February. The result being inaccurate Accrued figures in January.

Inventory

  1. When importing new or updated Inventory Records there is now an option to import the Price Table Code into the Inventory Master File. The Price Table that is referenced must exist in The BUSINESS EDGE.
  2. New field – You can now enter Contract # when entering or importing Vendor Contract Costs. This is an open field that can be used for any type of reference back to the Vendor. Vendor Contract Costs are entered in Enter & Edit Products.
  3. New Feature – When setting up Substitute Products you can now have the system automatically Substitute a Product on an Order. When entering the Substitute a new option has been added to the question Type of Order / PO Replacement – Auto Substitute. When this option is set and an order is entered for the original product the system will automatically change the order to use the substituted product. The user will also get a message so they are aware the Order was changed.

    This is handy if you are permanently replacing a product. Orders imported through the Import Orders menu option will also make the substitution.

    Product Substitutes can be entered in Enter & Edit Inventory, F5-More, F8-Subs.

ISO System

  1. New Feature – Users can now manually mark documents as on time or late or even revert back to calculated for the purpose of reporting on the Scorecard Reports for Customers and Vendors.

    To change the status of documents Users can run the Scorecard to the screen displaying the documents. Drill into a specific document by clicking or pressing enter on the line. Then either click of press the function key to change the status of the selected document.

    Users must be give permission in Enter & Edit User Permissions in order to edit these documents.


Release Notes – July 2009 – September 2009

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New fields added to be exported from report – Open Orders by Order Number – when this report is presented to the screen and put into Excel, any Sales Order Notes that are attached to the order will be included in the exported data. If there are multiple notes they will be joined together into one cell within Excel.
  2. New Flag for Report – Show Prices on Open Order Report by Order Number – This flag will default to Yes. If you do not want to show prices on the Open Order Report by Order Number you can change this flag to No in Entity Flags – Order & Quote Entry.
  3. New Report Options – Open Order Report by Date – You can now select a date range and choose to select orders by Order Date or Date Requested. When there is a schedule associated with an order the system will consider the schedule date when running by Date Requested.
  4. New Flag option – There is a flag in the system, that if set to Yes, will warn Users when adding an item to a Sales Order, that it has created a negative availability. This flag has been expanded so that there are now three options – No Warning, Warn when there is negative availability, and the newly added option – Warn when the order quantity causes stock to go below the re-order point. The flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry on the 4th screen – Orders- Warn if Qty Ordered changes Available to – NO Warning, Negative Availability or Below Re-Order Point.
  5. New Feature – New flags for Customers when printing PDF forms. You can now have forms sort the detail lines differently by Customer without affecting the order of the line items in the system. If you use the sort feature on the final screen the line items of an order are permanently sorted and cannot go back to the way they were originally. With these new flags the Order and Invoice formats can be sorted by Line #, Product Code, Product Description or Classification. The default is Line #. The forms that can be sorted are the Quote, Sales Order, Packing List and Invoice.

    This means that if you have a customer that wants their Packing List in order by Product Code you can change their flags and only their Packing List will change. These flags can be changed in Enter & Edit Customers, F5-More, F2-Forms.

  6. New User Flag – Show Recent Purchase Costs in Order Entry – When this User Flag is set to Yes the last three purchase costs will be displayed on the bottom of the screen instead of the first line of the Line Comment. Users can still enter a comment by going into the function button for Line Comment. This flag can be changed in F1=Help, F4-User Flags.

Purchase Order System

  1. New report option – When printing the Open Po’s in Vendor Order there is a new question – New Page for each Vendor. The default answer to this question is No. This can be helpful if you would like to send the report to Vendors for expediting.
  2. New Feature – Product Notes have been added to the receiving screen in Receive P.O’s and Post Accrued. These are internal notes that are also available in Enter & Edit Products and Product Inquiry.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New information on report – When printing the PPO Receipts in Process report it will now include open PPO’s that need products received in the batch on the report if the system flag is set to include detail on the In-Process report. In the past only Sales Orders were included on this report.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Customer Flags – The output options for invoices and statements have now been separated. In the previous version Invoice output also applied to Statements. Now there is a screen to enter the Invoice Information and a separate screen to enter the Statement Information. Initially the invoice information will copy over to the statement flags. They can be changed in Enter & Edit Customers, F2-Default Output, F2-Invoice Output and F3-Statement Output.
  2. New Feature – Minimum Finance Charge – If you charge your Customers Finance Charges you can now set a Minimum Finance Charge. If the Finance Charges calculated by the system are less than the minimum, the system will automatically charge the customer the minimum amount. This can be setup in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable.
  3. New Feature – Merge Customers – This new feature enables Users to combine two customers in The BUSINESS EDGE. After selecting the Primary Customer the one you want to keep, the User will be prompted for the Customer to be absorbed. There are options to merge Alternate Product Codes, Contract Prices, Notes and Addresses. After confirming the merge only the Primary Customer will be in the Customer Master file.

    This new feature is located in Accounts Receivable File Maintenance, Customer Miscellaneous Maintenance, Merge Customers.

  4. New Flag – Use Master Customer for Alternates – If you are utilizing the Master Customer for Customer Contract Prices you can now also link an Alternate Product Code to the Master Customer so that you do not have to maintain separate Alternate Product Codes for each account when there are multiple accounts using the same information. If you would like to utilize this feature the Customers need to have two flags set in Enter & Edit Customers – F5-Additional Info, F8-Master Customer – Select the Master Customer and answer Yes to Use Master Customer for Alternates.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Feature – Remove Vendor Alternates – This selection enables you to remove some or all Alternate Product Codes on a Vendor by Vendor basis. After selecting a Vendor the system will present a list of Alternate Product Codes assigned to that particular Vendor. All Alternates will be marked for deletion. The User can then choose not to delete specific Alternates by pressing F2-Toggle Delete or by clicking on the Toggle Delete key. Upon exiting the screen the system will ask for the User to confirm that they would like to delete the Alternates that were selected for deletion and they will be removed.

    If there are other vendors or customers assigned to the same Alternate Product Code the selected Vendor will be removed and the Alternate Product Code will remain. If the selected Vendor is the only record assigned to their Alternate the Alternate Product Code will be removed from the system.

    This new feature is located in Accounts Payable File Maintenance, Vendor Miscellaneous Maintenance, Remove Vendor Alternates.

Sales Analysis

  1. New report option – Customer Detail Sales by Ship Address/Product Report – this report is located in Customer Sales Analysis, More. This report will enable you to report on up to 3 User defined periods. If you run this report to the screen, you can click the Excel button and modify it to satisfy almost any Customer need.

Inventory

  1. New flag – New Product Force Standard Info – This flag is in Enter & Edit Product Defaults – If you are using the Standard Cost or Standard Price fields you may want to set this new flag to Yes. Each time a new product is entered and this flag is set to Yes the User will automatically be prompted with the Standard Cost/Price screen. If you do not want to go into this screen each time you enter a Product, you can set it to No and then just select it when you need to. Enter and Edit Inventory defaults are located in Inventory File Maintenance just below Enter & Edit Products.
  2. New Feature – Duplicate Products – This new feature will enable a User to select a Product and have the system create a new Product copying over selected information from the original Product.

    After selecting the Product you would like to duplicate the system will prompt the user with Yes/No questions to duplicate the following information which is optional: Contract Prices, Substitute Products, Bill of Materials / Process Definitions (for Manufacturing Clients), Stocking Values, Able Label Values and Document Groups. The User will then be prompted to enter the new Product Code. Once the new Product Code is entered the User will be in Enter & Edit Products for the new Product where they can change the Description and any other pertinent information.

    The following information is automatically duplicated: Product Description, Product Classification, General Ledger Accounts, Product Category, Standard and Default Costs, List Price, Units of Measure and the Product Default settings.

    Duplicating a product does not duplicate the following information – Vendor Contract Costs, Alternate Products, UPC Code, Product Notes, Product Lost Sales, Product Specification (this can be done in the manufacturing system) or Customer Bins.

    This new feature is located in Inventory System, Inventory File Maintenance, Duplicate & Merge Products.

  3. New User flag related to Duplicating Products – When in a Sales Order and or Purchase Order when on the Detail Lines screen there has always been a feature to enter a new Product on the fly without leaving the document. Users can now choose to have this function be either Enter & Edit Products or Duplicate Products. This flag can be changed in User Flags – Inventory Prod+ Fkey Function – choosing either Enter & Edit Products or Duplicate Products.
  4. New Feature – Merge Products – This feature will enable Users to combine two products. This is useful if different Users entered the same part using slightly different Product Codes. Once you have history on a Product you cannot remove it. This new feature solves that problem by combining the two Products into one.

    After selecting the Primary Product that you want to retain, you are prompted for the Product to be absorbed. There are options to merge Notes and Alternate Product Codes. After confirming, the information from both products will be reflected in the Primary Product. This is located in Inventory File Maintenance, Duplicate & Merger Products.

  5. New Feature – RoHS and DFARS Compliance can now be tracked on a lot by lot basis. When the flags to track this information are set to Yes Users can set the RoHS and DFARS flags on a lot by lot basis to either Yes, No or Unknown. When this flag is initially turned on all parts will be defaulted to No.

    If you would like to use this feature the flags are in Setup Miscellaneous, 8. Enter & Edit System Tracking Flags. Track RoHS and Track DFARS. If your practice is to track this information by Part Number you would not use this feature.

General Ledger

  1. New User Flag – Financial reports – Show GL Code – This new User Flag will default the question to Show GL Code when printing the Balance Sheet and Income Statement. This flag can be set in User Flags – General Ledger.
  2. New Feature – Import Journal Entries has been integrated with Enter & Edit Journal Entries. Instead of importing Journal Entries as a separate menu choice Users can import them directly into the Enter & Edit Screen through the F3 key. This allows editing of the Journal Entry after it has been imported and before it is updated.

Utilities

  1. New fields for export – When exporting Vendor Master File information you can now include the default output fields in your export format. These are the different e-mail addresses for documents. You could then update the information and import the information back into their system. This makes e-mailing documents such as PO’s, PPO’s RFQ’s and Debit Memo’s easier since the proper contacts will come up automatically.
  2. New fields for export – When exporting Inventory Master File information you can now include the last PO Receipt Date and the last Sale Date to your format.
  3. New Security Level Option – When setting up Security Levels one of the options was to allow a Level of Employee’s permission to Fax documents from the system. This flag has been expanded to include both Faxing and E-mailing with PDF forms and reports.
  4. New Export Option – Export Sales Journal Detail by Invoice Number – this new selection will enable users to export invoice detail information on an invoice by invoice basis. After setting up a format the User simply types in the invoice number or range of invoice numbers to include in the export. The data can then be exported to excel, a file on the server or e-mailed. This new selection is in Export AR Information, Export Sales.
  5. New Export Option – Export Order & Quote Detail by Order Number – this new selection will enable users to export order detail information on an order by order basis. After setting up a format the User simply types in the Order number or range of Order numbers to include in the export. The data can then be exported to excel, a file on the server or e-mailed. This new selection is in Export Order & Quote Information, Export Order Detail by Order #.

Branch Features

  1. New Report – Re-Order Point Usage Report this report provides detailed information on products within a product range within a branch. This includes similar information to the Re-Order Point by Branch. Usage figures and Previous Vendor purchases are also included.
  2. New Feature – Edit Product Default Locations. If you are using Default locations that are tied to individual products you can update the default locations through a new menu item instead of going into Enter & Edit Products. This new selection is located in Inventory File Maintenance, Location System, Change Product Locations.

Release Notes – March 2009 – June 2009

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New fields for export – When exporting the Detail Lines of a Sales Order the document specific Comments and Default PO Cost will now be included in the exported information.
  2. New Flag in Enter & Edit Customers – Change back to Default Shipper on BO? Yes/No. If this flag is set to Yes, the system will change the shipper back to the default shipper of the customer’s address record when there is a backorder. This is extremely helpful for customers that require contacting a freight forwarder on every shipment. Users can enter a shipper of “See Instructions” or “Check Customer Instructions” and then when the order is ready to ship the user can change the shipper to the actual shipper that the freight forwarder wants them to use. The backorder get set back to Check Customer Instructions each time.

    This new flag is located in Enter & Edit Customers, F5-More. This flag will default to No on existing and new customers.

  3. New Feature – On the first screen of E&E Orders and E&E Invoices, there is a new selection – F2=Cntct (in the new UI it will be Order Contact or Invoice Contact). This new screen will enable Users to do the following:

    Select an existing Customer Contact to assign to the order (as the “Ordered By”).

    Enter a new Contact to assign to the Order to. If it is a new contact, the system will ask the User if they want to save it permanently in the Customer file.

    If you change a contact on this screen that is also in the Customers contact list, the system will ask if the User wants to save the changes permanently in the Customer file.

    When a contact is selected, their information is used when e-mailing or faxing a sales order.

    There is also a new default flag for customer contacts – E-Mail Copy of Invoice – if this is set to yes, then when the contact is selected on an order or invoice, this will be copied to the order/invoice flag. When the order/invoice flag is set to yes and when the client uses “Send Invoices in Process,” the contact person will be e-mailed a copy of the invoice, no matter what the default output for that customer is.

    Just like editing customer addresses, when editing customer contacts, if a User changes the contact information, they will be prompted to update the open orders and invoices assigned to that contact with the current contact information.

    There is also an option in the system to have this screen pop-up automatically after the first order entry screen (if the information is not filled in). If you would like this screen to pop up automatically for all Users this new flag – Show Order Contact Screen before Detail? needs to be set to Yes. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry – screen 5 of 5.

  4. New Flag – Orders – Warn if No Contract Price? – If it is standard practice for all of your Customers to be setup with Contract Pricing for all of their products Users can now receive a warning if they add an item to an order that does not have a contract Price. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry.
  5. New Feature – Order Audit Inquiry – The system now keeps track of each time information changes on an order. It keeps track of the Date, Time, User, Information changed as well as the old and new values. This information can be viewed in Order Inquiry, F4-Basic, F2- Change History.
  6. New Inquiry – Deleted Sales Order Inquiry – This new inquiry replaces the old inquiry that was changed due to the Order Audit information that is being created and referred to in the note above. The Deleted Sales Order Inquiry is located in Order Reports, Lost Sales Reports.
  7. New Flag – Allocations – Show Customer Instructions – When this flag is set to Yes and an Order Number is entered to be allocated the Customer Instructions (Picking Instructions, Packing Instructions and Order Heading Instructions) will be automatically displayed on the screen.

    If you would like all Users to see the instructions when they are allocating you can change this flag which is located in Entity & System Flags – screen 5 of 5.

  8. New Export Field – When exporting the Ship Schedule by Cust-Part-Date the field Pick Ticket Printed will now be included at the end of the data. If a Pick Ticket had been printed for the particular order. This will include the User that printed the Pick Ticket along with the Date and Time.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Flag – Show in Purchase Order Detail – When entering a Purchase Order Detail line the system default is to display the Stocking Unit of Measure information on the screen. You can now alternately view the Stocking Quantities with this new Flag. This flag can be changed in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders on screen 1 of 3. The stocking quantities that will be displayed when this flag is set are Re-Order Point, Max Quantity to Stock and Minimum Purchase Quantity.
  2. New Feature – When updating Purchase Order Receipts, your system is defaulted to either Update the Default PO Cost from the Raw Cost, Landed Cost or not to update it at all when updating receipts. You can now over-ride the system default on a line by line basis when entering a Purchase Order by pressing F8-More. When you press F8 you will see your system default. You can press Spacebar to see and change the selection.

    Most companies update their Default PO Cost from the Raw Cost on a Purchase Order. If you happen to make a purchase at a higher or lower cost than usual, you can now on a line by line basis change this option and not update your Default PO cost.

  3. New Feature – Ship Via on Purchase Orders and Processing Purchase Orders – You can now use the same Shipper System that is used for Sales Order for the Purchasing documents. This enables the User to select from a drop down selection that is entered into the system.

    The Shipper can also be defaulted in the Vendor Master File and can populate this field automatically.

    If you would like to Use this new feature the flag Use Shipper List for PO/PPO/Work Orders needs to be changed to Yes in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders – screen 3 of 3.

  4. New Security Flags – Access to Hold and Pending Orders. If there are Users that you do not want to have access to Hold and Pending Orders which were added recently as options you can now take away access in Enter & Edit Security Levels,

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. When exporting the Detail Lines of a Processing Purchase Order, the Default PO Cost will now be exported. This could be helpful in estimating the cost of a kit based on the default costs of the components.
  2. New Feature – Users will now receive a warning when they receive in more finished product on a Processing Purchase Order than the raw material quantities that were sent out. In the warning the system will show the user the maximum quantity that they can receive based on the BOM in the PPO. This warning comes up when the user enters the quantity received.

    If the user needs to send more products they can exit the receipt process and send additional products to cover the quantity received.

  3. New Feature – You can now Use the Shipper File that is used for Customer Orders to select a valid Ship Via on Purchase Orders and Processing Purchase Orders. If you would like to select Ship Via’s from a drop down selection box the flag Use Shipper List for PO/PPO/Work Orders Y/N needs to be set to yes in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders. When you turn this flag on the Ship Via on previous Purchase Orders will be maintained but all future shippers must be valid.

    If you are currently not using the Shipper System in Order Entry we can fill the Shipper file and then you can add and or remove Shippers as you like through Enter & Edit Shippers found in Accounts Receivable Maintenance.

    Shippers can be defaulted in the Vendor Master Record. If you have Ship Via’s currently setup in the Vendor this information will no longer be valid since it is not the correct format for the Shipper file.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Feature – Customer Specific Forms – The BUSINESS EDGE can now print custom Quotes, Sales Orders, Packing Lists, Invoice and Statements on a customer by customer basis. There are five flags in the customer record where a specific code can be entered calling out a specific format. These flags are located in F5-More, F2-Forms.

    This is helpful if you have a customer that requires a format that is different than the format you use for your other customers. The generation of these forms is billable at our normal hourly rate. This feature is only available with PDF forms.

  2. New Feature/Flag – You now have the option to edit and allocate existing orders that are assigned to a customer that is on Credit Hold. When a Customer in on Credit Hold the system still stops the user from creating new orders and creating invoices for the Customer on hold, but with this flag set to Yes Users are still able to process existing orders without removing the credit hold.

    This new flag is located in Edit Security Levels – Entry and Deletion Access – Allowed to Edit / Allocate Orders on Credit Hold. The default is set to No.

  3. New Feature – If you are using the Credit Card feature in The BUSINESS EDGE this feature has been enhanced. There is a new User Security Flag in Enter & Edit User Permissions – Allowed to See Full Credit Card Information? When a User has permissions to see full credit card information they can now see the full set of numbers for the Customers Credit card. If this security flag is set to No then users can only see the last 4 digits of the Credit Card number.
  4. New Feature – When entering a Sales Order if your Customer’s Payment Terms are setup to use a code CC for Credit Card – the system will automatically pop a screen where a User can select from the Customers Credit Card or enter a new Credit Card on the fly.

    When on the final screen of a Sales Order the Credit Card information can now be viewed and/or edited from the Totals Screen, F5-Credit Card. Only Users with permissions to view full credit card information can edit this information. Other Users will simply see the last 4 digits for the Card for verification purposes.

    Also, when on the final screen of an Invoice the Credit Card information can be viewed through the Totals key. Only Users that have permissions to see complete information, others will simply see the last four digits.

  5. New Field – Customer Contract # – This new field is in the Customer Contract Price record. If you have Customers that have a Contract Number, Purchase Order Number or some other number that they need to you to print on their documents on a line per line basis, this is where that information can be maintained. This information can be formatted to print on the documents you send your customers. Form changes would be charged at our normal hourly rate.

    There is also a flag associated with this field.

  6. New Flag – Allow Overlapping Dates in Contract Pricing? If this flag is set to No the system will not allow contract pricing to be entered for the same customer with different over-lapping dates.

Accounts Payable

  1. New fields for Export – When exporting Vendor information the Default Output options are now available choices to export through Export Vendor Information.

Sales Analysis

  1. New field for export – Customer Contract Price has been added to the Customer Detailed Sales by Product when this report is presented to the screen for export. This report is located in Customer Sales Analysis.
  2. Report now goes to Excel. Salesperson Sales by Product will now be presented in a scroll box when screen is selected as the output options. This report is located in Salesperson Sales Analysis.
  3. New Feature – Customer Scorecard Report – currently shows the total number of returned items and now has an Fkey F2=Returned Items that gives the list of returned line items. This can be dropped into excel to see the details of quantity, product, description, extra description and line comment. They can also drill into the line to get an invoice detail line inquiry.
  4. New Feature – In Enter & Edit Deposits, when selecting a customer or an invoice, if the customer is on credit hold, the system will present you with a scrolling box listing all open orders for that customer along with the credit hold information. If there are no open orders, it will just display the credit hold information.
  5. New fields for Export – When in a Customer Inquiry, F4-Basic, F10-Parts, your Customers Parts will be listed. When this information is exported it will now include the Average Cost and Total Value fields.
  6. New Feature – Automatically copy salespeople via e-mail on Customer Invoices – Salespeople can now automatically receive an e-mail copy of an invoice they are assigned to when Send Invoices in Process is used.

    In Enter & Edit Salesperson, the Salesperson’s e-mail address must be filled in and the Question E-mail Copy of invoice needs to be set to Yes. This feature is only functional with Send Invoices in Process. Fax invoices in process and/or Print Invoices in Process will not e-mail a copy of the invoice.

  7. New Credit Card Features – If you are using the Credit Card feature in The BUSINESS EDGE, there are some new screens where you can add, change or view the Credit Card information on an Order.

    If the Use Credit Card System flag is set to Yes and the Payment Terms on a Sales Order are CC, Users will be prompted upon completing the first screen in Enter & Edit Orders to either Pick an existing Credit Card or enter a new Credit Card.

    You can now view and or change the credit card information on the Final Screen by selecting Order Totals and then Credit Card. If you enter a new Credit Card from these new screens you also need to select it after entering it.

Accounts Payable

  1. When printing documents for your Vendor such as the Purchase Order, Processing Purchase Order or Debit Memo you can choose to print Your Product Code, Alternate Product Code or both. This selection is setup in Enter & Edit Vendors, F9-Print Options. If this requires a form change our normal hourly charge of $150 will apply.
  2. When processing checks by Date and Editing Prepared Invoices the system will now display a running total of all invoices selected for Payment on the Heading of the screen. When a check is de-selected the total will decrease, if it is re-selected it will increase.

Inventory

  1. New Feature – When adding an Alternate Product Code to the system by default the system would copy the Internal Product Description to the Alternate Description. You can now specify which Description you would like the system to copy to the Alternate upon entry of a new Alternate Product Code. You can choose the Internal Description or the Selling Description. This option can be setup in Entity & System Flags – Description to Copy to Alternate Description. This is located on Screen 3 of 3.
  2. New Feature – You can now specify which Product Description to print on your Vendor documents – Product Code, Alternate Product Code or Both. This can be setup for the Purchase Order, Processing Purchase Order, Debit Memo and Merchandise Receiving Document. This can be setup on a Vendor by Vendor basis. If you would like to utilize this new option, there could be associated form changes, depending on your current format. These would be billable at our regular hourly programming rate.
  3. New Feature – When using the +/- to select the next product in the General Product Inquiry or Order Entry you can now choose the next Alternate when at the Alternate prompt.
  4. New Feature – Select Next Product By – This flag has the options of Product / Alternate Product Code or Product Class. If you choose the Product / Alternate Product Code the system will work just as it has in the past. If you choose Product Class then the system will select the next product within the last class that you selected. If you press + or – when selecting a product, you will be given a scrolling box with the entire class’ product in it starting with the last product selected.

    This new flag is located on screen three of Entity and System Flags – Inventory. The default setting is Product / Alternate Product Code.

  5. New Flag – If you have default locations for Products this new flag will make it easier to update the default location stored in a Product. If this new flag is set to Yes you will have the opportunity to change the Default Location when moving product from one location to another. Ask to Change Product Default Location during Move.
  6. Screen Change – The final screen of the Inventory Manual Adjustment has changed slightly.
  7. New User Flag – Show Vendor Code/Name in “Expert” Product Inq. If you are using the Expert Product Inquiry Screen option, the last three purchases are shown on the first screen. The default is to show the Vendor Code. You can now choose to see the Vendor Name instead by changing this flag. This flag is located in User Flags – Inventory, F7- Inquiries.
  8. New Lookup Feature/Flag – Select Next Product By – This new flag has the options of Product/Alternate Code or Product Class Code. If you choose the Product/ Alternate Code, the system will work as it always has. In a product inquiry if you press the + or – at the Product Code or Alternate Code Prompts you will automatically pull up either the next or last alpha numeric code.

    If you choose Product Class then the system will select the next product within the last Product Class that you selected. If you press + or – when selecting a product you will be presented with a scrolling box with the entire class’ products in it starting at your last product. You can then scroll up and down through all products in the chosen classification.

    This flag can be changed in Entity and System Flags – Inventory on the third screen.

  9. New feature – Remove Un-used Price Tables – If you have Price Tables in the system that are no longer being used this feature will enable you to remove them. This program will check the price tables against your inventory file. Any tables that are not in use will be displayed.

General Ledger

  1. New Feature – If you have Cost Centers for Branch Locations you can now have the system post to separate General Ledger Accounts by Branch for Accrued Accounts Payable, Inventory Adjustments and Customer Deposits. The system will choose the correct General Ledger Account based on the Cost Center that is setup in the Branch File. If there is not a valid Cost Center in the Branch File the system will post to the Master General Ledger Account without a suffix. This requires having the Optional Branch System along with Cost Centers setup in the system. There must be a main General Ledger Account without a Cost Center suffix and then a General Ledger Account for each Cost Center.

    When you receive a Purchase Order or Processing Purchase Order the system will check the branch and if there is a valid Cost Center in the Branch the receipt will be credited to the appropriate account. When paying the Invoice for the receipt the system automatically applies the invoices to the General Ledger Account that the Purchase Order was received into.

    When you apply a Customer Discount through Cash Receipts the system will automatically apply the discount to the appropriate General Ledger Account assigned to the Branch on the invoice.

    When you do a Manual Adjustment the system will default to the Inventory Adjustment Account that is assigned to the Branch the Adjustments are being made for.

    Cost Centers can be defaulted by Branch or on a Customer by Customer basis. If a Cost Center is setup in a Branch and a Customer, the Branch setting will over-ride the Customer Setting. Your company should choose which way they would like to use the Cost Centers and set your data up appropriately. If you choose to use the Cost Center Feature by Customer there is a flag in the system – Force Customer Cost Centers? When this flag is set to Yes, the will force Users to select a Cost Center when adding a new customer. This flag is located in Entity and System Flags – Accounts Receivable.

  2. New Feature/Flag – Force Customer A/R Account? If your company has multiple Accounts Receivable Accounts for Customers you can now default the Customer Master Record to automatically select the desired General Ledger Accounts Receivable Account when invoicing your Customer. If you set this new flag to Yes, the system will not allow a new customer to be saved without selecting a valid Accounts Receivable Account for the new Customer.

Sales Analysis

  1. New field for export – When exporting the Customer Detail Sales by Product report, the current Contract Price will now be included in the exported data.
  2. New fields for export – When exporting the Salesperson Sales by Customer the Customers Billing Address, Shipping Address and Default Pricing level will now be included in the exported data.

Utilities

  1. New Feature – There is a new menu item Enter & Edit Fax Defaults located in the documentConnection Maintenance menu. This will allow you to set whether you want to have a selected Machine ID auto assign faxes or not. If the flag is set to No the next time a fax comes in with that Machine ID it will not set the Related To field in Document Connection. This is so we can avoid collisions if the sender is not setting up their fax properly and another fax machine sends the same Machine ID.

    In the same screen you can now select a user to automatically send the fax to.

  2. The BUSINESS EDGE now can backup to multiple rsync servers.

    This means that we can backup to a local extra Linux server as well as to the on-line backup server if you are setup for rsync backups. There is a configuration charge to set up the backups.

  3. New Feature – Save outbound PDF’s into documentConnection when they are printed, faxed, e-mailed or viewed from The BUSINESS EDGE. This can be setup on a document by document basis as this will take a lot of hard drive space. If you would like to keep images of particular documents you can set this up in Document Flags, Document Form Numbers, F4-Form Options, Select the form by clicking on it or pressing Enter, F2- Save Copy Options.
  4. New Feature – Customer Document Output options have been added as fields that can be exported through the Export Customer Information.
  5. New Feature – Enhanced Print Job Control – Users can now cancel single print jobs or all print jobs sent to a particular printer. Either by pressing F2 from the Menu or in Utilities, Print Control System, Printer Status and Job Control. Users can highlight the printer they sent their print jobs to, Press enter to see all of the print jobs waiting to print. If you would like to cancel a single print job highlight it and press Enter to cancel a particular print job. To cancel all of your print jobs to that printer, press or click on F2 – Cancel all of My Jobs. This will not cancel other Users Print jobs, only those belonging to the User logged in.
  6. New Feature – Users can now choose a default printer for Merchandise receiving documents.
  7. New Security Setting – There is a new User Security Flag in Enter & Edit User Permissions – Allowed to See Full Credit Card Information?

Branch Features

  1. Branch option has been added to the Customer Sales 12 Month Report.
  2. Branch Option has been added to the import of locations to the location file.
  3. When exporting – Customer Sales History from the F5 in Customer Inquiry the Branch qty on hand by branch will be included for the Products your Customers has purchased.
  4. Branch Option has been added to the Shipping Schedule by Date. This report is located in Order Reports, Scheduling & Expediting Report.

Release Notes – April 2009

» Download Release Notes «

The Business Edge – Graphical User Interface

This month we are releasing The Business Edge 2.0 which is a Graphical User interface that allows for easier presentation and management of your data. Please view the presentation below and if you have any questions email info@ci-inc.com to get in contact with us, or use the Contact Us page.


Release Notes – January 2009 – February 2009

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New User Flag – Sort Allocate Order by – Line Number or Default Location – If your company is using Default Locations – assigned locations by Product – Users can now choose to sort the Allocation Screen by this default location. This is helpful if your Picking Ticket is sorting and printing by these same locations for easy picking. The Allocation screen can now match the order that the Pick Ticket is printed.
  2. New User Flag – Use Document Notes for Orders/Invoices – When in Enter & Edit Orders and or Invoices there is an F3-Notes key on the first two screens. If a User would prefer the F3-Notes key can be document notes instead of Customer Notes. If a User makes this selection then once they are in the document notes they can still access their Customer Notes through the F8 key. If they leave the default to the Customer Notes, the F8 when inside the Customer notes will be the document notes.

    This way each user can customize their screens so that they can get to the notes they use most frequently with the fewest key strokes.

  3. New Order Types – Two new Order types have been added to the system. You can now have a Pending Order or a Hold Order. The regular Order is now called a Firm Order so there is no confusion.

    A Pending Order does not commit inventory to the Order. This can be used if you customer is waiting for approval and you do not want to commit the Inventory until you have that final approval.

    A Hold Order commits the inventory to the Order just like a Firm Order; however it can not be allocated until someone changes it to a Firm Order. This could be used for a serious Order that may require a Purchase Order or some other formality before you can ship it. A Hold Order is treated just like a Firm Order which in the past was simply referred to as the Order. A Hold Order must be change to a Firm Order so that it can be Allocated and Invoiced.

    All of the Order Reports have been changed to reflect these new choices as they can be included or excluded on an Order Type Basis.

  4. New Feature – You can now use the Automatic Replenishment system while in Enter & Edit Orders in the Detail Line the similar to using Set PO. The system will bring up the item as if you were in Select documents for Products in the Automatic Replenishment system. The User can choose to create documents at that time or build a batch and send them all at once.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – You can now select the ARS product range by Alternate Product Code. When looking at the products that were selected by the ARS, it will be in product code order (and only the product code will show). This is just a convenience to run the ARS for a range of products using the alternates.
  2. New Feature – When using the Automatic Replenishment System, Users can now create and empty batch. If you choose 2 Select Documents for Products and there are no open batches the system will prompt the User to create an empty batch. Items can then be added to the batch.
  3. New Feature – When in the detail line of Enter & Edit Purchase Orders, F2 is now a Cardex for the product you have selected. This was previously available as an option for the F3 key, so you can now view more information about the product you are ordering.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – When receiving a PPO the system will now warn the User if they are receiving more of a product than they have sent components for. This is a warning and will allow the user to continue with the process if needed.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New field in Customer Master file – Grace Days for On-Time Delivery. This new flag is used in the Customer Scorecard which provides delivery statistics for your Customer. The grace days for on-time delivery will be added to the Date Requested or Schedule Date of the line items before calculating on-time versus late deliveries. The default setting is 3 days which allows for the billing cycle and or a weekend.

    This field for the Grace Days for on-time delivery can be changed in Enter & Edit Customers, Additional Information. A default can be setup in Enter & Edit Customer Defaults for New Customers.

    The Customer Scorecard compares the invoice date to the Order Date Requested on the Heading of an order, or the line item schedule date if there is one. This report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Status Reports.

  2. New display fields – When in Enter & Edit Invoices, in a Detail Line the system will now display the last price the Customer paid and the Average Cost the same way it is displayed in the Enter and Edit Orders, Detail Line.

Inventory

  1. New Feature – Users can now view Substitute Products from a Product Inquiry by pressing F2-Subs while in the Stocking information screen. Substitutes can be entered in Enter & Edit Products, F5-More, F4-BOM, F3-Substitutes. When a user is in a Sales Order Detail Line or a Processing PO Detail line they can view and or select a substitute product.

    With a branch enabled system, the first screen shows the list of substitute products, the available for the entire entity and the available for the branch. You can drill into each product to get the availability for all the branches.

    With a non-branch enabled system, the first screen shows the list of substitute products, the available and on hand quantities and drilling into a product takes you to its product inquiry.

  2. New Feature – Delete Un-used Price Tables – If you are using the List and or Cost Tables in The BUSINESS EDGE you can now remove old tables you are no longer using. This function is located in Inventory Report, Cost and Price Table Lists.
  3. New User Flag – Product Tracking Sorting – Users can now choose what order they want their F10- Lot Tracking Detail sorted in. Options include – Location, Lot Number (the default), Lot Number/Location, Mfg Lot Number/Location, Location/Mfg Lot Number, Date Received/Location/Lot Number, Date Received/Lot Number/Location.

    The Allocation screens and many of the lot selection programs will also follow the same order. This new User Flag can be changed in F1-Help, F4-User Flags, 5. User Flags Inventory, F7- Inquiries, Sort Product Tracking Information.

    If you are using the branch system there is also an option to Group Tracking by Branch – Options include Code, Name or not grouped. This will be a primary sort for when tracking information for all branches is shown.

  4. New Feature – Users can now view Substitute Products from a Product Inquiry by pressing F2-Subs while in the Stocking information screen. Substitutes can be entered in Enter & Edit Products, F5-More, F4-BOM, F3-Substitutes. When a user is in a Sales Order Detail Line or a Processing PO Detail line they can view and or select a substitute product.
  5. New field added for export – the Customer Usage Report will now include the current Quantity On Hand for Products when exported to Excel. The Customer Usage Report can be generated for any range of Customers, Products and Dates. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Usage Reports, Customer Usage Report.

Utilities

  1. New Menu item – Enter & Edit Fax Defaults – This will allow companies to set whether they want to have a selected Fax Machine ID auto assign faxes or not. If this flag is set to No, the next time a fax comes in with that Machine ID it will not set the Related to field in Document Connection. If you have companies that do not setup their fax machines with the proper Machine ID it will not collide with another company with the same Machine ID. This new feature is located in the Image & Fax System, documentConnection Maintenance.
  2. New Security Flag – Allowed to Close Sales Orders? If you do not want to allow all Users to Close Sales Order you can Answer Yes to this flag in the particular Users Security settings. This question is located on the third screen of Enter & Edit User Permissions.
  3. New Security Flag – Allocate Orders on Credit Hold – If Users are allowed they can not edit and allocate existing orders that are assigned to a customer that is on Credit Hold. When a Customer is on Credit Hole, the system will still stop Users from creating new orders and invoices for the Customer on Credit Hold, but this flag allows them to change the existing orders without having to take them off of Credit Hold first.

Branch Features

  1. Printing Batches of Sales Orders, Pick Tickets, Packing Lists and Purchase Orders are now branch sensitive.

Release Notes – October 2008 – December 2008

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New User Security Flag – Allowed to change cost on Quotes. If you would like to reflect actual projected costs on a Quote to a customer Users will have the ability to change the cost if this flag is set to Yes. When entering a quote the system will show the default PO Cost by Default. When viewing the expected profit on the Quote, it may not be accurate if your Default PO Costs are not current. If the Quote is changed to an Order and billed to the Customer, the Actual Cost will be used based on the value of the allocated Products, the cost entered in a Quote will only be used for analysis purposes.
  2. Report enhancement – Open Order Report by Customer – All Detail. When presenting this report to the screen for export to Excel or a text file the Salesperson is now included in the data.

    There is also a summary provided on the heading of the report which provides a summary of the value of line items that are On Hand, On Purchase Order as well as the value of items that need to be ordered. For some companies Orders may not be confirmed without a PO Number from the Customer so there is also a summary of the value of open orders that have a Customer PO Number.

    This report is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Open Order Reports, Open Orders by Customer – All Detail.

  3. New Flag – Orders-Copy Package Qty to Qty Ordered. If this flag is set to Yes the system will automatically copy the package quantity in the master file to the quantity ordered on a Sales Order. This quantity can be over-ridden. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry on the 4th screen.
  4. New Report – Pick List by Customer – This new report will combine all orders for a particular customer or a range of customers. Users can also select a date range based on the Date Requested or the Schedule Dates. This report will present all items on all orders in the range selected in Location Order along with the product Code, Description, Date Requested and Quantity. This report is located in Scheduling and Expediting Reports, Pick List Reports.
  5. New Report – P.O. Open Order Report – This report will provide a listing of all Orders that are open for a particular Purchase Order. Each Product will be listed along with selected Sales Orders, Quotes, RMA’s and or Work Orders. If you find that you have a price increase on a Purchase Order when you get a confirmation back from a Vendor this report enables you to see what Orders are open so that you can edit the prices if needed. This report is located in Open Order Reports.
  6. New Report – Shipping Summary by Customer – This report is a summary report and will only be generated based on the Date Requested on the heading of an Order. Any date range and range of customers can be selected along with the order types. A listing will be provided including the Customer, Order Date, Date Requested and Order Value. If you have scheduled Orders this report would not be a good choice as different line items could have different due dates. This report is located in a new sub menu Shipping Schedules by Customer which is located in Order Reports, Scheduling and Expediting Reports.
  7. New Report Option – The Open Orders by Customer report provides a listing of all Open Orders for any range of customers. Users can choose to print the Sales Order Date or the Date Requested from the Heading of the Order. If you are using the Scheduling feature by line item, the schedule dates will not show on this report.
  8. New Report Option – The Allocated Orders report will now go to a scroll box and can be exported to Excel or a Text file. This report also now includes a Date Range where Users can select a beginning and ending date for Orders to include in this report.
  9. New Feature – Users can now edit the shipping schedule during Allocate Inventory. Users can only schedule up to the quantity ordered, unlike in Enter & Edit Orders where you could schedule more and the quantity ordered would increase. Order Inquiries will also show the combined allocated and shipping schedule in one scrolling box.
  10. New Feature – Customer Order Audit – Customer Orders will now be audited – We are saving the date, time, user and changes that are made to the order heading and address information. To view the changes from an Order Inquiry, go to Show Basic Info, Change History Fkey. This is not auditing the detail lines but that will be a future enhancement.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – Find open PO’s for vendors – When in Enter & Edit Purchase orders, if you press F5-Vendor before selecting a PO Number you will be prompted for a Vendor Name. Once you select a Vendor the system will show you all Open Purchase Orders for that particular Vendor. If you see a PO that you would like to edit, simply highlight it and press enter or click on it with your mouse and you will be editing that particular PO. (This same feature is available in Enter & Edit Sales Orders)
  2. New Feature – The Purchases Orders in Process report has in the past included all P.O’s being received by all Users. It will now only include the User that is producing the report. When running this report from the menu, a drop down list of Users that have in-process receipts can be viewed so Users can select which user they would like to print receipts for.
  3. When Receiving a PO and using the All Fkey the system will follow these rules – You can only use the All key when all of these rules are satisfied:
    • Tracked systems must allow the system to generate the Lot Numbers
    • If the system cannot set a default location for all tracked items on the PO, a message will be displayed with the first line that does not have a valid location
    • No lines can be previously received individually
    • If the system flag to allow zero cost receipts it set to No, a message will be displayed the first line that has a zero cost
    • Warehouse receipts for the same PO can not be in process through the wireless warehouse or warehouse management system.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Flag – Set PPO Qty Used to “write off” when 0 backorder. When receiving a Processing Purchase Order and zeroing out a backorder the system can either write off the lost product or build the cost of the lost product into the finished inventory increasing the cost based on the lost inventory.

    If you would like the system to automatically write off the lost inventory this new flag should be set to yes. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders on the third screen.

  2. New Feature – Processing Purchase Orders can now be assigned multiple Manufacturer Lot Numbers. This can be done by using the Tag function when receiving the PPO. The internal lot number will be the same, sequential tag numbers will be assigned based on the Users Input.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Feature – You can now edit Customer Payment Terms in Edit Posted Invoices. This is located in Accounts Receivable Invoice Routines, Posted invoice Maintenance, Edit Posted Invoices.
  2. New Report – Customer Tax Receipts Breakdown report – This new report will break out detail of Tax Authorities. If you pay sales tax based on cash received and your tax authorities are entered with breakdowns by State, County, and City etc this report will provide a detailed breakdown making it easier to fill out State Sales Tax Forms. This new report is located in Accounts Receivable, Accounts Receivable Reports, Cash Receipts Reports.
  3. New Feature – You can now drill into the Invoice Listing with Ship to Information inquiry. This inquiry will list all invoices within a range along with the Ship to Address. You can now drill into an invoice on this list and you will be in an Invoice Inquiry for that particular Invoice. This Inquiry is located in Accounts Receivable Reports.
  4. New field added for export – When viewing and exporting the Customer Sales History in a Customer Inquiry (F5) the Default P.O. Cost will now be included in the information exported.
  5. New fields available in scroll box for export. When in a Customer Inquiry, F4-Basic Information, F10-Parts – you can view all Products that have an Alternate Product Code tied to that particular Customer. On-hand Quantities and Locations have been added to the information when exported to a text file or Excel.
  6. Enter & Edit Customers has been changed to accommodate additional needs by customer address such as different default ship methods. The entry screen has been changed so that all Customer Addresses can be entered upon the initial entry of the Customer. Each Address has the option of being specified as the Default Bill Address, Default Ship to Address and Default Statement Address. If only one address is entered it will be defaulted to the Default Bill Address and Default Statement Address.

    When your system is upgraded to this version the Customers address will no longer be located on the first screen, all addresses are accessible through the F7- Address screen. The system will update the current default billing and statement addresses automatically.

    When an address is changed, the User will be prompted to change the information on Open Sales Orders and Un-updated Invoices. Updated documents will not be changed.

    When a new Customer is added, the Address Screen will pop up automatically where all addresses can be added during the initial entry.

    Below are some other changes that will take effect with this new logic:

    One Time Ship to addresses during Enter & Edit Orders now has all Tax and UPS questions.

    A new One Time Ship to Address that is saved, by answering Yes to Save Address, will be set to No for default Ship, Billing and Stmt

    There is a flag that will cause the system to prompt a user to select a Ship to when there are multiple addresses and none are set as the default shipper. This flag Prompt for Ship Address before Order Detail? Is located in Entity & System flags – Order Entry. This is not a new flag but may be of interest if you are not currently using this feature. * If you do not charge Sales Tax you can set a new System Flag: Automatically Ask Tax Questions during Edit Customers to No. This will prevent the system from prompting the user for Sales Tax each time an address is entered. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable. * Customer’s Phone and Fax numbers are now used as defaults when entering a new address, different numbers can optionally be entered in each address.

    The Bill To Address will be moved to the address file and be set as the default Bill to address. If the Bill To Address is already in the address file it will be marked as the default Bill to address and if it’s marked as the default shipper already it will remain the default shipper. If an address has been selected as the default statement address the upgrade will set the new Statement Address flag to Yes

  7. Notes Enhancement – When entering internal Customer Notes you can now specify that the Note pop up when the User that entered the note selects the customer, when all users select the customer or never to pop up. This way you can force Users to read an important internal note. This same ability has been added to Product Notes and Vendor Notes.
  8. Feature Enhancement – When Sending Customer invoices, Users will now be presented with a screen where they can toggle the default output from Fax, e-mail and printing before sending. This way if you have an invoice that you do not want to send for some reason it will not automatically get faxed or e-mailed due to the default settings in the Customer file.
  9. New Feature – Customer Invoice Audit – Customer Invoices will now be audited – We are saving the date, time, user and changes that are made to the invoice heading and address information. To view the changes from an Invoice Inquiry, go to Show Basic Info, Change History Fkey. This is not auditing the detail lines but that will be a future enhancement.

Accounts Payable

  1. New Feature – When generating checks through Process Checks by Date the system will now display the total of the invoices selected for payment in Edit Prepared Invoices. This total will be displayed on the heading of the screen. If you remove invoices or add invoices you can simply exit after making your edits and when you re-enter Edit Prepared Invoices it will have the new total for all of the selected invoices.
  2. New Report – Vendor Invoice Distribution Report – This new report can be generated for any date range and range of vendors. The date range can be based on the Invoice Date. Post Date or Due Date. The report will be in order of GL Distribution Account and will show each Vendor along with the debits and credits posted through accounts payable.

    This report is available in all of the output options including to Excel where it can be sorted in another sequence. This report is located in Accounts Payable Reports, Vendor Invoice Distribution Report.

  3. Notes Enhancement – When entering internal Vendor Notes you can now specify that the Note pop up when the User that entered the note selects the Vendor, when all users select the Vendor or to never pop up. This same ability has been added to Customer Notes and Inventor Notes.

Inventory

  1. New Feature – There is now a menu item that will enable users to update the List price for a range of products based on cost. Any range of products can be selected, by Product Code, Classification, Description or Alternate Product Code. The List Price can be updated based on a + / – percentage change or a multiplier using either Default PO Cost or Standard Cost. This new selection is located in Inventory File Maintenance, Selling Price Maintenance, Assign List Price Change from Cost to Inventory.
  2. New Feature – New Option for Physical Inventory – tracking only. When adding products to the physical count sheet you have an option to only include items over a specific dollar value. This is useful if you only want to count high value items.
  3. New Import – Import Substitute Products. In the inventory master file you can enter substitute products that can be used on either sales order and or Processing Purchase Orders. There is now an import routine where you can input substitute products into the system. In order to do this you would prepare a spreadsheet that has the Product Code that you would like to import substitutes for in column A and then the valid substitute in column B. If you have more than one substitute for a product the main product would be listed multiple times in Column A.

    When in a Sales Order or Processing Purchase Order you can then view the valid substitutes and easily change the product to one of those substitutes. This import is located in Utilities, Import Data Menu.

  4. New report feature – Calculate Re-order and Max Qty to Stock Report. When the system calculates new re-order points and max quantity to stock values you can now have all of the new output options which makes it easier to review, one option is users can export it and sort it in excel. This report shows the current and proposed quantities so that you can review the changes before applying them to your live inventory. The Re-Order Point System is available in the Inventory System and the Automatic Replenishment System.
  5. New Feature – Tracking Only – When creating a worksheet in the Physical Inventory System you can choose to only select items with a total value over a specified amount. When you enter a value in this field, products with a total value less that this value will not be included in the physical.
  6. Screen Change – Non Branch Enabled Systems only – When entering a Sales Order and on a Detail Line the screen will now display the committed quantity instead of just Customer Orders. This will take into Account quantities sent to a processor, items on a Debit Memo or Manufacturing Work Order. You can see all of the detail of a particular part by viewing Availability (F4 in the Wire Frame Screens).
  7. New Feature – Import New Product Codes. There is a new import that will enable Users to create a spreadsheet with their old Product Code and a New Product Code. The system will then automatically change the Product Code in the system. This is handy if you are re-working a large number of Product Codes. You can also change Product Codes individually in Enter & Edit Products.

    All past history and open documents will still be associated with the Product; the Product Code will simply show as the new one.

  8. New information added to Alternate Part Report – When an Alternate Product Code is associated with a Customer or Vendor this report will now include a column with the Customers and or Vendors when sent to a text file or Excel. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists.
  9. New Features relating to Vendor Contract Costs – There is a new menu located in Inventory Reports – Cost & Price Table Lists – Vendor Contract Costs.

    Vendor Contract Cost Report – This report can be generated for any range of Vendors and will provide a listing of all Products associated with those Vendors in a Scroll box. This information can be exported to a text file or to Excel. The information included is Vendor, Product Code, Description, and Alternate if tied to the Vendor, Minimum Quantity, Contract Cost and Package Quantity.

    Product – Vendor Contract Cost Report – This report can be generated for any range of Products and will include all Vendors that have Contract Costs associated with the selected products. The information is presented in a scroll box and can be exported to a text file or Excel. The information included is Product Code, Description, Vendor, and Alternate if tied to the Vendor, Minimum Quantity, Contract Cost and Package Quantity.

    Delete Vendor Contract Costs – This feature will enable users to select a range of Vendors and Products to remove. A listing will be provided in a scroll box so the User can view the records that were selected to be removed. Products can be omitted from the delete by highlighting them in the scroll box and choosing to remove them from the list by clicking on or pressing F2-remove. Once the list for removal is ready the system will have the User confirm and will remove the selected vendor contract prices.

    Update Contract Cost End Dates – This feature will enable a User to Update end dates for a range or Products by Vendor. If you are using the Ending Date this is a quick way to update the Vendor Contract Pricing without having to remove and re-import the pricing.

  10. New Feature – Customer Notes tied to Products – You can now enter inventory notes to print on documents for specific Customers. Inventory Notes can be entered in Enter & Edit Customers, More, Instructions, Inventory Customer Instructions. If you would like your forms changed to print these new notes please fax a sample of the form along with an example of where you would like them to appear.

    Form changes will be billed at our normal hourly programming rate of $150 per hour.

  11. Notes Enhancement – When entering internal Product Notes you can now specify that the Note pop up when the User that entered the Note selects the Product, when all Users select the product or to Never Pop up. Users can also get a Pop up reminder upon logging in on a specific date based on a follow up date and time entered in the Note. This same ability has been added to Customer Notes and Vendor Notes.
  12. New Feature – Product Audits – Products will now be audited, the system will record exactly when information was saved in the product master file. The system will know the value before and after the change, the user, time and date of the change.

    To view the history in Product Inquiry, choose Show Basic Info, ChgHst key. This information can also be found in Utilities, System Administrator, Employee system, Audit Inquiries, Product Audit Inquiry.

General Ledger

  1. New report options – Income Statement Spreadsheet – in the past this report was only available as a printed report. All of the output options are now available including exporting to a text or excel file. This report is located in Financial Reports – Income Statement Spreadsheet. This report will also now include year to date figures for the period selected. In the past the year to date figures was for the fiscal year no matter what periods were chosen.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Report – Customer Sales & Profit by Ship to – This report is the same as the Customer Sales and Profit report that is based on the Bill to address except that a customer will be listed multiple times based on the number of addresses that you shipped to. This report is also longer since the address information has to be included for each address. When this report is sent to the screen it can be easily put into an Excel Spreadsheet.

    Users can select up to three date ranges and any range of customers. You also have options to include quantities and profits. This report is located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis, More Reports – Customer Sales & Profit by Ship Address.

  2. New Report – Customer Detailed Sales by Ship To/Product – This new report will include the same information as the Customer Detailed Sales by product but will be by Customer Ship to Address instead of the billing address. This report is located in Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis, 0. More, Customer Detail Sales by Ship to/Prod.

    Up to three date ranges can be selected along with any range of Customers and Products. This report can be put into Excel or a Text file if the screen option is selected.

  3. New report option – Customer Sales by Product Group will now be presented in a scrolling box when the screen option is selected. This will allow users to export this information to Excel or a Text file. This report is located in Customer Sales Analysis.
  4. Report now goes to Excel – Customer Sales and Profit Ranking Reports which can be generated for Net Sales, Gross Profit and Percent Gross Profit are now presented in a scroll box which enables the information to be put into Excel or a text file for further analysis.

Utilities

  1. New Export fields – When exporting Inventory Master File information Date of Last Purchase, Date of Last Request for Quote, YTD Usage and LYR Usage have been added as export options.

Branch Features

  1. The Accounts Receivable Aging Reports can now be generated by Branch. There is an option to include all Branches or select an individual branch.
  2. New Feature – Branches can now be set as inactive, so that they cannot be selected on Orders, Purchase Orders etc. You must be sure that no open documents or locations are assigned to the branch before making it in-active. The in-active branch will no longer be available for selection; however reports that go back in time will still include the inactive branch information.
  3. New Display – When in Product Inquiry the Show Usage option will show a breakdown of the Usage for all branches along with the total usage for the entity.

Document Scanning

  1. New Feature – When using any of the scan manager options you can now select an image file to upload instead of scanning. Users can select any jpg, tif, or pdf that resides in the upload folder. The system will treat these files just like an incoming fax or scan and puts it into Document Connection. The original file will no longer be there after the upload. As it goes through some conversions depending on which format is uploaded. Be sure you have a copy of the original file saved in another location.

Release Notes – May 2008 – August 2008

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Feature – You now have the option to show the last receipt date for a product when in a Sales Order Detail Line. There is a new flag – Order Detail Show U Cost Extra Info – When you are in the Order Detail Line and have a Product selected the default is to display the Standard Cost. You have the option to change this flag to show the Last Receipt Date for the selected product. This flag is located in Utilities, System Administrator, System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity & System Flags; Order Entry Flags screen 4 of 4.
  2. New Feature – When using F8-Set P.O from Order Entry – When the product that is being ordered is a non-stock item, the unit cost that was entered in the sales order is transferred to the Purchase Order. If the user changes the unit cost while in F8=Set PO, then they are warned (with an option to not change) that the system is going to change the Unit Cost on the Sales Order. This will help keep the values on Non Stock Products consistent which will help keep the inventory value for these items balanced.
  3. New Feature – You can view your Customer’s sales history when in the first 2 screens of a Sales Order by using the F4 – History key or by doing a Customer Inquiry and selecting F5-Recent Product Sales – There is a new option on this screen – Use Cost. The default is to use the Actual Cost that was applied to the sale, alternatively you can now change that to be Standard Cost if you are using the Standard Cost field. Standard Cost is a cost that is entered or imported into The BUSINESS EDGE. It is not used in any actual transactions that affect the General Ledger.
  4. New Feature – Attaching Lot Certificates with Packing Lists. If you have the documentConnection Scanning system and have scanned in certificates that are attached to your Lot numbers you can now have them print automatically. When the flags are set and you print either a Packing List or a pre-allocated Picking Ticket you can automate this process of attaching the certificate. The flags to turn this on are in 9.Utilities, 4. Document Flags, 4. Enter & Edit Certificate Printing. The flags are Print documentConnection Certificate with Picking Ticket and Print documentConnection Certificate with Packing List. The options are Never (the default), Print or Adobe only or All Output Options which includes fax and e-mail.
  5. New Feature – Print Pick Tickets Not Already Printed. The system automatically keeps track of when a Picking Ticket is printed, stamping it with a User Name, Date and Time it was printed. There is a new menu option that will enable Users to view all Orders where a Pick Ticket was not printed. Orders can then be selected to print or not by selecting or deselecting the Orders with the F5 Key. Upon exiting this selection all selected Orders will be printed.
  6. New Inquiry – Shipping Schedule – Show Documents – This new inquiry can be very helpful for a number of uses. Users can select a Date Range and Order Type. You can then choose to sort the order line items by Customer Code, Customer Name, Product Code, Product Description or Order Schedule Date. You can choose to omit items that were not scheduled using the F9-Schedule feature in Enter & Edit Orders. You can also choose to omit Expense and Non-Stock items as well as Allocated items. All selected Detail Lines will be presented in a scroll box.

    The scroll box will show the line items along with the Customer, Product, Quantity and Status. You can drill into any line item and you will have the following choices. Product Inquiry, Order Inquiry, Open Documents and All Orders Shipping to Customer. These are key tools when you are trying to evaluate how you are going to expedite an order. There are many uses for this report due to the amount of information that is provided.

  7. New User Flag – Notes in Order Entry – When on the first two screens in Enter & Edit Orders, by default the F3 Key will bring you to your Customer’s Internal Notes. If Users prefer, they can set a flag so that the F3 brings up the Order Notes instead of the Customer Notes. Order Notes are Internal Order Notes where information can be entered pertaining to a specific order. Internal Order Notes are also available through an Order Inquiry, F4-Basic Info, F3-Order Notes. Users can change this flag in User Flags – Order Entry on the second screen.

    If you change the F3-Notes to be Order Notes, the Customer Notes will be available when you go into Order Notes. If you leave the F3 as Customer Notes, the Order Notes will be available when you go into Customer Notes. It is a matter of which you will use most often when you are accessing Notes in Enter & Edit Orders.

  8. New Report – Shipping Summary by Customer – This new report will provide a listing of all Orders within a selected date range. The date range is based on the Date Requested field on the heading of the sales order. It will not consider Schedule Dates within a line item. A summary including Customer, Order Date, Order Number, Date Requested, Ship Via and Order Value will be generated. This can be printed to paper, sent to excel or Adobe. If you are using the F9-Schedule from within a Sales Order this report would not work for you.
  9. New report Option – Open Orders by Customer – on this report the system printed the Order Date which is typically the Date the Order was entered. There is now an option to print either the Order Date or the Date Requested from the heading of the Order. If you use schedule dates, those will not be reflected on this report. To view orders by schedule date there are a number of reports in the Scheduling & Expediting Reports menu found in Order Reports.
  10. New fields exported – When exporting the Orders in Excess of stock report three new fields have been added. 6 Months Usage, Year to Date Usage and Last Years Usage.

Counter Sales System

  1. New Feature – US Clients only – There are two different local Taxes:

    One for customers without a Customer Tax Number filled in – typically, this will be used for customers that are not tax exempt and should be charged tax in the counter sales system (even if they are an out of state customer – since they are picking up locally, they need to be charged the local tax rate). There is another for customers with a Customer Tax Number filled in – typically, clients will use this for customers that are tax exempt and will enter a Non Taxable tax authority for the local tax authorities.

    The flags and tax authorities are entered in Utilities, System Administrator, System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Edit Counter Sales Flags.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – (PDF Forms Only) In Enter & Edit Purchase Orders, Final Screen, the “F8 Print, Fax & E-mail Options…” now has a sub screen – it will allow you to print the PO, the receiving document, view the Images & Inbound Faxes related to the PO, view the Outbound History and also Clear the PO Printed Status.
  2. New Feature – When importing PO line items the system will now check the flag “Auto Select Alt Part Code on PO?” and set the vendors information if the flag is set to Yes. This way if you have Alternate Product Codes for that Vendor they will be stored in the PO Line items.
  3. New Feature – P.O. Receipts in Process Register. You can now run the In-Process Register by User that received the Purchase Orders. In the past Users had the ability to update receipts by User but the In-Process Report included receipts from all users that receipts in process. The system will default to the user that is logged in; you can select another user by pressing spacebar and enter.
  4. New Feature – A General Ledger Summary can now be produced when printing the PO Receipts Journal by Product or Vendor. If you would like to see this summary you can change your User Flag in User Flags – Accounts Payable Show G/L Summary in Purchases Journal?
  5. New Feature – You can now Un-Confirm a Purchase Order that has been marked as confirmed. In Enter & Edit Purchase Orders, Final Screen, F12 will confirm and Un-Confirm a Purchase Order. You can then run the Un-Confirmed PO Report so that you can easily follow up with your vendors.
  6. Fields added to report – PO In Process Report – There are three versions of this report. The most detailed is the PO In-Process Report with Detail – in addition to Sales Orders that need to be shipped, PPO’s that need to be sent will now be included on this report as well as the Default Location. Based on your procedures this may help the warehouse be more efficient by not putting product away that they need to turn around and pick again to fill an order.

    The three options for this report are Summary, Detail and Detail with Sales Orders. This can be changed in Entity Flags – Purchase Orders on the second screen.

  7. New Feature – Duplicate P.O. – You can now duplicate a previous Purchase Order the same way you can duplicate a Sales Order. If you have a reoccurring Purchase Order this selection will create a new P.O. assigning the next numeric P.O. Number. You can then bring it up in Enter & Edit Purchase Orders and fill in the Current Promise date and other pertinent information before sending it to your Vendor.
  8. New Feature – Print Stocking Labels by P.O. – You can now print stocking labels for all items on a particular PO. After inputting the P.O. Number the system will print one label for each line item. You can access this through Purchase Order System, Print & Fax Options as well as the label menu located in Order & Quote Entry, Print & Fax Options. This feature is only available with the new DPL, ZPL and EPL labels.
  9. New Feature – Print stocking labels for P.O. Receipts in Process. If you would like to automatically print Stocking Labels for all Products received in a batch, you can now do so. There is a system flag, that when set to Yes will automatically prompt the User receiving Purchase Orders to print the Stocking Labels. This flag can be changed in 9. Utilities, 0. System Administrator, 5. System Setup, 2. Setup Miscellaneous, 4. Entity & System Flags – Entity Flags – Purchase Orders. This feature is only available with the new DPL, ZPL and EPL labels.
  10. New Feature – When using Set Purchase Order Function from Order Entry – When the product that is being ordered is a non-stock item, the unit cost that was entered in the sales order is transferred to the Purchase Order. If the user changes the unit cost while in F8= Set PO, then they are warned (with an option to not change) that they system is going to change the Unit Cost on the Sales Order. This should help keep inventory values in line for Non-Stock items.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Fields – Warehouse Ship Via and Gross Weight. These fields can be used instead of Freight Terms and Customer PO. You can only use one set or the other due to screen space. This flag can be changed in Utilities, System Administrator, System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity & System Flags, Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders.
  2. Function Key enabled – When doing a PPO Inquiry the F5-Show Address function key is now functional on the Final Screen.
  3. New information on Report – PPO Receipts In-process report – When this report is printed it will now include the Default Location and list all open Sales Orders for the Products being received.
  4. New Feature – Processing Purchase Orders – Receiving – Processing Purchase Orders now support receiving multiple tags when receiving using Receive Processing PO or Enter & Receive Processing P.O’s This means that the user can now receive in multiple license plates (Tags) during a single processing PO receipt.

    This does not apply to Receiving PPO’s through the Warehouse Management System which is an optional system.

  5. New Report Options – At Processor Report – by Product – There are two new options when printing this report – You can choose not to include your Internal Vendor which can be setup if you do in-house processing and you can also choose to show Alternate Product information.
  6. New Printing Features – PDF Forms only – In Enter & Edit Purchase Orders, Final Screen, the “F8 Print, Fax & E-mail Options…” now has a sub screen – it will allow you to print the PO, the receiving document, view the Images & Inbound Faxes related to the PO, view the Outbound History and also Clear the PO Printed Status.
  7. New Features pertaining to Default Vendor on a P.O. – When a user prints, faxes or e-mails a PO from F8 in Enter & Edit PO or Purchase Order Inquiry, and the PO # is the default Purchase Order for the vendor, the system will ask the user if they want to clear the Default PO #. The system also prompts to clear the default PO # when the user marks the Purchase Order as “Confirmed”.

    When a product has a default vendor defined and the user uses F8=Set PO to create a PO from within Order Entry, and the vendor’s default PO # is empty and the user creates a new PO, the system will ask if the system should assign the vendor’s default PO # to the one that they are creating.

  8. New Feature – Print Stocking Labels by P.P.O. – You can now print stocking labels for all items on a particular P.P.O. After selecting the PPO. Number the system will print one label for each line item. You can access this through Processing Purchase Order System, Print & Fax Options as well as the label menu located in Order & Quote Entry, Print & Fax Options. This feature is only available with DPL, ZPL and EPL labels.
  9. New Feature – Print stocking labels for P.P.O. Receipts in Process. If you would like to automatically print Stocking Labels for all Products received in a batch, you can now do so. There is a system flag, that when set to Yes will automatically prompt the User receiving Processing Purchase Orders to print the Stocking Labels. This flag can be changed in 9. Utilities, 0. System Administrator, 5. System Setup, 2. Setup Miscellaneous, 4. Entity & System Flags – Entity Flags – Purchase Orders. This feature is only available with DPL, ZPL and EPL labels.
  10. New Feature – Create Empty Batch in Automatic Replenishment System – This new feature will enable a User to create an empty batch which they can then add to either through Select Documents for Products or by using the F2-ARS key in Enter & Edit Orders.

    A new batch can be started by simply going into Select Documents for Products, if the User does not currently have a batch they will be prompted to start and empty batch, or in the Open ARS Batch Inquiry a new batch can be started by selecting F4-Create New Empty Batch.

Request for Quote System

  1. New Report – Open Request for Quotes Report – This report can be generated by Date. Users enter a Beginning and Ending date and all RFQ’s that are in the system within that date range will be presented. The report will show RFQ Number, RFQ Date, Vendor, User that entered the RFQ and a Response Date. This new report is located in the Request for Quote System under Request for Quote Reports.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Feature – Customer Records are now being audited. Every time a value for a customer record changes, The BUSINESS EDGE will record the before and after values and record the User that changed it. You can view the Audit log in Accounts Receivable File Maintenance, Customer Misc. Maintenance, Customer Audit Inquiry. It can also be found in Utilities, System Administrator, Employee System, Audit Inquiries, Customer Audit Inquiry.
  2. New Feature – Import Customer Contacts – You can now import Customer Contact information into The BUSINESS EDGE. Customer Contact information includes contact name, title, phone numbers, fax number, E-mail address, instant message name as well as a comment. If you have PDF forms and are E-mailing documents to clients the system will default to the default form e-mail address and then you can press spacebar and enter to select any of your contacts e-mail addresses.
  3. New Feature – Import Customer Default Output – You can now import default output information into The BUSINESS EDGE. If you have PDF forms you have an option of Faxing, Mailing or E-mailing your Customer’s invoices. When E-mailing you can also include an E-mail address to Copy and Blind Copy. This information can be imported from a spreadsheet into the system directly. You can also import the e-mail address to use as a default for all forms, a packing list auto e-mail address and Imported order confirm e-mail if you are using the Vendor Managed Inventory module.
  4. New Report Option – Sales Journal by Salesperson – This report has a new option for the cost that is used. You can print this report using either Actual Cost or Average Cost. The Average Cost is the Average at the time the invoice was created.
  5. New Feature – Update Accounts Receivable Invoices by User. You can now have the ability to Update Customer Invoices by the User that created the invoice. If you turn on the flag in Entity Flags – Accounts Receivable – Update Invoices by User? The Invoices In Process Register and the Update Routine will have a prompt for a User Name. The User that is logged in will be defaulted and can be changed by pressing Spacebar and Enter.
  6. New System Flag – Automatically Ask Tax Questions during Enter & Edit Customers – If this flag is set to Yes each time you enter a new Customer Address you will get an additional screen asking for Sales Tax Information. If you do not charge Sales Tax and do not have a need to track Customer Sales Tax Numbers you can answer No to this flag and the defaults setup in Enter & Edit Customer Defaults will be used. You can also manually go into the Tax function key and change the tax authorities.
  7. New Inquiry – Invoice Listing with Ship to Information – This new inquiry will enable a User to select a Customer or range of Customers as well as a date range. All invoices that were created in the date range you selected will be presented in a scroll box with the Ship to Address. This is helpful if you are trying to isolate orders that were shipped to a particular address.

    If you would like more detailed information you can drill into a specific invoice, clicking on a line or pressing enter will pull up the highlighted invoice in an Invoice Inquiry. You can view all of the information pertaining to each invoice. This new inquiry is located in Accounts Receivable Reports.

  8. New Feature – Edit Posted Accounts Receivable Invoices – This new selection will enable a user to edit the Customers Purchase Order Number, Ship Via, Extra Shipper Description and Payment Terms. This is located in Accounts Receivable, A/R Invoice Routines, Posted Invoice Maintenance, Edit Posted Invoice.
  9. New Report – Sales by User – This new report is based on the User Login that entered the Orders that were invoiced within a specified date range. It is designed like a Sales Journal and includes Sell Price, Cost and Profit. It can be printed listing each invoice or in summary form. This new report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Sales Journals. This report can be presented in a variety of outputs such as Excel, Paper, Adobe or a text file.

Accounts Payable System

  1. New Feature – Import Vendor Contacts – You can now import Vendor Contact information into The BUSINESS EDGE. Vendor Contact information includes contact name, title, phone numbers, fax number, E-mail address, instant message name as well as a comment. If you have PDF forms and are E-mailing documents to Vendors the system will default to the default form e-mail address and then you can press spacebar and enter to select any of your contacts e-mail addresses.
  2. New Feature – Vendor Average Days to Pay. You can now view your average days to pay from within a Vendor Inquiry. This is available in the F11-Financials Screen in the heading. The average is based on your past payment history.
  3. New Feature – Reset Vendor Average Days to Pay. You can reset the Vendor Average Days to pay by entering a Date for the Oldest Payment to Include. This program will then go back and re-calculate the Vendors Average Days to Pay based on the date you enter. This can be found in Utilities, Miscellaneous Utilities.
  4. New Report – Checks Cleared Report – This new report will provide a listing of all Checks cleared within a specific date range. The information included it Check Date, Check Number, Payee, Amount and Date Cleared. This new report is located in Accounts Payable, Check Reconciliation System.

Inventory System

  1. New option – The Price Level List can now be exported to Excel or a text file when presented to the screen. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Cost & Price Table Reports.
  2. New Feature – Certification Printing (Only available for clients using PDF forms). There are new flags to control when miscellaneous charge certifications and inspection certifications print out. These flags allow the system to automatically print these certifications when printing the picking ticket and/or printing the packing list and with what type of output (print and adobe only, or also e-mail, fax, etc.)

    If the printer selected to print the picking or packing list is not compatible with PDF forms, and the user is printing from the F8-Print, Fax and e-mail options, then the system will print out the picking or packing list and then prompt the user for a printer to use to print out the certification forms. If you print out the picking or packing list from a batch, or by selecting a range and not printing to a PDF compatible printer, the system will not automatically print out the certification forms.

    PDF compatible printers must be on the network and be postscript printers.

  3. New Option – Copy Internal Description to Selling Description – This is a flag located in Enter & Edit Product Defaults. The new choices are Always, Never or Only when selling description is blank. This allows more flexibility when you may want to have a different or similar Selling Description.
  4. New Feature – Importing Substitute Products – see the Utilities section for details.
  5. New fields added to export – Product Usage Inquiry – this is a very useful report that contains all of the usage for your products. We have added columns summing the different types of transactions included so that you no longer have to add them up manually in Excel. There is now a column for Total Sales, Total Receipts, Total Adjustments etc.
  6. New Fields added for exporting purposes: Customer Inquiry, F4-Basic Information, F10-Parts – This scroll box will show all of the Alternate Product Codes you have assigned to a particular Customer. When this information is exported there are additional fields that you do not see on the screen. These fields include Quantity on Hand, Quantity on P.O, Quantity on PPO, as well as each location and quantity. The locations and quantities are all contained in a single cell.
  7. New Flag – Maintain Unique Costs for Alternate Parts? When this flag is set to Yes, the user will be allowed to enter a Cost associated with the Alternate Product Code. This cost will be used on PO’s, Sales Orders, Debit Memos, etc., when the alternate is used on the document (unless there is a Vendor Contract Cost overriding the Alternate Cost).

    When this flag is set to No, the user will not be able to enter a Cost associated with the Alternate Product Code. Vendor costs will be either the Default P.O. Cost or, if one exists, Vendor Contract Costs.

    This flag is located in Entity & System Flags, Inventory Flags. Vendor Contract Pricing is a much easier to use and maintain. Vendor Contract Pricing can be imported or updated manually.

  8. New Fields have been added to the Inventory Master Export format – Date of Last Request for Quote, Date of Last P.O. Entered, and Qty last ordered on P.O.
  9. New Inquiry/Report – Product Usage/Value Inquiry – This new inquiry is presented in a scrolling box so that it can be exported to Excel. This report contains a lot of information that enables a User to evaluate their Inventory Values and Movement between two periods. The system will prompt the User for two Dates, typically the end of two months. The Prompts are for Current Ending Date and Previous Ending Date. There is then an option for Number of Months to include and if the User would like the Average Cost presented in the each value.

    Information provided includes by Product code – value at the end of each period, change in value, average cost, sales, purchases and adjustments for the selected period.

  10. New field exported – If you export products from the scroll box in Product Inquiry a new field will be included for the last 12 months Usage per Product.

General Ledger System

  1. New Feature – Income Statement Spreadsheet – This report could only be printed in a spreadsheet like format in the past. You can now select other forms of output including Screen. When it is displayed to the screen you can it in Excel by clicking on the Excel button. You can also send it to PDF or Text.

Sales Analysis System

  1. New fields for export – Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Detail Sales by Product – When this report is presented to the screen and exported to Excel two new fields have been added – Default PO Cost and Invoice Cost.
  2. New report option – Customer Sales by Product Group can now be put into a scroll box and exported to Excel. This report is located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis.

Manufacturing System

  1. New Feature – Work Order Production updates can now be reversed. This can be done in Shop Floor System, Work Order Production System, Reverse Production.

Utilities

  1. Menu Change – The backup menu has been changed to accommodate new options for rsync backups. You can now have the system backup to a remote location over the internet; this type of backup is an rsync backup. The cost to configure the rsync backup is $300 and on-line space is billed yearly and based on your system requirements.
  2. Menu Change – The Import Menus located in the Utilities Menu has been changed. There were previously items that are intended for initial system setups. These items have now been moved to a secured area so that they do not cause confusion.
  3. New Feature – Import Customer Contact Relationships – You can now import Customer Contact information into your Customer Master file. You can do this by creating a spreadsheet with the fields you would like to import such as Name, Title, Phone, Fax, E-mail address etc. The Customer Code is a required field which identifies the Customer record. If you would like assistance in doing this call Customer Service and we will be happy to assist you.
  4. New Feature – Import Customer Invoice Output Options – You can now import the method of Invoice/Statement Delivery for your Customers. If you are using the new PDF forms you have the option of Faxing, E-mailing or printing your Customer Invoices. The Default output options is where you would setup your customer for the option they prefer. You can also import the default E-mail addresses for forms over-all, Packing lists and Imported Orders. The Customer Code is a required field as this identifies the Customer Record. Pleas call Customer Service if you would like assistance in importing your information.
  5. New Feature – Import Vendor Contact Relationships – You can now import Vendor Contact information into your Vendor Master file. You can do this by creating a spreadsheet with the fields you would like to import such as Name, Title, Phone, Fax, E-mail address etc. The Vendor Code is a required field which identifies the Vendor record. If you would like assistance in doing this call Customer Service and we will be happy to assist you.
  6. New Feature – Import Vendor Default Output – You can now import default E-mail addresses into the Vendor file. This includes a default for P.O.’s and RFQ’s, Processing P.O.’s and Debit Memo’s. When you are emailing a document to your Vendor this default will come up automatically. You then have the ability to press Spacebar and Enter to see all Contacts for that Vendor that you can choose from.
  7. New Feature – When e-mailing Orders and Invoices the system will now include the Customers PO # in the subject line. This will make the subject more meaningful. The Order and Invoice Numbers will still appear after the PO Number.
  8. New Feature – Importing Substitute Products – You can now import Substitute Products into your Inventory Master File. When Users are entering a sales order or creating a Processing P.O. they can select a valid substitute product if needed. If you create a list in Excel of the Product Code and then the Substitute Product Code these can be imported in the Import Inventory Menu. The file needs to be a text, tab delimited file.

    If you have multiple substitutes in multiple columns on a spreadsheet there is also a conversion program that can be used to create the correct format. For instance if you have 4 columns across and the 4 Product Codes can all be used interchangeably the system can create an importable spreadsheet which would consist of 16 records for each line of 4 Product Codes.

  9. New Feature – E-mail scrolling box contents – The default in the system when you have information on your screen in a scroll box is that Holding Ctl and pressing E will enable a User to export that data to their directory on the server. There is a new User flag that will enable a user to E-mail the data in a scroll box instead or sending it to a file. This User flag is located on the first screen of Enter & Edit User Flags – General Enable Scrolling Box Email (Ctrl-E)?
  10. New Feature – Notes System – The notes system in The BUSINESS EDGE has been overhauled to be more universal. This means that follow ups can be put on ANY note in the system (Customers, Vendors, Products, Orders, Invoices, Purchase Orders, Processing POs, and for MFG/ISO clients – Machines, and Problem Documents). Follow ups can automatically display on your screen when you log in. To set the options, from the Main Menu, press F1=Help, F3=Related Flags and change the setting for “Show Follow Up Notes on Login”. There are options for Never, Today Only, or All up to Today. If you set the flag to All Up to Today, the Note will continue to display at login until you remove the follow up date.

    An additional new feature of the Notes system is the ability for notes to “pop-up” when the related record is selected in the system (for example, a customer note that is marked to “pop-up” will display when a customer is selected in Customer Inquiry, Enter & Edit Orders, and Enter & Edit Invoices).

ISO System

  1. New Feature When in order inquiry, the system now shows that a Problem Document is linked to the sales order on the main screen, and the detail line screen.

    Using the Show Basic Information Fkey, there is a new option: Problem Documents. Using this Fkey will show you all the problems associated with this order.

    When drilling into an order detail line, the system also shows you if Problem Documents are linked to the detail line and also gives you a new Fkey – Prob – that shows you all the problems associated with that order detail line.

    Also, when entering a Problem Document, the system will warn you if you are assigning it to a order that already has a problem document attached to it (so you don’t accidentally duplicate the problem document).

UPS Worldship

  1. New Feature – Shipper Display – The system will now look at all of the shippers associated with an Order or Invoice and if they are all the same it will show the shipper in the edit screens.

    Example: UPS Ground – Prepaid & Add (Multiple Boxes)

    If you have different shippers it will still show “Multiple Shippers…”

    It takes up too much space to try and string them together so if one box is going out “UPS Ground – Prepaid & Add” and another one is shipping “UPS 2nd Day Air – Collect” the system will show “Multiple Shippers…” in the header screens.

BRANCH SYSTEM

  1. New Report Features – The Customer Sales & Profit and the Customer Sales and Profit report by Product can now be generated by Branch. Users can select all branches or a specific branch. These reports are located in Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis.
  2. New Report Feature – The Customer Detail Sales by Product can now be generated by Branch. Users can select All braches or a specific branch. This report is located in Sales Analysis System, Customer Sales Analysis.

Release Notes – March 2008 – April 2008

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Feature – Show Old Quotes while in a Sales Order. You can now have the system automatically display old quotes while you are in a Sales Order Detail Line. The option is to have them show automatically and/or view them via the function keys. There is a new system flag – # of Days to Auto-Show Old Quotes. If a value is given to this flag then all users will automatically see the old Quotes going back the number of days set in the flag. If the user wants to use the Quantity and Price that was in an old Quote they can simply press Enter on the line and the system will change the order line after the User confirms.

    Additionally the same information can be viewed by Pressing F5=$ and then F3-Previous. This inquiry will allow the User to select a date range and also ask if they would like to see all Customers. This way the User can see what other Customers have been quoted on the same item and for what Price. If the User wants to use the Quantity and Price on one of those lines they can simply press Enter on the line and the system will change the order line after the User confirms.

    If the # of Days flag is set to zero Users will not get an automatic pop up of the screen but will still have the ability to manually access the information through F5, F3.

    This new Flag is in screen 4 of 4 in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry.

  2. New Feature – Order Entry – Users can now use the Automatic Replenishment System instead of Set PO when in a Sales Order Detail Line with F2- ARS key.

    F8 in a Sales Order Detail line has always been Set PO where you can add an item to a new or existing Purchase Order from within a Sales Order. The F2-ARS enables users to use the Automatic Replenishment System which is a newer feature. The system uses the ARS logic to add the product to an ARS batch that is specific for the user entering the Order (each user will have their own list of products on the ARS). The product is added (if replenishment is needed) and the user is brought into their list of products in the ARS. Users can add, change and delete these products in their batch while in the ARS System.

    When you are done, you will be asked if you want to create the documents. If you do not create the documents, the list is kept and added to by the next order. This will allow the user to accumulate RFQ’s and PO’s throughout the day and then create them all at once when ready.

Counter Sales System

  1. New Flag – Create Un-Costed When Available is Short – this flag is separate from the system flag used for Order Entry. If this flag is set to yes and a user is in counter sales the system will allow them to sell items that have a zero on hand quantity. This only applies to Non-tracked items. This flag is located in the Counter Sales Flags.
  2. New Feature – When a login is shared by multiple Users and you want to record the actual person who entered the order in the “Order Entered By” field you can now do so by setting up Hot Swap Users.

    Enter & Edit Hot Swap users is located in Counter Sales Setup. After entering the shared login such as Counter and choose “Prompt for Hot Swap User as the type of user. All Users that will not be considered “Regular Users” because they are logging in with a generic login need to be entered into the list with the Full Name and flagged as “Hot Swap User Only”.

    There is also a choice for an optional a password. When entering a counter sale from the shared login, the user will be prompted to login as their Hot Swap User. All User time stamps will be recorded with the Hot Swapped User. All permissions are tied to the original generic login.

  3. New Options – Use Local Tax (when No Tax Number), Local Tax Freight, and Local Tax Authorities. When a client answers Yes to Use Local Tax (When No Tax Number), the system will switch to the local tax authorities, unless there is a Customer Tax Number entered for the customer (in which case the system uses the customer’s tax authorities).

    This feature is not available for Canadian clients. The flags and tax authorities are entered in System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Edit Counter Sales Flags.

  4. New Feature – Enter Counter Sales Checkout – this new option will never show the cost line on the Detail Line in a Counter Sales Order. Regular Enter Counter Sales will show the cost based on the counter sales cost flag and whether the user has cost security. If the user is not allowed to see costs but enters a non-stock item the security is lifted just as it is in regular order entry.
  5. New Bin Label Option – When printing a range of Bin Labels for a particular customer an additional filter has been added for printing. You can now select a range of Products and a location filter. This way if you only want to print labels for a particular location you can do so. This is located in Accounts Receivable, Customer Bin System, Bin Labels.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – Purchase Order Quick Edit. This new feature will be useful if you have large PO’s where you need to change many of the lines after the vendor acknowledges the PO with changes.

    This will also be useful if you happen to re-calculate your PO costs outside of the BUSINESS EDGE and need to input them right before receipt.

    This new feature allows the user to quickly enter (one, some or all) of the following fields for Purchase Order Detail lines – without having to go through each line individually – the system puts all the lines onto one screen so that they can be quickly entered:

    Quantity Ordered
    Vendor Packing List Quantity (see below for functionality)
    Unit Cost (choice to update Raw, Landed, or both)
    Original Promise Date
    Current Promise Date

    Vendor Packing List Quantity functionality:
    When receiving, the quantity received will default to the quantity entered for the vendor packing list (specifically when using F5=Rec Line and F6=Entire PO – when using F6, the system will set the quantity received to the quantity that you entered on the vendor packing list).

    The entered packing list quantities will show on the PO Receiving Document instead of the quantity ordered (client specific PDF forms will need to be changed to include this quantity).

    You can access the Purchase Order Quick Edit in Purchase Order System, P.O. Receipt Routines, Purchase Order Quick Edit.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Option – ISO & Manufacturing Systems only – PPO Component Expediting Report – There is a new option for including / excluding / limiting the PPO’s listed on the PPO Component Expediting report to the internal vendor. This is very helpful when you have a lot of internal processes.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Inquiry – Invoices sent to non-default fax number – This is located in Print & Fax Invoices.

Inventory System

  1. New Field exported – Quantity on Hand has been added to the export of Customer Part Numbers from within a Customer Inquiry. If you press F4-Basic Info, F10-Parts you will see all of the Products that have been linked to the Customer that you have selected. When this information is exported to Excel you will also see the current quantity that is on hand.
  2. New Field in Enter & Edit Products – UPC Code for Products

    Products can now have a 12 digit UPC code assigned to them (Enter & Edit Products, last question on the first screen). The BUSINESS EDGE checks that the UPC code is a valid UPC code (12 digits long and the check digit is correct).

    In Product Inquiry (F12 More Choices, F2=UPC Codes), you can view the other valid 3 prefixes for that UPC code (with their corresponding quantities).

    The BUSINESS EDGE uses the following logic:
    UPC code – a flag in the Product Classification will allow this to be 1 stocking unit, the packaging qty, the master pkg qty, or the bulk pkg qty.
    10 prefix – This is the packaging quantity
    20 prefix – This is the master packaging quantity
    30 prefix – This is the bulk packaging quantity

    The prefixes and quantities are used in the warehouse system when scanning products to move or allocate to orders.

  3. New Report – UPC Code Product List. This report will show the products with UPC codes in the system. It is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists, UPC Code Product List.

    When selecting a product in the system, if you type in the UPC code in ANY of the fields (Product Code, Product Description, Classification, or Alternate), The BUSINESS EDGE will lookup the product that is assigned to the UPC code.

    If you have been using UPC codes in your system and entering them as alternate products, we have a conversion program that will convert them from your alternate list into this new field. Please contact us for more information.

  4. New Flags – Alert When No Customer for New Alternate Part and Alert When no Vendor for New Alternate Part. If this flag is set to Yes, users will receive a warning message if they do not relate either a Customer or Vendor to a new Alternate Product Code.

Utilities

  1. New My Menu Features – The “My Menu” system has been expanded to include Sub “My Menus”. You can now have up to 9 “Main My Menu Selections” and each of those Menu selections can have 9 Menu selections. The screens to edit the My Menus have changed to include these new features.
  2. New Feature – If a modem gets wedged or turned off a message will be sent to all of the Fax Administrators e-mails and Instant Messages. Once the modem is reset another message will be sent. Administrators email and IM Names can be setup in Enter & Edit documentConnection Settings. If you would like to have more than one person receive the alerts, simply enter their information separating the addresses with a comma.
  3. New Feature – We’re now sending a disk space alert – It will check disk space every time a fax comes in and when the cron runs at night.

    The Alert e-mail(s) and Instant Message(s) will get a lot of alerts when the space falls below the alert level (one for each new fax and once every night).

    If you don’t want to see the warning, change the “Alert if Space is Less Than X%” to a lower number or to zero if you never want an alert (or if you’ve ordered a hard drive and don’t need to be bothered any more). The default value is 15%

    If you have multiple file systems set up for documentConnection it will warn you if any of them fall below the alert level.


Release Notes – February 2008

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New report – Expedite Salesperson Orders – This new report can be generated for any range of Salespersons. A Date Range can be selected. The Date range options are Date Requested/Scheduled Date or Order Date. The information included is slightly different when presented to the screen and exported versus the printed version. This report is located in Order Reports, Scheduling & Expediting Report.

Counter Sales System

  1. New Feature – Salesperson field is now available on the Counter Sales Heading Screen.
  2. New Feature – Counter Sales will now accept returns (negative quantities). There is a new function key for Users that have access to do returns – F7-Return. This function key will allow the user to select a specific invoice for the Customer or Scroll through invoices for the Customer and choose the Detail Line associated with the return. This is not a mandatory way to select an item but a convenience for the User to get the correct Price for the line item.

    The System does not record what line items were returned.

    If the Product that is getting returned is a tracked item the User will need to put in a location and a lot number where the product is returned to.

    If the return is done using Cash as the payment term, the cash will be removed from the cash drawer. If the return is done using a Check payment term, the system will leave the invoice as open with a negative balance. A check will then need to be cut through the Accounts Payable system.

  3. New Feature – Edit Open Counter Sales – This will allow Users to edit an open counter sales invoice to change Products, Prices or Payments.
  4. New Flags – There are 2 new User Security Flags associated with the above new features. Allowed to enter returns in Counter Sales and Allowed to Edit Counter Sales Invoice. These new flags are located on Screen 3 in Enter & Edit User Security.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – Warn Inspection Needed During Receipt – When a Product has the field Inspection Required set to Yes and the Flag Warn Inspection Needed During Receipt Flag is set to Yes, the system will warn the User that the product they are receiving requires inspection.

    The Inspection Required question can be changed in Enter & Edit Products, F6-Stocking Information. The flag to turn on the warning message is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders – Warn Inspection Needed During PO Receipt?

  2. New Feature – GL Summary now available in Purchase Order Receipts Journal by Product and Purchase Order Receipts Journal by Vendor. If the User Flag Show G/L Summary in Purchases Journal is set to Yes in User Flags Accounts Payable, you will now be provided with GL Summaries after these receipt reports.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. Processing PO – PPO Component Expediting Report – For ISO / Manufacturing Systems – There is a new option for including / excluding / limiting the PPO’s listed on this report to the internal vendor.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. Customer Account Status Report is now in a scroll box. This report presents customer invoice activity for a specified date range. This report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Status Reports.
  2. New Feature – Remove Customer Part Numbers – If you have a situation where your customer has changed their internal numbering system and you need to remove their old Alternate Product Codes; you can now do so through the menu. After selecting the Customer, the system will show all of that Customers Part Numbers. If there are any that you do not want to remove you can highlight them and Press F2 – Do Not Remove those will then be removed from the scroll box. Any Customer Part #’s in the scroll box will be removed after answering Yes in the confirmation screen. This is located in Accounts Receivable Maintenance, Customer Miscellaneous Maintenance, Remove Customer Part Numbers.
  3. New Flag – Fax during Batch Processing – We brought back the use of an old flag – Fax Invoices Daily, it is located in Invoice Output in Enter & Edit Customers.

    The upgrade process will populate the value of the new flag with the old flag’s value.

    If the flag is set to No the “In Process Faxing” options will not fax the invoice even if there is a “To Fax Number” filled out.

  4. New Feature – When creating individual EDI Invoices Users could only create one EDI invoice in the past. There is a new feature that will enable Users to Over-write, Append the file or Cancel. This way a series of invoices can be created and sent in one batch.
  5. New User Warning – When entering Freight on an Invoice the system will now warn the User if the freight entered is more than $1,000.

Inventory System

  1. New Field – Master Package Quantity from the Inventory Master file has been added to the Product Usage Scroll Box when presented to the screen.
  2. New Feature – Warn Inspection Needed During Receipt – When a Product has the field Inspection Required set to Yes and the Flag Warn Inspection Needed During Receipt Flag is set to Yes, the system will warn the User that the product they are receiving requires inspection.

    The Inspection Required question can be changed in Enter & Edit Products, F6-Stocking Information. The flag to turn on the warning message is located in Entity & System Flags – Purchase Orders – Warn Inspection Needed During PO Receipt?

  3. New Feature – Remove Customer Part Numbers – If you have a situation where your customer has changed their internal numbering system and you need to remove their old Alternate Product Codes, you can now do so through the menu. After selecting the Customer, the system will show all of that Customers Part Numbers. If there are any that you do not want to remove you can highlight them and Press F2 – Do Not Remove those will then be removed from the scroll box. Any Customer Part #’s in the scroll box will be removed after answering Yes in the confirmation screen. This is located in Accounts Receivable Maintenance, Customer Miscellaneous Maintenance, Remove Customer Part Numbers.
  4. New Feature – When running the Adjustment Report by Date or Adjustment Report by Lot # you can now designate what types of Adjustments you would like included in the report. The different types of Adjustments include Auto Adjustments, Debit Memo’s, Finished Goods, Dismantle from Finished Good, Laid in Cost, Manual Adjustments, Physical Inventory, Processing Purchase Orders, Used for Finished Goods and Work Orders.

    You can User F3 to Select All types, F4 to Deselect All Types and use the F5 to Select/Deselect individual types you would like to include in your report. By default all adjustments will be included.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Heading and column– When the Product Sales & Profit Report is generated to the screen it is presented in a scroll box. The Totals will now be displayed on the heading of the scroll box. When this report is presented in a scroll box a column will now be included for Gross Profit %.

Utilities

  1. New Functionality – Print Screen – To print a screen anywhere in The BUSINESS EDGE Users will now use the Print Screen icon on the top of Powerterm or Ctrl P to print the screen. This is due to new features being added in the system there is a need for additional function keys.
  2. New Feature – My Menu System – The “My Menu” system can now accept users on sub “My Menus”. The screens to edit the My Menus have changed to include these new features.

Release Notes – October 2007 – January 2008

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Flag – Importing Orders – If you are importing sales orders using our handheld scanners, you can now limit the number of line items on a single order. This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry. Order Import – Maximum Lines Allowed on order – the default is set to 999,999.
  2. New Feature – The F8-Set PO key can now be changed to use the Automatic Replenishment System instead of only Set PO. This flag can be changed in Utilities, System Administrator System, System Setup, Setup miscellaneous, Entity & System Flags. On the last screen – Order Detail Line F8 Key. Choices are Set PO, Automatic Replenishment System and Cost Estimate for the Manufacturing System.

    The Automatic Replenishment System is the newest feature. When you have this feature turned on, the system uses the ARS logic to add the product to an ARS batch that is specific for the user. Each user will have their own list of product on the ARS. The product is added (if replenishment is needed) and the user is brought into their list of product in the ARS. The User can add, change and delete these products.

    Once the user is done editing, they will be asked if they want to create the documents. If they do not create the documents the list is kept and added to by the net order. This allows the user to accumulate RFQ’s and PO’s throughout the day and then creates them all at once when ready. The user decides when to create documents.

  3. New Wording – Changed “Custom Restock Assortment” question on form printing to be “Show Order Total Only?” It has the same functionality.
  4. New Feature – When in the Sort function key on the Final Screen of a Sales Order the Sort by Classification has been activated.

Counter Sales System

  1. New Flag – Create Uncosted when Available is Short – When using the optional Counter Sales System you can specify whether non-tracked items can be billed out when the system thinks the quantity on hand is zero. This flag is located in the Counter Sales Flags. If you allow users to bill out non tracked items with zero on hand the system will track those items as uncosted. An Un-Costed Sales Journal will need to be checked and balanced out each month before financials are completed. This flag is separate from the System flag that pertains to normal Order Entry.
  2. New Feature – Added field to input freight charges on the heading information screen. These freight charges will be added to the invoice. This is for a customer who is picking up goods that they need to pay the freight on the shipment from the vendor.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – Close Po – If you have an open P.O. that you know will not be shipped; you now have the option of closing it instead of deleting it. When in Enter & Edit PO’s you can close a PO by using the F9-Close P.O. Fkey. This way you can refer back to the P.O. if needed in the future. You can also utilize the Po Notes to indicate why it was closed for future reference. PO Notes can be accessed in a PO Inquiry, F3-Basic Info, F3-PO Notes.
  2. New Feature – Confirming Purchase Orders – You can now mark a Purchase Order as confirmed by your Vendor. If it is your practice to have your Vendor confirm your prices back to you this new feature will help you keep track of those PO’s that still need confirmation. In Enter & Edit Purchase Orders on the Final Screen the F12 – Confirm PO key will record the User, Date and Time the P.O was marked as confirmed.
  3. New Report –Open PO Not Confirmed List – This new report will present a listing of all of the Purchase Orders that were not confirmed through the new F12- Confirm PO Fkey explained above. This listing can be viewed on the screen, exported to Excel or printed using the Shift * feature. This report is located in Purchase Order Reports, Open PO Reports, Open PO Not Confirmed List.
  4. New Function Key – When in a Purchase Order Inquiry, F3-Basic Info – F4-Vendor Invoices. When a Purchase Order has been paid this new function key will show the payment information.
  5. New feature – When in a Vendor Inquiry – Show Purchase Orders Fkey – there is a new user option to include Accrued PO’s in the same screen. This is a User Flag located in User Flags – Purchase Orders – on the second screen – Include Accrued in Open PO Inquiry. The default will be set to No.
  6. New Feature – Laid in Cost – You can now add freight, duty or other charges to the value of your inventory after you have received your Purchase Order and even sold the product in the system. The Laid in cost can be allocated by Value, Weight, quantity or Number of Detail Lines. This preference is setup in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Payable.

    When the invoices arrive for additional costs that you want to add to your inventory value, those invoices will be entered and instead of selecting an expense account you can press F7 – Laid in Cost. You will be prompted for the Purchase Order Number to apply the costs to. If you vendor is billing you for freight on the same invoice as your product and you want to add in the cost, the freight portion must be entered as a separate invoice.

    You can setup the Laid in Cost Allocation method in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Payable.

  7. New Report information – Open Orders by Order Number – This report now gives statistics about the orders – the number of lines, the number of lines that can ship, and the number of lines that need purchasing.

Processing Purchase Order System

  1. New Features – Quick PPO’s – There is new menu has two new options – Enter & Send PPO’s and Enter & Receive PPO’s. Enter & Send PPO’s enables the user to enter a PPO and Send it to the Processor in one step. Enter & Receive PPO’s enables the User to complete the PPO entry, Send and Receive Processes in a single step. The enter and receive PPO’s is a great option for a lot traceable finished good or internal Bill of Material
  2. New Feature – If you change the quantity to create on a PPO that is NOT sent, and there is a Bill of Material (previously called PPO Definition) for that product, the system will ask the user if they want to re-load the detail lines from the bill of materials. If you have edited the original PPO and then re-load the BOM, any lines you added on the fly will be omitted unless you also added them to the BOM.
  3. New Feature – PPO Component Expediting Report – for ISO/Manufacturing Systems – There is a new option for including / excluding / limiting the PPO’s listed on this report to the internal Vendor.

Accounts Receivable System

    ** Note – Items #1 and #2 below only apply to systems with PDF Invoices

  1. Menu Change – The Print and Fax Invoices Menu has been changed to accommodate the new feature which allows Users to setup their customers to receive Printed, Faxed or E-mailed Invoices. The Menu Item to process all three of these options is now called Send Invoices in Process. There is still a separate selection to Fax Invoices in process. If you do not have your customers setup for emailed or faxed invoices this new selection will just print them as it did in the past when using Print Invoices in Process.
  2. New Feature – Send Invoices in Process, you can now Print, Fax, or E-mail your Customer Invoices based on their preference. You can also choose any combination of those choices. With one step the system will output the Invoices in process using the Customer default settings. This new feature is selection number 3 in the Print & Fax Invoices Menu.

    Two fields have been removed from Enter & Edit Customers – Fax Invoices Daily and Invoice Fax Phone. These fields have been replaced with a new screen – Default Invoice Output. As a default when your system is upgraded this will be the F6-Invoice Output from the first screen in Enter & Edit Customers. This will move the current F6-User Defined keys to F6-Invoice Output, F3- User Defined. There is a system flag that can be changed if you prefer the F6 to remain User Defined; in that case the F3 when in F6 would be Invoice Output.

    In the Invoice Output screen the fields that can be entered are:

    Contact
    To Fax Number
    Fax Cover Sheet Y/N
    E-mail
    CC:
    Blind CC:
    Also Print?

    The contact will be printed on the Fax Cover Sheet and/or in the E-mail.

    The Fax number will be used for the faxing of the invoice. If you happen to update your Customers Fax Number on the main Enter & Edit Customers Screen you will see a question pop up asking if you would like to change the default fax number as well. If this field is blank no fax will be sent.

    You can indicate whether or not you want to send a Cover Sheet with their Fax.

    E-mail – This is the primary E-mail address you want the invoice to go to.

    CC: – If you would like an invoice to go to another E-mail address type it here. This E-mail address will be visible to your Customer receiving the Invoice.

    Blind CC: If you would like an invoice to go to another E-mail address and you do not want your Customer to see where it is going you can type in an E-mail address here.

    Also Print? – If you would like to print a copy of the Invoice answer Yes here.

    ** The E-mail capability is only available if you have PDF Forms

    ** You must have purchased Outbound Faxing to use the Faxing capability

  3. New Field Exported – When exporting Customer Sales History through F5-Sales History in a Customer Inquiry a column will be included for the current Quantity on Hand.
  4. New Display field – If your Order and Invoice Number are the same document number, when viewing Customer Invoices in a Customer Inquiry the column that was used for Order Number will now be Purchase Order Number. Also when exporting the Customer Invoice information all data will be included in Excel even though it may not fit in the column on the screen.
  5. New Display – In Customer Invoice Inquiry, on the first screen the Sent field will now display “faxed” if the document was faxed.
  6. New Feature – Customer Notes Follow up Report – Previously Users had to go to the Accounts Receivable Reports to run their follow up listing. There is a new User option to show this report when Users login. The options are never which is the default, All up to Today and Today Only. This is a User Flag – Accounts Receivable located on the second screen – Show Customer follow Up Notes on Login
  7. New Feature – Customer Information – Major Account Flag – Major accounts can now be split into Groups A-F. This will be used in the wireless warehouse to have the system suggest what sequence to pack up orders in (group A is a more important account than Group B and should be packed up first).
  8. New locking – Contacts – We are now record locking when a user goes into contacts – no other user can go into the contacts for that group (a group being a customer, vendor, or personal user contacts).
  9. New Feature – Customer Mandatory Miscellaneous Charges –
  10. New Feature – Customer Account Status report will now be presented in a scroll box when Screen is selected. The Customer Account Status is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Activity Reports.
  11. New Feature – Remove all Alternates for a particular customer – If you would like to remove every alternate part number for a particular customer you can now do so. This menu item is located in Accounts Receivable, Customer Misc. Maintenance.

Accounts Payable System

  1. New Report Option – When printing the Vendor Financial Report you now have the option to only include vendors requiring a 1099. The Federal Tax Id will also be included in this report when you answer yes to print address information. This makes it easy for you to isolate Vendors that need to be sent a 1099.
  2. New Feature – Vendor Audit – When fields in the Vendor Master File are changed the system will now track the User making the change, when it was changed and what program the field was changed from. The inquiry to view the audit can be found in two locations. Utilites, System Administrator, Enmployee System, Audit Inquiries and also in Accounts Payable, Accounts Payable File Maintenance, Vendor Audit Inquiry.
  3. New Feature – The Cash Requirements report can now be generated by different currencies.
  4. New Feature – Vendor Inquiry – New Fkey F8=Parts. This new screen will show alternate products that are associated with this vendor

Inventory System

  1. Inventory System – New System Flag – You can now have the system automatically change your default vendor and default PO cost to be the same as the default alternate. There is a new flag “When Setting Default Alternate Part”. It has 3 options. Do nothing; Change Primary Vendor; Change Primay Vendor and Default PO Cost. When setting the default Alternate, and this is set to option #2 or 3, you will be asked if you do want to make the change. This flag can be found in Entity & System Flags – Inventory, the default will be Do Nothing when your system is upgraded.
  2. New Feature – Inventory Classification Defaults – You can now setup default values for your inventory classifications. The options for Inventory Classification have now been grouped into a sub menu in the Product Properties system to accommodate this new feature.
  3. New Feature – You can now import locations into The BUSINESS EDGE instead of entering them manually. If you have a large number of Locations to add you can create an Excel file, save it on the server and then import it into the system.
  4. Menu Change – The Import Inventory Menu’s have changed to accommodate more options.
  5. New Display – In Product Inquiry – F5 Show Usage – this screen will now be displayed in a scrolling box and now includes the summary usage for PPO Receipts and PPO Usage (detail lines being consumed) as well as Work Order Receipts and Usage for Manufacturing Systems.
  6. New Feature – Enter & Edit Inventory – Alternate Products – When entering an alternate code that already exists, for another product, the system will warn the user.
  7. New Feature & Menu Change – Enter & Edit Product Classification Defaults – you can now setup defaults for Product Classifications. The Product Properties Menu has been changed to group together the selections pertaining to Product Classifications.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Heading and column– When the Product Sales & Profit Report is generated to the screen it is presented in a scroll box. The Totals will now be displayed on the heading of the scroll box. When this report is presented in a scroll box a column will now be included for Gross Profit %.

documentConnection

  1. New Feature – Vendor Debit Memos are now included as a document type and also in scan manager, Inbound and Outbound history Fkeys are available in Entr & Edit Debit Memo. New Fkeys are also available in the Debit memo Inquiry.

Utilities

  1. New Feature – Multiple e-mail recipients – You can send to multiple e-mail addresses by entering them on the same line separated with a comma.

    Example: dennis@ci-inc.com,dmiller@ci-inc.com

    The default e-mail addresses for Customer and Vendor documents can store more than one recipient. This is essentially the same using a CC: or Copy To:

  2. New Feature – Increased number of characters for e-mail addresses. You now have room to enter more than one e-mail address in the defaults for the Customer and Vendor.
  3. The printer setup screen now has a new flag: Number of Copies in Label Templates?

    Set this to Yes if the label script includes how many labels to print.

    If the label script does not tell the printer how many labels to print set this flag to No and The BUSINESS EDGE will send the label script the number of times the user has selected in Number of Copies.

    Label printers that use DPL, EPL or ZPL will normally have the Number of Copies in the Label Template – set to these to Yes.

    The DPL bag printers do not support the number of copies in the script, set DPL bag printers to No. Reliance Supply has a bag printer.

    This flag does not currently affect printers that use PostScript, Installed Drivers or Dot Matrix.

    All existing printers will be set to their default settings when systems are upgraded to this version.

    	System Admin                        fastenersNOW                     Fort Myers
    	+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    	|ENTER & EDIT PRINTERS                                                  (ins) |
    	|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
    	|Printer                              |                                       |
    	|-------------------------------------+---------------------------------------|
    	|Windows Printer Name                 |                                       |
    	|System RAW Printer Name              |                                       |
    	|Printer Name with Drivers            |                                       |
    	|-------------------------------------+---------------------------------------|
    	|Printer Language                     |PostScript                             |
    	|Printer Style                        |Grayscale                              |
    	|Printer DPI                          |                                       |
    	|Label Report Name Suffix             |                                       |
    	|Form Feed Control                    |Top of Form                            |
    	|Number of Copies in Label Templates? |No                                     |
    	|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
    	|Delete                                                                |  OK  |
    	+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
    	
  4. New locking – Contacts – We are now record locking when a user goes into contacts – no other user can go into the contacts for that group (a group being a customer, vendor, or personal user contacts).
  5. New System Flags – When it is important that you link your Customers and Vendors to Alternate Product Codes you can now force a warning when a User does not select a Customer or Vendor. This is simply a warning to remind them that they may need to link the Alternate Product Code to a Customer or Vendor so that it can print on their documents.

    These new flags are located in Enter & Edit System Flags – 3. Alert when no Cust for Alt? and Alert when no Vendor for new Alt Part? It may be that you don’t use Vendor Alternates but you do use Customer Alternates so you can choose them separately.

  6. General Utilities – F2=Print Screen – We are phasing out the use of F2 as the print screen. For clients using Powerterm, the “Print Screen” button on the keyboard will print to the screen to the powerterm default printer. Also, they can use the menu system in Powerterm and choose File –> Print Screen to print the screen. Pressing CTRL-P will also bring up the Print Screen like pressing F2 used to do. If the user presses F2 and another program has not been put in the F2’s place, a message “PLEASE USE CTRL-P TO PRINT SCREEN”
  7. New Feature – There is a new “Alert” feature in The BUSINESS EDGE

    The person that is listed as the Alert Contact will receive an E-mail and or an Instant Message when certain things happen. Following is a list of some of the alerts that may be sent out by your server:

    1. Upgrades are installed
    2. Fire Wall settings are changed.
    3. Disk Space falls below 15% free
    4. Modem requires reset

    The Alert contact is setup in documentConnection Maintenance.

Branch Related Features

  1. New Report Feature – The Product Sales and Profit report can now be generated by Branch. This is located in the Sales Analysis System, Product Sales Analysis, Product Sales & Profit.
  2. New Feature – Branch selection has been added to Enter & Edit Invoices.

Release Notes – March 2007 – September 2007

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Feature – Customer Additional Addresses – When entering a Sales Order you have the option of entering a One Time Ship to Address to the Sales Order. This is done through the F5- Bill & Shipping Addresses on the final screen. When you enter a One-Time Ship to Address you now have the ability to Save the Address. If you answer Yes to Save Address the One Time Ship to Address information will be added to the Customer Master file.
  2. New Feature – Only available with PDF Forms – Packing List – We now have a new option to print out generic certifications along with packing lists. To set this up, we need to first need a copy of your generic certification and then we can create a new PDF form that will be generated when your packing list is printed. The system knows to print this certification for the order by the User entering a Miscellaneous Charge on the order. This Miscellaneous Charge would be linked to the certification form. This will be used when all items on a customer’s order are to be certified the same way (with text something like “we hereby certify that the products listed below were made to PO specification”). If you missed putting the miscellaneous charge on the order, and it is not editable anymore, you can use the menu item Print Packing List Certificate found in the Print Orders & Packing Lists menu.

    If you need to list specific properties about the products, you will still need to use the Print Certificate of Compliance that is specific for each detail line.

    If this form is customized it is billable at our normal hourly rate.

  3. New Total on Report – The Shipping Schedule by Customer will now print a total for the Orders.
  4. New report information – Open Orders by Order Number – This report now gives statistics about the orders the number of lines, the number of lines that can ship, and the number of lines that need purchasing.
  5. New Feature – Email Packing Lists automatically. If you have PDF Forms and you fill in a valid e-mail address in the Packing List Auto Send field in the Customer Master File, the system will automatically e-mail a Packing List when you print a Packing List in The BUSINESS EDGE. You can setup the Packing List Auto Send E-mail in Enter & Edit Customers, F5-Additional, F6-E-mail. The PDF will only get e-mailed when the Packing List is printed, it will not be e-mailed when the Packing List is sent to a PDF on the screen, e-mailed or faxed.
  6. New Customer Flag – Show Prices on Sales Order – In the past this was a system wide flag. It is now controlled on a Customer by Customer basis. In order to utilize this flag your forms would need to be formatted to do so. This flag is located in Enter & Edit Customers, F5-More.
  7. New Customer Flag – Show Negative Avail Items on Sales Order – If you only want to show items that are in stock and ready to ship on the Order Acknowledgement (Sales Order) you can set this flag to No. When this is set to no, items that are not in stock will not appear on the Sales Order Acknowledgement. This flag is located in Enter & edit Customers F5-More.
  8. New Form Option – Show Order Total Only? When printing an Order Acknowledgement if you would like to only show a Total at the bottom of the Order you can set this flag to Yes. This flag can be defaulted in Enter & Edit Customers, F5-More, F7-More – Default Show Order Total Only. If you would like to use this feature on your forms the changes will be billable at our normal hourly rate.
  9. New field for Customer Package Labels – Order Tracking Number. This field can be printed on Customer Package labels when the Customer Package Labels are printed before the inventory is allocated in the system. This prevents having to hand write information. The Order Tracking Number is the Order Number and Line Number. The actual Lot Number of the system can then be located after the allocation takes place by viewing the cardex.
  10. New Feature – Customer Mandatory Miscellaneous Charges

    Customers can be setup to be charged a Mandatory Miscellaneous Charge. This means that every order they place will include the Mandatory Miscellaneous Charge that is setup in their account.

    To set this up for a Customer a Miscellaneous Charge needs to be entered if it does not already exist. Miscellaneous Charges can be added in Accounts Receivable File Maintenance or Order Entry File Maintenance.

    Then in Enter & Edit Customers go to F5-More, F7-More, F8-Mand Chgs you can select the Miscellaneous Charge that you would like to add to the Orders for the Customer that you have selected. You can so this with the F3-Enter Misc. Charges Function Key.

    Then your choices when adding this Miscellaneous Charge are below.

    Allow changes to Mandatory Misc Charges?

    Allow Deletion of Mandatory Misc Charges?

    Include Mandatory Misc Charges on Back Orders?

    If you answer Yes to Allow Changes to Mandatory Misc Charges, then the User can change the amount on the Sales Order.

    If you Answer Yes to Allow Deletion of MandatoryMisc Charges thene the User can delete it from an Order. If you anwer No, it can not be deleted until this flag is changed in the Customer Master File.

    If you answer Yes to Include Mandatory Misc Charges on Backorders a Miscellaneous Charge will automatically be added to all Backorders for this Customer. If you answer No then there will not be an automatic Miscellaneous Charge added to the Backorder but you could add it manually.

Counter Sales System

  1. A field for freight has been added to the heading screen in Counter Sales. These freight charges will be added to the invoice. This is for a customer who is picking up goods when they need to pay the in-bound freight on the shipment from the Vendor.

Integrated UPS Shipping System

  1. New Feature – Add automatic handling charge to UPS Shipments – If you have The BUSINESS EDGE integration with UPS Worldship, you have the ability to add a Handling Charge to your shipments. The choices are None, Percentage, Flat Rate or Percentage & Flat Rate. This is setup in Enter & Edit Company Information, F4-Shipping Accounts.

    * NOTE – In order to use the Handling Charge Feature the files on your server must be checked to be sure that field 17 in the file is the Package Charge from UPS and not the Full Shipment Charge.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – A total has been added to the top of the screen when viewing the Purchase Orders by User inquiry.
  2. Wording Change – PPO Definition has been re-named to be Bill of Material.
  3. New field for exporting – When exporting PO Detail Lines from within Enter and Edit Purchase Orders, the Alternate Part Number will now be included in the exported data.
  4. New Feature – If you are shipping the items on you Purchase order to another Vendor for a secondary service you will now have the ability to select not only the primary Vendor Address but you can choose from all of the Vendors additional addresses.
  5. New Function Keys available – If you are viewing the Cardex for a Product and you drill into a Purchase Order Receipt the F3 – Vendor Inquiry and F4- P.O. Inquiry keys have been enabled. The Vendor Inquiry will pull up the Vendor that that the PO was received from and the P.O. Inquiry will show you the entire P.O. that the particular receipt came in on.
  6. New Feature – Update Promised Dates on PO Detail Lines – When Users change either the Original Promise Date or the Current Promise Date on the Heading of a P.O. in Enter & Edit Purchase Orders, they will be prompted to change all of the Line Items.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Feature – When a Salesperson is set to inactive, Users can not assign them to a Customer or selected them on a Sales Order. A Salesperson can be made inactive in Enter and Edit Salespersons. Customers that are currently assigned inactive Salespeople can be assigned a new Salesperson in Enter & Edit Customers.
  2. New Feature – You can now select a range when listing Customer Classifications, in the past all classifications were included in List Customer Classifications.
  3. New Feature – Customer Credit Cards – When entering Customers Credit Card information into the Customer Master File the Customers address information had to be manually typed in each time. Now when you are entering a new Credit Card you can use the F3 and F4 keys to select the Customers Billing or Shipping Addresses from the Customer record.
  4. New Feature – Sales Journal by Salesperson with Detail will now be presented in a scrolling box when presented to the screen.
  5. New Customer Report – Customer Scorecard Report – This report will go through a range of customers for a range of dates and calculate the on-time delivery performance. It will also show the number of returned items and also how many problem documents (see new ISO 9001 module) have been assigned to that customer.
  6. New Flag – Show Prices on Sales Order – This was a system flag that applied to all customers, it is now controlled on a Customer by Customer Basis. This flag can be changed in Enter & Edit Customers, F5- Additional Information. There may be a billable charge for changes to utilize this new flag.
  7. New Feature – When the Salesperson Open Commission Report is presented to the screen you now have the option to present them in a single scroll box. Totals have also been added to the top of the Salesperson Open Commission Report.
  8. New Report Feature – When printing the Deposit Report by Date you now have the ability to print the Deposit Detail on this report. In the past only check totals were provided.
  9. New Feature – When faxing Orders, Picking Ticket, Packing List and Invoices the sysem will default to the Ship To Fax Number when there is one. When faxing documents you can also press space bar and enter to get a list of Contacts from your Customer file.

Accounts Payable System

  1. Menu Re-named – Check Routines is now called Check Routines & Reconciliation. The menu has not been changed functionally.
  2. New Menu Item – G.L. Cash Account Transaction Inquiry – This inquiry is located in the Check Reconciliation menu. The only accounts that can be accessed through this inquiry are Cash Accounts. This makes it more convenient to access this information when you are reconciling your check book.
  3. New Feature – The Accounts Payable Aging will now go to a scroll box when presented to the screen. Any information that is presented in a scroll box can be exported to Exel, a text file or e-mailed if you server is configured for e-mail.
  4. New Display Field – When viewing the Check Inquiry located in the Check Routines & Reconciliation Menu you can now see the date that a check was cleared in the system.
  5. New Vendor Report – Vendor Scorecard Report – This report will go through a range of vendors for a range of dates and figure their on-time delivery performance of PO’s and PPO’s. It also will show how many problem documents (see ISO 9001 module) and debit memos have been assigned to that vendor. You can drill into each vendor for more details and receipt lists.
  6. New Feature – F4-Contacts has been added to the Vendor Notes function key, so anywhere you can enter or view Vendor Notes you have convenient access to entering and editing your Vendor Contacts.

Inventory System

  1. New Report – Adjustment Report by Lot Number – This new report will present items that were adjusted using Inventory Manual Adjustments as well as Processing Purchase Orders. The detail on this report will be by Lot Number. Since it is by Lot Number, a single adjustment could have multiple entries if the Adjustment included multiple lots. This is located in Inventory Reports, Adjustment Reports, Adjustment Report by Lot Number.
  2. New Function Keys – When you are in the Cardex and you double click or press enter on a particular transaction, the system provides you with more detail about that transaction. When viewing the detail of a Purchase Order transaction you can now Press F3 to go into a Vendor Inquiry for that Vendor. You can press F4 to go into a P.O. Inquiry where you can view the entire Purchase Order.
  3. New field for exported report – Primary Vendor has been added to the Price Discount Table Inquiry. The Price Discount Table Inquiry is located in Inventory Reports, Cost & Price Table Lists. This report will provide a listing in a scroll box of any range of products. The fields that are included are Product Code, List Price, Price Level, Quantity Break, Discount Percentage, Sell Price, Default Alternate, Description, Package Quantity and Primary Vendor.
  4. New User Flag – Product F3 Inquiry – The F3 Key in Product Inquiry is Product Notes by default. If you are using Price Tables in the system you now have the option of putting the Price Table key on the first screen of the Product Inquiry in place of the Product Notes. The Product Notes will then be where the Discount Tables were. Currently to view the Price Table users press F12-More Choices and then F7-Show List Price Discount Tables. This new Flag is in Enter & Edit User Flags – Inventory, it is on the second screen.
  5. New Feature – Inventory Cost Status Report will now go to a scrolling box when presented to the screen. Any information that is presented in a scroll box can be exported to Exel, a text file or e-mailed if you server is configured for e-mail. The totals for this report will be presented in the heading.
  6. New Inquiry – Location History Inquiry – After selecting a Location and a Date Range this inquiry will display products that were in the selected location along with the last date they were there.
  7. New Feature – When viewing Alternate Part Numbers in Enter & Edit Inventory or Product Inquiry a column has been added to show the Customer, Vendor or Multiple if you have more than one Customer or Vendor using the same Alternate Part Number.
  8. New Feature – Substitute Products can now be viewed through a Product Inquiry. It is located under F12-More, F6- Processing & Manufacturing, F3- Bill of Materials, F3- Substitute Products
  9. New Feature – The Inventory Cost Status Report will now be presented in a scrolling box when the screen option is selected.
  10. New Feature – Import Vendor Contract Pricing – this new option makes it easy to initially populate Vendor Contract Pricing as well as update the pricing when there are price changes.
  11. New Feature – Remove un-used Inventory Classifications – This new feature will check your Inventory Classifications. If there are no Products assigned to a Classification that Class will be presented in a scroll box. If you see a Class that you do not want to remove, you can highlight it and press F3-Do Not Remove. When you press Esc the system will ask you to confirm that you would like to remove the un-used Classifications.

    This new option is located in Inventory System, Inventory File Maintenance, Product Properties System, Remove Un-used Product Classifications.

  12. New Feature – Duplicate Products – If you are adding an item to inventory and it is just slightly different than an existing Product you can now duplicate the original Product and Create a new Product Code. Once you confirm that you would like to duplicate a Product you will be prompted to enter a new Product Code. You can then change the description or any of the other fields that you need to change for the new Product. This is located in Inventory File Maintenance,
  13. New Screen Pop – If you have the Integrated Able Label System the system will now automatically prompt the Product Properties Screen when you are entering a new Product.
  14. New Report Option – You can now select a range of products in the menu selection Delete Products Without History, in the past it considered all Inventory records. You can select a range by Product Code, Description, Alternate or Classification.
  15. New Feature – Change Multiple Product Locations – This will enable you to select a Range of Products from one Location and move them to a different Location. The system will present the on hand items that are in the Location you selected. You can remove items from the scroll box with the F3-Remove From List key. When you are happy with the products in the scroll box you can press Esc. The system will prompt you for the posting date and the new location. All items that were in the scroll box will now be in the new location you choose. If your flags are setup to print labels automatically after moves, you will be prompted to print a new label for each Product that was moved.

    In the Past the first selection in the Location System was Change Product Locations. There is now a Menu Change Product Locations where you can access changing a single location or this new feature Change Multiple Product Locations.

  16. New Field – Primary Vendor has been added to the Price Discount Table Inquiry when the information is exported to Excel or a text file. The Price Discount Table Inquiry is located in Inventory Reports, Cost & Price Table Lists.
  17. New Warning – When entering an Alternate Product Code that already exists for another product, the system will give the User a warning.
  18. New Feature – The Internal Product Alert Message in Enter & Edit Products currently will Pop up when you are in a Product Inquiry, it will now Pop up when you select that Product in a Purchase Order and Processing Purchase Order.
  19. The function key for Fax History has been replaced with Outbound History. This will include documents that were printed, sent to Adobe PDF, Faxed, E-mailed, sent to a text file or XML.
  20. New Feature – Import Locations – You can now import locations into the Location File. This new feature is available in the Import Inventory selections.
  21. Menu Change – Import File Data – The Enter File Relationships and Update Inventory Data Menus have been consolidated. They are now in two sub-menu’s – Product Definitions and Quantity Price & Locations.

General Ledger

  1. New Feature – A function key has been added to Enter & Edit G.L Accounts – F3-Lookup. If you would like to search for an account in Enter & Edit GL Accounts, press F3.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Feature – Sales Journal by Salesperson with Detail report will now be presented in a scroll box when Output to Screen is chosen. Any information presented in a scroll box can be put into Excel, a Text file or e-mailed if your server has been configured for email.

Utilities

  1. New Export Field – Total Billed Amount has been added to the Sales Journal export options.
  2. New Feature – Sent Fax History inquiries have been replaced with Outbound History inquiries. These inquiries will now contain history of all types of outbound activities.

    These include Print, Adobe PDF, Fax, E-mail, Text, XML

  3. New User Security Feature – Use My Menu Only flag – Found in Edit User Security (on page 3) – If this is selected as Yes, they user will be brought into their My Menu directly when they enter the system and will not be able to edit their My Menu. To change their My Menu, change this flag to No and then go in and edit the My Menu. Existing and new users will default to No. This is an additional level of security so that low level users cannot change their My Menu.
  4. New Features – Find Command – There are two new options available when using the Find Command – Find any Sequence and Find any Word. If you say Yes to Find any Sequence you can type in multiple words and it will locate any item that includes all of the words whether or not they are listed in the same order. Find any word will select records that have any one of multiple words you are searching for.
  5. New Feature – Import Vendor Contract Pricing – You can now import new or updated Vendor Contract Pricing. After defining your catalog the relationships and update programs are located in the AP import menus. The fields that can be imported is Vendor, Product Code, Start Date, End Date, Cost, Minimum Qty, Minimum Line Charge, and Vendor Package Quantity. The only mandatory fields are Vendor, Product Code, Start Date and Cost.
  6. New Feature – Import Multiple Vendors into Inventory Records. After defining your catalog and relationships, the relationship and updates are located in the AP import menus. The fields that can be imported are Product Code, Vendor Code, Cost and Comment. The Product Code and Vendor Code are mandatory fields.
  7. New Security Option – Allow Change Salesperson in Orders – If this is set to No for a User they will not have the ability to change the salesperson on a Sales Order. The default Salesperson that comes from the Customer Master file will be defaulted.
  8. New Security Options – Allowed to Enter Re-Order Points and Allowed to Enter Max Qty to Stock. If these flags are set to No for a User, that user will not have access to changing this information in a Product. Users will also not be allowed to go into the menu item – Calculate Re-Order & Max Quantity to Stock.
  9. New Feature – Re-assign User Documents – You can now re-assign ALL of a users inbound faxes and scanned documents to another User. Simply select the User you want to Re-Assign and the New User you want the documents assigned to. This is only available in Live Data and can only be done by the Fax Administrator. You can find this new feature in 9. Utilities, 3. Image & Fax System, documentConnection Maintenance.
  10. New Feature Faxing Options – Priority and Send Within. When sending a fax you can now specify a priority. The choices are Normal, Bulk, Low and High. The default priority is Normal and Faxes will go out in the order that they are sent. If you are faxing something urgent and would like a particular fax to go before other documents in the queue you can specify a high priority. If you are faxing a large batch such as statements that are not time sensitive you could make the statements Bulk priority so that other documents such as Quotes and Purchase Orders can be faxed out quicker.

    If Statements are faxing as bulk and you fax a Quote as Normal the Quote will be sent out before all of the statements. If both the Statements and a Quote were to be faxed as Normal and the Statements were sent first the Quote would not go out until all of the Statements were completed.

    Send Within is the amount of time you would like to document to sent within. The default is set to 3. If your fax does not go out within 3 hours it will fail.

    * This is only available for PDF Forms. Priority and Send Within will not work with Daemon Magic.

  11. New Feature – Remove Documents by Date Range – If you are using documentConnection for In-Bound faxing or Scanning Documents you now have an option available to remove documents by Date Range. Only the Fax Administrator has the ability to remove documents.
  12. New Feature – Blast Fax To Customers – You can send a pdf file that is saved in your user directory to any range of Customers. This feature is located in Accounts Receivable, Accounts Receivable Reports, Miscellaneous A.R. Reports.
  13. Menu Change – Import File Data – The Enter File Relationships and Update Inventory Data Menus have been consolidated. They are now in two sub-menu’s – Product Definitions and Quantity Price & Locations.

Branch Related Features

  1. New Field – A final Message can now be put on a transfer document. 2. New Feature – A function key for Print, Fax and E-mail has been added to the final screen of Enter & Edit Transfer and Send Transfer.
  2. New Feature – Transfer System – A function key has been added to the final screen to Print, Fax & E-mail Transfer documents. In the past users had to go to the Print Menu.
  3. New Feature – Transfer System – A final message has been added to the Transfer Document. From the final screen press F5 for the Final Message. If you would like to utilize this message your Transfer Forms need to be changed.
  4. New Feature – If a transfer has been received and a User attempts to print a Transfer Pick Ticket, they will get a message asking them to verify that they really want to re-print a received transfer.
  5. New Inquiry Information – The Branch information has been added to the PO and PPO Inquiries in the F4-Basic Information Key.
  6. New Branch Report – Customer Variance Report can now be generated by Branch. The Customer Variance Report is located in Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Activity Variance Report.

New Optional System now Available

ISO 9001 System
Below are some highlights of this new optional system. Please call for further details and pricing.

  • Maintaining Measuring Devices and Calibration Schedules/History – When your QA Manager logs into The BUSINESS EDGE, they are immediately warned if any measuring devices are coming due for calibration. You can calibrate the device yourself (and record the in/out measurements) or use an outside vendor to do the calibration and you simply record that it was done.
  • Inspections / First Article Inspections – This is where you can save the most time. You can setup each product with its own specification (which are created, reviewed, and when revised, the revisions are maintained for ISO compliance). When a first article inspection is needed, you can simply pull the product, record the dimensions and analysis in The BUSINESS EDGE and then print out the first article inspection. The best part is that since it is in the system, you can easily find the last time one was one on a product.(
  • Problem Documents – You can easily record customer complaints, non-conformances, corrective actions and preventive actions. The system is used for both in-house corrective and preventive actions, vendor answers to their problems. You are able to link the documents to Vendors, Products, Purchase Orders, Processing POs, Customers, and Customer Orders. You also can group the problems into different categories and run a Pareto Analysis of the problems you are having. You can then focus on your largest problems. Another benefit is that your QA manager gets a list of all documents that need attention so that you don’t accidentally forget to close a document or review it after the solution has been implemented.
  • Scorecard Reports – We have new customer on-time shipment reports that give you a great summary of how well you are satisfying your customer needs. The Vendor Scorecard reports help you analyze your vendors on-time delivery performance along with what problems are on-going at the vendor.
  • Maintenance Schedules and Logs – The BUSINESS EDGE helps you plan and record maintenance events of your machines. Your maintenance staff (and their supervisor) are informed on a daily basis of what machines are due for maintenance.

Release Notes – November 2006 – February 2007

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Flag – Orders-Warn if Qty Ordered causes (-)Avail? When entering an Order if the quantity on the order will cause the available quantity to go below zero a message will come up once the quantity is entered. The message will state that the quantity ordered will create a negative availability. The User can the press Escape to clear the screen and continue.

    This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Order Entry. The default answer will be No.

  2. New Display – When in a Product Inquiry and viewing the Open Sales Orders through the Show Sales Orders Function key, the system will now show scheduled line items as individual lines. In the past Users had to highlight the Sales Order and press F3 to see the individual schedules. You can still highlight a schedule line time which is indicated by no * on the end by highlighting any line and pressing F3.
  3. New field on report – Orders in Excess of Stock – This report will now include the Primary Vendor if there is a Primary Vendor setup in a Product that is included on the report.
  4. New Display – When doing an Order Inquiry you can no see the User Name that entered the Order along with the date and time. This is displayed next to the Customers Phone Number.

Purchase Order System

  1. New field – When in a Purchase Order Inquiry, you can view Sales Orders that are tied to Purchase Orders through Set PO in Order Entry. The Product Code has been added to each Sales Order Line item.
  2. New report Option – PPO Component Expediting Report – by Product. There is now a question Print On Hand Lots & Locations. If this is answered Yes, the on hand lots and locations for each item will be included on this report.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Feature – When printing or faxing Customer Statements in a batch, the system will prompt the User to confirm that they are printing more than 25 Statements.
  2. New Feature – When printing or faxing Customer Invoices in a batch, the system will prompt the User to confirm that they are printing more than 25 Invoices.

Accounts Payable System

  1. New Field – A message field has been added to the Vendor Master File. This message can be formatted to print on your Purchase Order, Processing Purchase Order or RFQ forms. Messages can be entered or edited in Enter & Edit Vendors, F5-More, F7- Msg. Changes to forms are billed at our normal hourly rate. If you would like to utilize this field on your forms please call our Customer Service Department for a quotation on changing your forms.

Inventory System

  1. New Field and Feature – There is a new field in the Inventory Master file – Order Entry Message. This is a text field where any type of note pertaining to that particular product can be entered. This new field is on the Additional information screen. If there is an Order Entry Message in a Product, a Message screen will automatically pop up when the product is selected.
  2. New Fields for Exporting – When exporting Inventory information from the Export system three new fields have been added as optional fields to export to excel or a text file. Average Monthly Sales, Quantity Sent to Processor and Average Quantity Sent to Processor. When setting up an export format, these new fields are possible selections at the bottom of the list of fields.
  3. New System – The physical inventory system has been re-written for systems that are tracking lots and or locations. They physical can be generated for any range sequenced by Location, Product Code, Product Description or Classification. The Physical System is located in Inventory System, Inventory File Maintenance, Location System, Physical Inventory System.

    When performing a physical count there should not be any products allocated to Sales Orders or Sent on Processing Purchase Orders.

    Once a sort has been selected for the entity, it cannot be changed until all of the records in the worksheet file have been removed (updated or cleared) for that entity. Multiple users can input counts as long as their ranges that they are inputting do not overlap. If you have the multiple branch system, a user can only work on their selected branch. During the update, the change in inventory is applied to the current lot. If the change cannot happen due to allocations, the user is warned right before the update and the change will be limited to the maximum change that can happen without effecting the allocations.

  4. New feature – In the physical Inventory system on systems that have tracking enabled, there is now an option to print each Classification on a separate sheet of paper when performing a physical count by Classification.    4. New Feature – When using the Figure Inventory Stocking Criteria feature, the system will now also show the overall financial impact of the proposed changes. The current, suggested and change in the value of the stocking objective, the re-order point, and the max quantity to stock (based on the Default PO Cost).
  5. New Feature – Vendor Contract Pricing can now have quantity breaks.
  6. New fields for exporting – When running the What Who Buys Inquiry and or the Who Buys What Inquiry the Customers Alternate Product Code will now be included in the data. The Customers Alternate needs to be related to the Customer in the Inventory Master File. These inquiries are designed to be exported to Excel or a text file. They are located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Activity Reports.
  7. New Feature – Unit of Measure can now be tied to an Alternate Product Code. If you normally sell a product in one Unit of Measure but have a Customer that has their own Product Code that would like to be billed in a different Unit of Measure you can now specify that Unit of Measure in the Enter & Edit Alternate Products function key in Enter & Edit Products. Then when you select that Customers Alternate their preferred Unit of Measure will be defaulted to the Order or Quote.
  8. New Export fields – When exporting inventory through the Export Menu the following fields are now available – Average Sales Per Month, Average PPO’s Sent Per Month and PPO’s Sent.

Sales Analysis

  1. New report option – When printing the Customer Sales and Profit by Product Report there is a new option. Show Qty Decimals. Answering No to this question will allow more space for the information, particularly if you are including multiple periods.

Utilities

  1. New Security Flag – Allow Salesperson Change in Orders – This new flag is setup on a User-by-User basis. If you do not want a User to have the ability to change the Salesperson on a Sales Order or Quote, answer No to this flag. If the User attempts to change the Salesperson, they will see an Access Denied message. This new flag is located on the third screen of Enter & Edit User Permissions, the default answer is Yes.
  2. New User History Options – If you have the system setup to keep track of Users History the option to Show Users Activity has been replaced with a new menu option – User History System. This new menu option has two choices.

    Show Users Activity – this selection will enable you to view the activity for All Users or individual Users. This inquiry will show the date and time each User logged in and logged out of The BUSINESS EDGE. The information will be presented in a scroll box in Date Order.

    Report History Inquiry – This new Inquiry will show reports that were generated in The BUSINESS EDGE. The information includes the Report Name, Date, Time and the User that ran the report. This information is presented in date sequence in a scrolling box.

  3. New flag – Keep Tracked Time History for – You can now specify how much user history you would like the system to retain. By default, this flag is set to 14 days. Any information older than 14 days will be purged from the system. If you would like to

Branch Related Features

  1. New Option – Customer Variance Report can now be produced by Branch.

Release Notes – July 2006 – October 2006

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Report Option – The Order Fill report by PPO Product has an additional question – Skip Items without Sales Orders. If this option is answered No, the Product received on PPO’s that do not have Sales Orders will not be included in this report. The Order fill reports are located in Order Reports, Scheduling and Expediting Reports. These are very useful if you would like to produce a report of Products that came in on a particular day along with the Orders that are open for those Products.
  2. New Function Key – When on the final screen in Enter & Edit Orders there is a function key – F11 that enables a user to sort the detail lines of the Order by different criteria. You now have the ability to sort by the Alternate Part Number in the Sales Order.
  3. New Report Option – Open Orders by Salesperson – All Detail. There is a new question on this report, Print On Hand Lots & Locations. When this is answered Yes, the system will print the Lots and Locations for each Product on the report that has on hand inventory. The default answer will be No.
  4. New Flag – Default Line Item Price on Credit Items. When entering a negative quantity on an Order you can now specify how you would like the default selling price to display. You can select Zero or Last Price. If you select Last Price, the last price that Customer Paid will be chosen. If you select zero, Users have sales history conveniently located within the sales order so researching the actual price the customer paid in the past is very easy. The last price your Customer paid is also displayed on the detail screen along with the date and quantity purchased. This flag can be setup in Entity & System Flags, Order Entry Flags.
  5. New Flag – Include Closed Orders in Lost Sales. If you have the system automatically recording lost sales when line times are removed from Orders and Quotes this additional flag will also include Closed Orders in the Lost Sales information. When this flag is set to Yes and an Order is closed using the F9-Close Order function key in Enter & Edit Orders, the line items on that closed order will be recorded as lost sales. A comment will indicate that they came from a closed order. This flag is located in Entity & system Flags, Order Entry Flags.
  6. New User Flag – Default # of Copies on Pick Tickets. Each User can now specify the number of copies that they would typically like to print when printing Pick Tickets. Each User can setup their own preference in F1-User Flags- Order Entry, F5- Document Flags. The defaults setup in this screen will be used when printing through the function keys, the menu and also when printing backorders in process. In the past, the backorders in process always defaulted to 1 order, 1 packing list and 0 pick tickets.
  7. New User Flag – Allow changing Orders to Quotes. If this flag is set to No the User cannot change an Order to a Quote. This flag is located in User Flags – Order Entry on the second screen.
  8. New Flag – Allow Terms Change during Order Entry. When entering a Sales Order, Users have the ability to change the Payment Terms on a Sales Order. If this new flag is set to No, Users will not have the ability to change the Payment terms on an individual Order. If this flag is set to No and the Payment Terms need to be changed, they can be changed in the Customer record. The Payment Terms are assigned to each Customer in Enter & Edit Customers.
  9. If Users have permission to access Enter & Edit Customers they can make this change through the F6 key on the Heading Screen of Enter & Edit Orders.

  10. New Security Level Flag – Allowed to Edit Prices. Specific Security Levels can be setup so that Users with that level cannot change prices on a Sales Order. If Users try to change a price, the system will display a pop-up message that says Security Check. In order to change the price on the line item a security code must be entered. If a valid security code is not entered the users will not be able to change the price, the system will display, Access Denied.

    This new flag is in Edit Security Levels – F5 Entry & Deletion Access, on the second screen. Once you change a security level, all Users which are assigned that particular level in Enter & Edit User Permissions will be affected.

    The security code to allow a User to change the selling price in Enter & Edit orders is located in. System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity & System Flags, Order Entry Flags. This code can be changed at any time.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Function Key – When using the F8-Set PO function key during the entry of a Sales Order Detail Line, you can now view Purchase History for the Vendor you have selected. You can select a date range and the system will present all products that you have purchased from that vendor with the date range you selected.
  2. Enabled Feature – You can now Fax a Processing Purchase Order from the Final Screen of a Processing Purchase Order using the F4-Fax Processing PO function key. Previously this key was on the screen but not available.Computer Insights, Inc. The BUSINESS EDGE
  3. Additional Field for exporting – When exporting the Receipts Journal by Vendor the Inventory Classification will now be included. This provides more sorting capabilities.
  4. New Feature – Enter PPO Definitions on the fly – You can now Enter or Edit a Processing Purchase Order Definition when you are in Enter & Edit Processing P.O.’s. When you are at the Detail Line screen where you enter the components needed to create the Product, there is now an F5- PPO Definition function key. If you enter a definition for the product that you are currently creating the PPO will be automatically populated after entering it here and returning to the detail lines.
  5. New Feature – PPO Component Report by Product – This new report will provide you with a list of Products along with their PPO Definitions. Users can select any range of Products. When this report is printed or viewed in PDF format each product in the selected range will be presented along with the PPO Definition. When this information is presented in a scrolling box it can be exported to Excel or a text file. This new report is located in Purchase Order System, Processing P.O. System, PPO Reports.
  6. New Feature – PPO Component Availability Planning – This new feature enables you to view a bill of material for items with Processing Purchase Order Definitions for planning purposes. The system will prompt you for the Product you would like and the quantity you would like to create. There is also an option to include sub-components.

    You will then be brought to a screen where you will see a listing of the components needed along with the quantity needed, the available quantity and costs. You can easily view a product inquiry for any of the products listed by simply pressing enter on the Product The heading recaps the quantity you requested to produce along with the maximum quantity available to produce and estimated cost.

  7. New Feature – Enter & Edit Processing Purchase Order Definitions. This is now a menu selection in the Processing Purchase Order Menu. You can select any range of Products. They system will then give you the option to include all Products in the range that you selected or just the Products that either have a Definition or do not have a Definition.

    The selected products will be listed in a scrolling box. On the right side of the scrolling box a column will indicate whether or not a PPO Definition exists for that product. You can press enter on any product listed and either enter or edit a PPO Definition for that product. This new feature enables you to quickly enter or edit PPO Definitions for a range of products.

  8. Function Key Change – When on the final screen in Enter & Edit Purchase Orders F8 was Print PO and F9 was Fax PO. F8 is now Print, Fax and E-mail options. F9 is now Consolidate Detail Lines.
  9. New Report Option – Purchase Order Receipts in Process Report – There are now three options for this report. The default report is a summary by Vendor, this summary shows each Vendor along with the Purchase Orders received and the total dollar value. Additional choices now include – Detail and Detail with Sales Orders. When Detail is selected each line received on the Purchase Order will be presented with the quantity and value received. This report will also subtotal the receipts by Purchase Order. When Detail with Sales Orders is selected each detail line will be presented along with any open sales orders for each product. If you are using default locations by product, the default location will also be included to help with putting away excess stock.

    The flag to select the report option you would like is located in Entity & System Flags, Purchase Order Flags.

  10. New Report Option – Open P.O.’s by Vendor. When generating this report you can now select to print the Line Comments when including the Detail Lines on this report.
  11. New Confirmation request – When deleting a Request for Quote, the system will now ask the User to confirm before deleting the document.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Option when Faxing Invoices in Process. If you are using the Fax invoices in Process feature the system can now automatically prompt the User to Update Invoices after going through the normal Faxing and Printing of the Invoices. This way Users do not have to update the invoices as a separate process. The Update procedure will prompt the User for Backorders if that flag is set to do so, it will provide and In-Process Register and then finally ask the User if they would like to Update.

    This new flag is located in Entity & System Flags – Accounts Receivable

  2. New Function Key – When entering a deposit through Cash Receipts a function key has been added to give you access to your internal Customer Notes. While in the Check Heading Screen, the F3-Notes key will enable you to view existing Customer Notes or add new Customer Notes.
  3. New Feature – Fax Un-sent Invoices. This new feature will function just like the option to Print Un-sent Invoices. You can select a date range and the system will check all Invoices in that range that have not been printed or faxed. If the flag in the Customer Master File is set to Fax Invoices Daily then the system will suggest that you fax those invoices. You also have an option to simply list the invoices that have not faxed.

    If it is your procedure to Fax all of your invoices over-night, you could run this selection in the morning and the system will re-try any faxes that failed the evening before. If you continue to have failed faxes, you would then want to print and mail those invoices. Using Print Un-sent Invoices will isolate those invoices for you.

  4. New export fields – Customer Sales History – When in a Customer Inquiry and viewing F5- Sales History additional fields have been added when this information is exported to Excel or a text file. These fields include bin location, bin minimum, bin maximum and contract price for that item. This additional information makes it easy to create a file to put on the palm pilot for vendor-managed inventory, which includes all of the products that your customer purchases from you.

Accounts Payable System

  1. New Feature – When in a Vendor Inquiry, F7- Invoices & Checks, F4- Show All Invoices now have options on what invoices you would like to see and in what sequence. After Pressing F4 in the past all invoices were presented in Invoice Number order. You can now select a Date Range and have options to sequence the Invoices by Invoice Number, Invoice Date or Due Date.
  2. New Function Key – When entering an Accounts Payable Invoice for Inventory that was received and posted to Accrued Accounts Payable you can now view a P.O. or P.P.O. Inquiry. When you press F5-Po List, there is a F3-Purchase Order Inquiry that will bring you into the P.O that you have selected. When you press F6-PPO List, there is a F3-PPO Inquiry that will bring you directly into the PPO that you have selected.

    This new feature makes it very easy to troubleshoot discrepancies while you are entering vendor invoices.

Inventory System

  1. New Information – While doing a Product Inquiry and viewing the Cardex, you can press enter on a Sales transaction and see the Invoice Number that the Product was shipped on. The Order Number will now also be displayed. This is helpful for companies that have different Order and Invoice Numbers.
  2. New Field for export – Product Classification has been added to the data that is exported for the Product Activity Report. The Product Activity report provides a listing of items sold within a selected date range. Information included is the number of times an item was picked and the average quantity picked. This information can be very useful when trying to isolate fast or slow moving items. Some companies use this information to help design their warehouse layout.
  3. New System Flag – User Short Range Available Logic. – The default calculation for Available Quantity in The BUSINESS EDGE is Quantity On Hand minus Committed and optionally adding in Quantity on P.O. and Processing P.O. This new flag will limit the Sales Orders that are considered in the Committed Quantity taking into consideration Sales Orders Scheduled for a future date. If this flag is set to Yes the Committed Quantity will only reflect Sales Orders that have a date requested that is less than or equal to Today’s Date plus the lead time of the Product plus 14 days. When the Available Quantity is calculated, it will then use this Committed Quantity.

    If this flag is turned on, the system will display the date that scheduled Orders will be included through on the General Product Inquiry Screen. If you are using the Consolidated Document Inquiry, this date will be shown there as well. When viewing the Open Sales Orders a line show the cut off between orders up to and after this Date. This flag can be turned on in Entity & System Flags – Inventory.

  4. New Report Option – Dead Inventory Report – A new report option – Show individual Lots/Locations. If you answer Yes to this new question when generating the Dead Inventory Report, Products with multiple Lots and or Locations will appear multiple times. If you answer No you will see a single line for each Product. The default answer will be No.
  5. New Feature – Substitutes – You can now enter substitutes for Products in the inventory master file. Substitutes can then be selected on a Sales Order or Processing Purchase Order through a function key.

    Entering Substitutes – In Enter & Edit Products press F5-Additional Information, F4- PPO Definitions, F3-Substitute Products. You can then enter as many substitute products as needed for the Product that you have selected. For each substitute product you can then indicate how it can be used with PPO’s and Orders. The choices are Perfect, Useable or cannot be used. There is also an option for a conversion factor if the substitute is not a one for one replacement.

    Using Substitutes – When you are entering a Sales Order or a Processing Purchase Order the system can suggest substitutes based on the products that you have entered.

    When in the Sales Order Detail Line, press F11 to see if there are any substitutes for the Product you have selected. You will be presented with a scroll box showing you the substitute Products, the type of substitution (perfect or useable) along with the available quantity and quantity on hand. You can also view a Product Inquiry for the substitute products by highlighting the product and pressing F3. If you would like to select one of the substitutes, simply press enter or click on it to select it. The system will have you confirm you would like to select the substitute part and then it will change the order.

    When in a Processing Purchase Order Detail Line, press F7-Subs to see if there are any substitutes for the product you need to send to the processor. You will be presented with a scroll box showing you the substitute Products, the type of substitution (perfect or useable) along with the available quantity. If you would like to select on of the substitutes, simply press enter or click on it to select it. The system will have you confirm you would like to select the substitute part and then it will change the Processing Purchase Order.

  6. New Feature – Vendor Contract Costs – You can now enter Contract Costs from a Vendor into The BUSINESS EDGE. The system will automatically select the Contract Cost when creating a Purchase Order.

    Entering Contract Costs – Vendor Contract Costs can be entered through Enter & Edit Vendors or Enter & Edit Products. If you have multiple Products for one Vendor, it is more efficient to enter the Contract Costs through Enter & Edit Vendors. This can be done by pressing F5- Additional Information, F5- Contract Costs. If you would like to enter a new contract price, simply press Enter on New Line. If you would like to edit an existing Product, highlight the Product and press enter to select it. You can enter a Beginning Date, Ending Date and Contract Price and Contract Minimum Line Charge. If the date fields are blank, the Contract Price will not expire.

    If you are entering Contract Prices for different Vendors and Products, it may be more efficient to enter them through Enter & Edit Products. You can do this by Selecting an Item in Enter & Edit Products, press F4- Cost and then F4- Vendor Contract Costs. In this entry screen after selecting the Vendor you will enter the same information including Beginning Date, Ending Date, Contract Price and Contract Minimum Line Charge.

    The system will then automatically select the Vendor’s Contract Price when entering a Purchase Order through Enter & Edit Purchase Orders or when using the new Automatic Replenishment System. If you have entered Minimum Line Charges along with the Contract Pricing the system will increase the per unit price if you have not exceeded the minimum.

    Vendor Contract Prices can also be viewed in the Detail line of a Processing P.O. as well in a Product Inquiry, F6-Stocking Information, and F7- Contract Costs.

  7. New Feature – Figure Inventory Stocking Criteria – This new feature can help reset Stocking Objectives, maximum Quantity to Stock and Re-Order Points. These fields are used in the Re-Order Point Reports and the Automated Replenishment System.

    Users are prompted for an Inventory range, whether to include PPO Definitions and then criteria to set the stocking values to. A different number of Customers and Number of Detail Lines can be selected along with different stocking objectives and Max Quantity to stock. A specific re-order point can be selected or the system can re-calculate the reorder point.

    The Re-Order Point is calculated based on Average Usage per day * (Stocking objective + lead-time). The Average Usage per day is calculated as Customer Usage of the Product for the number of months as entered in the # month’s usage. This is located in Edit Auto Replenishment Flags, in the Auto Replenishment System.

    This new feature is located in Inventory System, Re-Order Point System, Re-Order Point System Maintenance, Figure Inventory Stocking Criteria.

  8. Field removed – Manufacturing Type is no longer used in the system and therefore is no longer located in Enter & Edit Products.
  9. New Field – Auto Replenishment Type – this new field has been added to Enter & Edit Products. On a Product-by-Product basis, Users can specify the type. Choices include – System Suggest – this means that the system will figure out what type of document should be created based on the Auto Replenishment rules, P.O., RFQ, PPO or Work Order. If PPO or Work Order is selected and there is no definition, the Automated Replenishment System will default back to a Po or RFQ.

    This new field is located in Enter & Edit Products, F5-Additional Information. The default answer is System Suggest.

  10. New field added to inquiry for export – Customer Alternate Product Code has been added to What Who Buys – This report will present the products purchased by a specific customer within a specific period. The information is presented in a scrolling box and can be exported to excel or a text file. When the information is exported, it will include the Customers Alternate Product Code.

    This inquiry is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Activity Reports.

Sales Analysis

  1. When exporting Sales Journal information or Sales Journal Information with Detail you can now select a range of Customers. Exporting Sales Journal Information is available through the Sales Analysis System and the Utilities System.
  2. Product Sales and Profit Report will now be presented in a scrolling box when output method of screen is selected. This will enable you to export this information to Excel or a text file. When running the Product Sales and Profit you can select any range of products and up to three date ranges.
  3. When exporting Sales Journal Detail information one of the selection fields is the Alternate Part Number. In the past, the system would export the default Alternate Part Number. The system will now export the Alternate that belongs to the Customer if the customer record has been tied to the Alternate Part Number in Enter & Edit Products.
  4. New fields – When the Customer Sales & Profit report is put into Excel or a text file the Customer’s Address information will now be included.

Utilities

  1. New Feature – When entering a telephone or fax number in The BUSINESS EDGE, if a number is entered without an area code the system will assume that the area code is the same as your company’s area code and fill it in automatically.
  2. New Security Level Flag – Allowed to Edit Prices. Specific Security Levels can be setup so that Users with that level cannot change prices on a Sales Order. If Users try to change a price, the system will display a pop-up message that says Security Check. In order to change the price on the line item a security code must be entered. If a valid security code is not entered the users will not be able to change the price, the system will display, Access Denied.

    This new flag is in Edit Security Levels – F5 Entry & Deletion Access, on the second screen. Once you change a security level, all Users which are assigned that particular level in Enter & Edit User Permissions will be affected.

    The security code to allow a User to change the selling price in Enter & Edit orders is located in. System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity & System Flags, Order Entry Flags. This code can be changed at any time.

  3. New field for export – When export Sales Journal information you can now choose to include the User that entered the sales order.
  4. New Feature – If you have multiple Entities, the system will no longer force the User to exit the system and re-enter.

Branch Related Features

  1. Branch Option has been added to the Dead Inventory Report. The Dead Inventory report can be generated for a single branch or all branches combined.
  2. When running the Branch Usage Inquiry you can now select All Branches, in the past only individual branches could be selected.

Release Notes – May 2006 – June 2006

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Function Key Option – Customer Sales History can be viewed while in a Sales Order with the F4-History function key located on the first two screens. It can also be viewed when you are in a Customer Inquiry using the F5-Sales History function key. After selecting the Date Range and Range of Products you would like to see, this inquiry displays the most recent purchase of the products you selected. When you press Enter on a specific item, you then see each time that Customer purchased that particular item. When you are in the screen showing all of the purchases for a particular item, there is now a Function Key for a Product Inquiry. When you press the function key, you will automatically go into a Product Inquiry for the Item that you were viewing.
  2. New Field and Feature – Customer Default PO Number – There is a new field in the Customer Master File – Default P.O. Number. This field can be edited in Enter & Edit Customers, F5-Additional, F7-More. When entering a new Sales Order or Direct Invoice the value in this field will automatically fill in as the P.O. Number. You can then over-ride the P.O. Number if needed. This is helpful if you have Customers with standing P.O. Numbers for a period of time.
  3. New User Flag – Customer Inquiry Order Inquiry Sequence – The options are Order Number, Ascending Date or Descending Date. Each User can customize this flag so that when they are in a Customer Inquiry and press F6- Show Orders, the Orders for the selected Customer will be displayed in their order preference. The default is Order Number. This flag is located on the second screen of User Flags – Order Entry.
  4. New Flag and Feature – Allow Duplicate Customer P.O. #’s – This Yes/No flag is located in the Customer Master file. If this question is set to No the system will give Users a warning if they enter a P.O. Number for a customer that has been previously used. This will not prevent an order from being entered, but provides a warning. The default answer to this question is Yes.
  5. New Feature – Master Contract Pricing – If you have the same contract pricing for multiple customers, you can now reduce the maintenance on entering and updating their contract prices. Once you enter or import the contract pricing for one customer, you can now simply select that customer as a Master Customer in another Customer’s record. Any changes you make the Master Customers Contract Pricing will automatically change in all of the Customers that have designated them as the Master Customer.

    To select a Master Customer you simply press F3-Master Customer in Enter & Edit Contract Pricing, which is located in Enter & Edit Customers, F5-Additional, F5-Contract Pricing.

  6. New Report/Inquiry – Shipping Schedule – Show Documents – This new report/inquiry will present Sales Orders that are open in the system. You can select a Date Range, which will check against the Date Requested and Schedule Dates on Orders. Schedule Dates always over-ride the Date Requested. You can choose to sort it by Customer Code, Customer Name, Product Code, Product Description or Schedule Date. You can choose to include Orders without Schedules, Include Expense and Non-Stock Products, and Allocated Items.

    The report is currently only available to be shown on the screen and exported to Excel. Once it is in Excel, you can sort it by the different columns. The Columns included in the export are Order Number, Number of Line items for that Customer, Ship to Name, Product Code, Quantity, Status (Stock, Allocated, PO # or PPO#), Promised Date, Schedule Date, Schedule Comment and Product Description.

    The status column will show stock if the product is in stock. It will show allocated if it is already allocated. If it is on a PO or PPO, the document number is included. If the product is not due in until after the order is due, there is an asterisk before the PO or PPO designation.

    When the information is displayed on the screen, you can drill into any item. You then have the ability to do a Product Inquiry, Order Inquiry, See all open Documents for that product or all Orders shipping to that Customer.

    This new report is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Scheduling and Expediting Reports, Shipping Schedule – Show Documents.

  7. New Function Key Option – F3 in Order Detail Line. When you are in a Sales Order and have selected a Product at the detail lines the F3 key always presented sales history showing each time your customer purchased the item you selected. There are now choices for this function key. Each User can set their User Flag based on their preference. The choices are Sales History, Cardex or Product Inquiry. If you change the F3 Key to represent a cardex or Product Inquiry, pressing the key will bring you immediately to the product you have selected.

    This flag is changed in User Flags – Order Entry and is located on the first screen.

  8. New Feature – If you have a Customer set to No Backorders in the Customer Master file, the system will not generate a backorder for products that have not been shipped when the invoice is created. If the system flag to record lost sales in Order Entry is set to Yes, the system will now record those line items that were not backordrered as lost sales. When viewing a Lost Sales report, the system will report the date of the order and that is was lost due to No Backorders. This will help the purchasing department by indicating that there was demand for those products.
  9. New field – The Open Orders by User Inquiry will now include the Date Requested from the Sales Order Heading when exported to Excel.
  10. When viewing Lost Sales information in a Product Inquiry, F3-Notes, F3- Lost Sales, the User that recorded the Lost Sales will now be displayed on the screen.
  11. New Inquiry – Lost Sales Inquiry by Date – This inquiry was previously called Lost Sales Inquiry by branch. It has been changed so that users with or without the Branch System can utilize this report. You can select a Date range and the system will present all items recorded as Lost Sales within that period. This can also be exported to Excel. If you have the branch system, you can still generate this report for all branches or a single branch location.
  12. New Feature – Automatically show Customers Alternate Part Number on Order Detail Line. If you have Alternate Part Numbers setup for your Customers and you have linked, their account to their Part Number the system can automatically pull their Alternate Part Number into the Sales Order so that you see it on the screen. If your forms are formatted to print the Alternate Part Number, it will print it as well. In order to use this feature a flag, Force Use of Customer Part # must be set to Yes. This flag is located in Entity and System Flags, Order Entry Flags on the second screen. Please feel free to contact Customer Service to change this flag for you as well.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – If the Purchase Order User Flag Return to Current Line During Edit is set to Yes, the RFQ will also return a User to the last line they edited instead of bringing them back to the first line of the RFQ.
  2. New Feature – In the Vendor Master file there is a field called Special Instructions. This field can be edited in Enter and Edit Vendors, F5- Additional, F4- Instructions. Currently this field is displayed on the Heading of the Detail Lines during Enter & Edit Purchase Orders. This Special Instruction field will now also be displayed while entering a Processing Purchase Order. This field is a good place to enter Vendor minimums or any type of information that you feel would be useful for the Users entering a P.O. or PPO.
  3. New Feature – When in a Processing Purchase Order Detail Line the F3- History Key has been enabled. You can now view Purchase History, Cardex or Usage information for the Product you are selecting on a Processing Purchase Order. This function key will use the same User Flag selection you setup for the F3 Key in Purchase Orders. The User flag is located in User Flags Purchase Orders and is defaulted to Purchase History.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Feature – While in Customer Notes you can now access the contacts for the Customer you have selected. Press F7-Contacts to view all of the contact information for your Customer. Contacts can be entered, edited or viewed in this function key.

Accounts Payable System

  1. New Field – Freight Free Amount – A new field has been added to the Vendor Master File – Freight Free Amount. This field is used in the new Automatic Replenishment system. This can be entered or edited in Enter & Edit Vendors, F5-Additional screen. RoHS Compliant and ISO Certified questions have been moved to the F4-Instruction key.
  2. New Feature – Export Vendor Contacts – You can now setup an export format and export all of your Vendor Contact information. Vendor Contacts can be entered in a Vendor Inquiry as well as in Enter and Edit Vendors. You can have an unlimited number of Vendor Contacts.

    You can setup the fields you would like to export in 9. Utilities, 5. Export File Data, 1. Enter & Edit Export Formats, A/P Export Formats. You can then export any range of contacts in Export A/P Information.

Inventory System

  1. New fields – The following field has been added to Enter & Edit Products – RoHS Compliant? The options for this question are Undetermined, Yes, No, Lot Specific. This new question is located in F5-Additional Information.
  2. New Fields – Heat Number and Melting Country – These fields can be entered as additional information available by lot number. These can be entered while receiving PO’s, Entering Manual Adjustments or in Edit Production Mfg Information. Each field can be displayed by turning on flags located in Edit System Flags 2. Please feel free to call our customer service department to turn these on for you.

    If you are utilizing these new fields a second screen will be presented when receiving a line item to enter this additional information.

  3. New System – Automated Replenishment System

    This system was designed to enable The BUSINESS EDGE to help you create outgoing documents efficiently.

    It can create Purchase Orders, RFQs, Processing Purchase Orders, Work Orders and Transfers.

    The new report is in many places:
    Main Menu → Inventory System → Re-Order Point System… → Re-Order Point Reports… → Automated Replenishment System

    Main Menu → Manufacturing System → Work Order / Scheduling System… → Work Order Planning. → Automated Replenishment System

    Main Menu → Purchase Order System → Purchase Order Reports → Automated Replenishment System

    Main Menu → Inventory System → Inventory File Maintenance → Location System → Transfer System → Transfer Reports → Automated Replenishment System

    For the purpose of this report, the Available quantities will include On Hand, On PPO, On PO, On Work Order, On Transfer, to Customer Orders, to PPOs, To Work Orders, and To Transfers. The system ignores the Include PO in Avail flag.

    Standard Inventory Range Options
    The report starts with the standard inventory range options. Select the range of products.

    The report figures the document with the following logic:

    1. If there are no PPO Definitions, it is a Purchase Order.
    2. If there are PPO Definitions, and no Process Definitions, it is a Processing Purchase Order
    3. If there are PPO Definitions and Process Definitions, it is a Work Order
    4. If there are no PPO Definitions and there is extra quantity at another branch (enough to not bring that branch below its re-order point) and the current branch can transfer from the other branch, then it is a transfer.

      In order to appear on the PO and PPO list, a Default Vendor MUST be selected for the product (or a Branch Default Vendor if the system is branch enabled).

    Options

    • Type of Document – Choose All, Purchase Orders, Processing P.O., Work Order, All, or Transfers (Branch Enabled systems only).
    • Traverse PPO Definitions – Yes/No – If you choose yes, the system will find all products that are made from the product that the report is analyzing and then figure the availability based on the documents that are open for the secondary-components (and all of their secondary components). This slows down the report, however is very useful for companies that use PPOs or Work Orders.
    • Buyer Code – Choose All or choose the Buyer Code that is related to the inventory record
    • Re-Order Point Logic:
      • Use Re-Order Point Logic – this assumes that all re-order points for all products are correct (including ones that are zero). When the available is less than or equal to the re-order point, it will appear in the lists.
      • Ignore Zero Re-Order Points – this allows the client to set items that they do not want to purchase to have a “0” re-order point. This report will ignore items that have Available > = 0.
      • Show only when Avail < 0 – this ignores all re-order points and only shows products that are needed to be order due to requirements being above the current available.
    • Quantity to Calculate
      • Max Qty to Stock (> Min Purch Qty) This will set the quantity to place on the document to bring the Current Available to the Max Qty to Stock (and also above the Min Purchasing Quantity)
      • Max Qty to Stock (ignore Purch Qty’s) This will set the quantity to place on the document to bring the Current Available to the Max Quantity to Stock (ignoring the Min Purchasing Quantity and the Optimum Purchasing Quantity)
      • Opt Purch Qty This will set the quantity to place on the document to the Optimum Purchase Quantity (providing that it brings the available above the re-order point (if not, it figures a quantity to bring the available above the re-order point) and providing the quantity to order brings the available to less than the max quantity to stock (if not, it figures a quantity to bring the available to the max quantity to stock).
      • Bring Avail to 0 This option will set the quantity to place on order so that the Available is zero once the document is received.

    Main Scrolling Box

    You are brought into a scrolling box with the list of items to be purchased, the document that needs to be created, the date the product is needed, the current available and the quantity that The BUSINESS EDGE calculated that should be on the document.

    If you select a scroll line, you are brought into an inventory inquiry box. If you want to remove an item from the list, you can use the F3=Remove Fkey to delete it from the list (note, if you delete and item and then re-run the report, the item will show back up again in the new list).

    There are also Fkeys to start working on creating the different documents.
    F3=POs
    F4=RFQs
    F5=PPOs
    F6=WOs
    F7=Transfers

    Purchase Orders

    • Options
      • Include Cover Page on Faxes – if you have the fax system installed and you choose to send your PO by fax, this is the option to include or not include the Cover Page.
      • Final Message – This will be a final message that is put on all generated Purchase Orders.
      • Output to: Fax – will fax the PO to the vendor (providing there is a fax number associated with the vendor, otherwise it will print); Print Only – will only print the document to the selected Printer; Fax and Print Copy – will send a fax and also print the PO onto the selected printer.
    • Purchase Orders to be Generated

      This scroll box lists the POs to be generated to the different vendors.

      You can drill down into each line and edit the fax number, Fax to (for the fax cover sheet), the promise date, F.O.B., salesperson, Special Notes and Final Message.

      You can also delete this PO which will remove the PO information and also remove all the detail lines associated with this vendor from the report.

      Once you are done with that information, you are brought into the detail lines that will be created by that PO. You can edit the quantity to order for each of the lines. You can also manually delete individual lines if you want to.

    • Creating Purchase Orders

      When you are finished reviewing your Purchase Orders and ESC out of the list of POs to be generated, you will be asked: CREATE, PRINT AND/OR FAX PURCHASE ORDERS? If you answer Yes to this, the POs will be automatically generated, and printed or faxed to the vendor.

      Once the POs are generated, you are brought to a summary list of Purchase Orders that were created. You can drill into each PO and inquire as to what was on the Purchase Orders.

      Finally, you are brought back to the main list of products that are needed (except the ones that you just created the POs for).

    Request for Quotes

    • Options
      • Include Cover Page on Faxes – if you have the fax system installed and you choose to send your RFQ by fax, this is the option to include or not include the Cover Page.
      • Final Message – This will be a final message that is put on all generated RFQ’s.
      • Output to: Fax – will fax the PO to the vendor (providing there is a fax number associated with the vendor, otherwise it will print); Print Only – will only print the document to the selected Printer; Fax and Print Copy – will send a fax and also print the PO onto the selected printer.
    • Requests for Quotes to be Generated

      This scrolling box lists the products that need to be purchased, including the # of vendors that the RFQ will be sent to.

      The user can drill into a particular product, and change the quantity and also change what vendors the RFQ will be sent to using the F5=Vendors Fkey.

    • Requests for Quotes to be Generated – Vendor Summary

      This scrolling box lists the vendors that will be sent the RFQ, and the total number of lines that each vendor will be sent from the RFQ. You can drill into each vendor and change the fax number, fax to and other information about the RFQ. You will also be able to edit the product quantity that is shown on the RFQ. Auto Generate RFQs

      When you are finished reviewing your Vendors, you are will be asked: CREATE REQUEST FOR QUOTES? If you answer Yes to this questions, the RFQ’s will be created and printed/faxed to the vendor.

      Once the RFQ’s are generated, you are brought to a summary screen of all the RFQs that were generated. Finally, you are brought back to the list of products that are needed.

  4. Menu Change – The Re-Order Point System has been organized into three menu item s. Re-Order Point Reports, Re-Order Point Maintenance and Basic Re-Order Point Lists. This was done to accommodate the growing number of reports.

Sales Analysis

  1. New field for exporting and sorting – Salesperson Code and Name has been added to the Customer Purchase Summary Report. This report is displayed in a scrolling box. When exported to excel extra fields will now include the Salesperson Code and Name. This report can be run for any date range and any range of Customers. The information includes Customer Code, Customer Name, Number of Orders Processed, Number of Line Items, Dollar Value billed, Number of Line Items Billed, Cost and Salesperson.

    This report is located in Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis, More, Customer Purchase Summary.

  2. New options – Customer Sales & Profit Report – When exported to Excel the number of Customer Orders will be included. You can also now choose to show customers that have no sales for the chosen period. This report used to only include customers with Sales.

    This report is located in Sales Analysis, Customer Sales Analysis, Customer Sales & Profit.

Utilities

  1. New Fields – When exporting Sales Journal information – new fields that are part of the UPS Integration are now available. Shipper Name (this would be the first shipper if there are multiple), Total Weight, Total Freight Charges, Date Shipped, Total Packages, Shipper Comments and Worldship Customer Pays Freight.
  2. New Feature – Date Entry. If you enter only a month and day combination the system will assume the current year. This is also available in the web interface with documentConnection. The other Date entry features include:

    T=Today

    Y=Yesterday

    F=First Day of Current Month

    L=Last Day of Current Month

    Entering a positive number = Date + days past the last date entered

    Entering a negative number = Date – days earlier than the last date entered.

    Tpositive number = Date + days past Today’s Date

    Tnegative number = Date + days earlier than Today’s Date

    When prompted for a Beginning and Ending Date, pressing the spacebar and enter will fill in 01-01-90 to 12-14-66 which will give you all available information.

  3. Program Change – Importing Inventory – When converting a file from Excel to a text file, Excel will often change single quotes to double quotes. The import procedure will now check the data for double quotes and replace them with single quotes.

Release Notes – August 2005 – April 2006

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New optional system – Counter Sales. We now have a new system, Counter Sales, that may be a good fit for your company. The counter sales module streamlines the over the counter transactions that may be time consuming using the traditional order entry system. If you are interested in this new feature, please call us for a demonstration and quote.
  2. New Feature – Customer Price Inquiry – You can now view Customer Sales History from within the Customer Price Inquiry by Pressing F4-Sales History.
  3. New Feature – Total Weight will now be displayed in the F6-Totals screen when at the final screen of a Sales Order when the flag to show weights is set to yes. If you have weights in your inventory this information can make shipping decisions easier before the order is picked. If you do not have weights in the system and would like to start updating weights as inventory is received there are flags in the system that will force the personnel doing the receiving to enter weights when Purchase Orders are received.
  4. New User Flag – Show Lot Number Receipt Date in Allocating – If this flag is set to yes, when the available lots are displayed during allocating the date that the lot was received will also be displayed. The comment field will be smaller to accommodate the date field. This flag is located in User Flags – Order Entry, on the second screen.
  5. New Information – The F4-Availability Function Key in the Sales Order Detail Line will now include PPO’s. You can now also drill into the PO’s and PPO’s and see the complete detail of the Purchase Orders and PPO’s by simply clicking on them or pressing enter on them while highlighted.

    If you highlight a PPO that is open, you can press the F3 Key and view the PPO Definition Products and their availability.

  6. New Inquiry Option – When doing a Product Inquiry you now have the option through a User Flag to consolidate Open Documents. The default Product Inquiry offers individual inquiries for Orders, Purchase Orders, etc. This new option if chosen, will consolidate all open documents that affect your availability (including quotes is optional). If you select this option, you will no longer have the individual open document selections.

    Users can customize their inquiry with the following three options:

    • Users can select which documents they would like included.
    • Users can select to Sort the Documents by Date or by Document type and
    • Users can choose to Show a Running Quantity or Cost/Price Information.

    This option can be turned on by going to User Flags – Inventory, Press F7-Inquiries, and then press F-3.Open Documents Inquiry. Users can also change their preferences when using this inquiry while in the inquiry. So if you are viewing all possible documents and then just want to see Sales Orders you can press F3-Options and change it on the fly.

    Because companies often do not want to include Quotes in the Open Document Function Key, when Users select the Open Document Function Key, they will also have an F8-Quotes function key to view them separately.

  7. New Inquiry option – When entering a line item on an Order you have the ability to have specific comments that will appear on different documents. Therefore, the Acknowledgement document can have a different comment from the Pick Ticket for example. You can enter these extra comments by pressing F3-More Comments when in the F6-Comment Function Key. You can now view those Comments through an Order Inquiry by pressing F3-More Comments when viewing the Comments through the function key.
  8. Inquiry Enhancement – Customer Sales History – When selecting a range of Products you can now get a drop down box of parts to select from. You can select products by Product Code, Description, Classification or Alternate Product Code.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – Open PPO Report by Vendor will now be presented in a scrolling box when Screen is selected. This gives you the ability to export it to Excel or a text file.
  2. New Option – The Purchase Order report by User has a new option. You can view all Purchase Orders within a time period or choose to view only Open Purchase Orders. The new question is Show only Open P.O.’s.
  3. New Feature – When a backorder is created for a P.O. any Purchase Order Notes will be transferred to the Backorder. Notes can be added to a Purchase Order through a Purchase Order Inquiry, F3-Show Basic Information, F3-Po Notes.
  4. New Feature – When using the F8-Set PO function key in a Sales Order there is now an internal comment available for the PO Line. When you press F3-Comment, the internal comment is on the bottom of the screen.
  5. New Feature – Vendor Contract Costs – You can now enter Contract Costs in the Vendor Master File. In Enter & Edit Vendors, F5-More, F5–Vendor Contract Costs you can select a Product, Beginning Date, Ending Date, Cost and minimum line charge. If the ending date is left blank, the Costs will not expire. If you enter a minimum line charge and your line does not equal the minimum line charge, the system will default the line total to the minimum line charge. i.e. If you order 100 pieces at .0185 the line total would be 1.85 if the minimum line charge is 2.00 the cost will be automatically changed to .02. In the scrolling box where you can view the Contract Cost, a Minimum Quantity Column is also displayed. This is the Minimum Quantity you need to order based on the entered cost to satisfy the minimum line charge.
  6. New Option – You can now print a Stocking Label in the Processing Purchase Order System. You can print a Stocking Label from the F8-Print Options key or from the Print & Fax Options on the Menu. The Stocking labels can only be printed in this area if you are using the standard system generated lot numbers OR if the PPO has been received and the lot number and date received are known.
  7. New Report/Inquiry – PPO Component Availability Planning – This report is similar to the Bill of Materials that can be printed in the Finished Goods System. After selecting the Product you would like to create you will be prompted for the quantity that you would like to create. You also have the option of including Sub-components. The system will present the Products and or services needed to create the quantity you have selected as well as the available quantity. This is located in Purchase Order System, Processing PO System, Processing PO Reports.
  8. New Option – When you are in Enter & Edit PPO’s on the Final Screen, F8-Print Options, Fax PPO has been enabled. This function key was present but had brackets around it since it was not an available feature. This feature is now available.
  9. New Field for Export – If you Export the Open Purchase Orders Report, the Special Notes field from the Purchase Order Heading will now be exported along with the Purchase Order Information. This report is often used to expedite Purchase Orders and is located in Purchase Order Reports, Open PO Reports, Open Purchase Orders. This report only has summary heading information, if you would like more detail there are a number of other Purchase Order reports available.
  10. Inquiry enhancements – Purchase History – When viewing purchase history for a Vendor the history was presented in Purchase Order sequence. It will now be displayed in Date Sequence with the most recent receipts on top.
  11. New Report Option – Open Purchase Orders by User – There is a new option when running this report. Show Detail? If you answer Yes to this question, the detail lines of the purchase orders will be included. The default for this question is No.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Fields – When exporting the Sales Journal by Customer PO, additional fields will now be included. These fields are Quantity On-Hand, Quantity On Purchase Orders and Quantity On Sales Orders.
  2. New Report Option – Sales Journal by Salesperson with Detail – There is a new option. You can select to show the Price Level that applied to each line item instead of the Accrued Cost. This is a new selection on the Option screen.
  3. New Feature – When viewing Open or Paid Customer Invoices the system the screen will now stay in the same position after drilling into an invoice instead of going back to the top of the scrolling box each time.
  4. New functionality – In Enter & Edit Customers – Use First Ship to On Order has been removed. When this was or will be changed on your system if it was set to Yes the first Ship to Address was designated as the Default Ship to Address. To change the Default Ship to in a Customer Record you can now simply press F7-Ship in Enter & Edit Customers to add or view the Customer’s Ship to Addresses. Highlight the Ship to address you would like to change and press the F5-Set/Un Set Default Ship to Address Function Key.

Accounts Payable System

  1. New options – When in Enter & Edit Vendors you can specify the ISO status of each Vendor. Two new options have been added – Evaluation and Quality Suspended. You can view and select all of the options by Pressing Spacebar and Enter at the Vendor Status field in Enter & Edit Vendors.
  2. New Field – When printing the Invoices Prepared for Payment Report, it will now show a check count so that you know how many checks will be generated when the checks are run.
  3. New Feature – When viewing Open or Paid Vendor Invoices in the system, the screen will now stay in the same position after drilling into an invoice instead of going back to the top of the scrolling box each time.
  4. New Report – List Vendor Payment Terms – You can now view a list of Vendor Payment Terms to the screen or paper. This list is available in Accounts Payable, Accounts Payable File Maintenance , 8.List Vendor Payment Terms. will now be displayed in Date Sequence with the most recent receipts on top.
  5. New Fields – In order to track RoHS Compliance additional fields have been added to the Vendor Master File. When entering a new Vendor, you will be prompted for the following new fields in the additional information screen – RoHS Compliant Y/N, Business Type Distributor/Manufacturer/Other, Last Survey Date. In order to place these fields in a logical area F.O.B., Ship Via, Vendor Salesperson, Cage Number and Vendor Web Site have been moved to the F4-Instruction screen. These new fields can also be viewed in a Vendor Inquiry.

Inventory System

  1. New Option – Price Level List Report – This report can be utilized if you are using the Classification Pricing feature. Previously the Price Level List Report printed all levels of pricing. You now have the ability to select a single level of pricing or all pricing levels. This is located in Inventory Reports, Price Table Lists, Price Level List.
  2. New Report Information – When exporting the Current Location Status Inquiry new fields will now be included in the export – Quantity on Order and Quantity Allocated.
  3. New Feature – The Availability Inquiry is now an option when in the Customer Price Inquiry. The Availability inquiry can be accessed with the F5 Key while in the Customer Price Inquiry. This is the same Availability Inquiry as the F4 Key in the Detail Line of an Order.
  4. New Feature – If you have the need for different stocking label formats based on Inventory Classification you can now have multiple size formats. This is helpful if you are labeling your inventory as it is received and the sizes of your inventory vary greatly. A field called label suffix has been added to Enter & Edit Inventory Classifications. When the system goes to print a stocking label it will add this text to the label name which would call out a format different from the default. There is a $300 flat fee to create a new label in the system.
  5. New Function Key – A Function Key has been added to the Physical Inventory for Tracked Inventory. This new Function Key enables you to change the Manufacturers Lot Number while entering physical counts for tracked inventory.
  6. New Option – Inventory Location Report will now be presented in a scrolling box when presented to the screen. Once the information is presented on the screen the information can be exported to Excel, a Text file or sent as an e-mail.

    The information provided includes Product Code, Description, Location, Lot Number, Quantity On Hand, Unit of Measure, Quantity Allocated, Lot Comment, Unit Cost, Cost Unit of Measure, Tag Number, Manufacturer and Manufacturer’s Lot Number. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists, Inventory Location Report.

  7. New Option – Detail Inventory List will now go to a scrolling box when it is presented to the screen. Once the information is presented on the screen the information can be exported to Excel, a Text file or sent as an e-mail. The information provided includes Product Code, Description’s, Units of Measure, On-Hand Quantity, Allocated Quantity, Committed, On PO, List Price, Default PO Cost, Last Cost, Minimum Purchase Qty, Stocking Objective, Lead Time. Re-Order Point, Classification, Manufacturer and General Ledger Accounts. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists, Detail Inventory List.
  8. New Report – Location Last Action Inquiry – This new inquiry will show the transactions that were performed by specific locations. The information included is Product Code, Date, Type of Transaction, User and last action, ie. Invoice, Po Receipt etc. This is located in Inventory File Maintenance, Location System, Location Reports, Location Last Action Inquiry.
  9. New Report and functionality – Empty Locations – You can now produce a listing of locations that are empty. This will be presented in a scrolling box and therefore can be exported to Excel, exported to a text file, Printed or e-mailed.

    If the user has permissions locations can also be deleted. They can be deleted individually by pressing the F4 on a highlighted location or all locations can be deleted by pressing F5 If you would like to simply remove some locations from the inquiry but do not wish to delete them you can do so with the F3-Remove from List function key.

    When this functionality is added to your system the default for the security flag will be set to No. This security is setup in Security Levels. There you can allow only certain Security levels to have that ability to delete locations that are no longer used.

  10. New Feature – Debit Memo’s have been added to the Re-Order Point Report.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Feature – In Product Sales Analysis there are options to run ranking reports for your products by Net Sales, Gross Profit and Percent Gross Profit. All of these reports will now be presented in a scrolling window when the output is set to Screen. This gives you the ability to export the information to Excel or an text file.
  2. New Feature – Export PO Information – You can now export Purchase Order Information and Vendor Invoice information through the Export File Data Menu. The Export Menu has been consolidated to allow for these new additions. The Po and Vendor Invoice Information can be setup and exported from the Accounts Payable Submenu’s.

Utilities

  1. New Feature – Blast E-mail. This selection will enable you to send an email to a list of recipients e-mail addresses. After creating a document in another program such as Microsoft Word, the document is saved to the server as an .htm file. A text file containing the email addresses is also saved to the server as a .txt file in your User Directory. The easiest way to create the text file is with Microsoft Excel. You can then select Blast E-mail from the Miscellaneous Utilities menu. The htm will then be the body of the e-mail and it will be sent to everyone on the list of e-mail addresses.

    Variable information can also be included in the blast eMail. The Text File needs to have the following format:

    recipient@aol.com [varible1] Bob [variable2] ABC Company [variable2] More specific information, etc.

    The .htm file must have [variable1], [variable2], [variable3], etc, embedded in the text so that the system knows when to insert the variables.

    When you send the eMail, you be sure to specify the entire path to the directory that contains the .htm and the .txt files.

    In order to utilize this feature you must have internet access, be on a recent version of the operating system and have the send mail feature setup on your server. There may be a configuration or upgrade fee, depending on the version of the operating system you are on.

  2. documentConnection – In-Bound Faxing – Document – Optional System

    All of your inbound faxes can now be stored on your server and be completely integrated with The BUSINESS EDGE.

    Browser interface. Can be set up as a Internet or Intranet application.

    Easily relate inbound faxes and scanned documents to a customer, vendor or product with additional document sub categories for each.

    Store a subject and comments for a fax or scanned document.

    The system will automatically assign Customer or Vendor information based on inbound fax id.

    You have the option to automatically assign the inbound fax to a user based on the inbound fax id. For example, all faxes from 630.893.4030 are automatically forwarded to user “Dennis” without stopping at the Fax Administrator screen while faxes coming from 800.893.4030 are set to wait for the Fax Administrator to decide who they should be assigned to.

    User’s can choose to get e-mail notifications when a new fax is received.

    User’s can choose to be receive an Instant Message when a new fax is received.

    Navigate multiple page faxes with easy to use Next and Previous links or “Jump to” any page number using a drop down list box.

    E-mail a fax or a scanned document as a PDF attachment.

    View a fax or a scanned document as a PDF.

    Each user can maintain their own list of faxes and scanned documents, keep as new or mark them as read.

    Integration into Customer Inquiries, Vendor Inquiries, Sales Order Inquiries, Purchase Order Inquiries and more…

    All faxes can be accessed by a click of the mouse from within The BUSINESS EDGE or through the stand alone browser interface.

    Send a copy of a fax to another user on the system.

    Print faxes & scanned documents to any network printer. Print Options; Entire Document (default), This Page, Print Range of Pages

    Print in reverse page sequence to ink jet printers, avoid re-shuffling.

    Fax a fax you’ve received or a scanned document to someone else.

    Rotate faxes that were sent upside down.

    Delete a single page from a multiple page fax.

    Split a multiple page fax into single pages.

    Delete unwanted faxes.

    Create Copies of documents.

    The documentConnection system is password protected. Your browser will remember your login information for you or you can click Log Off to require a login and password the next time you bring it up.

    Call for a no obligation online demonstration of this exciting new system.

Additional Branch Features

  1. New options – The PO Receipts by Vendor report and the PO Receipts by Product report can now be generated for individual branches.
  2. New Inquiry – Transfer Inquiry – This new Inquiry has been added to the Transfer System Menu.
  3. Inquiry Change – The Customer Invoice Inquiry will no longer show the Branch information on the first screen. The Branch in the top right hand corner of the screen will match the Branch the Invoice was generated for. Sent Information has been added to the Invoice Inquiry which will indicate when an invoice was printed or faxed.

Release Notes – May 2005 – July 2005

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry System

  1. New Feature – A Quote cannot be entered into the system for a Customer that is on Credit Hold. Users will not be able to change the Quote into an Order until the Customer is taken off Credit Hold. Customers can be placed on Credit Hold or taken off of Credit hold in Enter & Edit Customers, F4-Notes, F4-Credit Hold
  2. New Feature – When using the new Duplicate Orders feature, you can now select an order by Purchase Order Number. Originally, you could only select a pre-existing order by Order Number. Duplicate Orders is located in the Order & Quote Entry Menu.
  3. New report field – Order Edit Report – a column has been added for percentage of profit. In order to run this report a flag must be turned on. This report includes all detail lines of Sales Orders that were entered into the system since the last time you ran the report. Some companies like to view this report in order to catch entry errors.
  4. New Function Key – A function Key for Manual Adjustments has been added to the detail line when allocating a tracked item. It is sometimes more convenient to adjust products while you are in the screen with the on hand lot detail. You still have the ability to do a manual adjustment when you are at the Detail Line screen as well.
  5. New Warning – If you enter a Sales Order and do not put in a quantity the system will not give you a warning.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Report – Purchase Orders by User – This new report will present a listing of all Purchase Orders entered into The BUSINESS EDGE by a particular User. You can select any range of Users as well as the Date Range you would like to include. All Purchase orders, open and or closed will be presented in Purchase Order Number sequence. The information includes Vendor Code, Vendor Name, Purchase Order Number, Purchase Order Date, Time and Date of entry, and Original Purchase Order Value. A total value will be presented at the end of the report. When this report is presented to the screen, it can be exported to Excel or a text file.
  2. New Features – The existing Debit Memo system did not affect the Inventory, Accounts Payable or the General Ledger in any way. Its purpose was to simply keep track of credit that is owed to you by your vendor until you get an actual credit memo from them.
  3. The Debit Memo System has been expanded so that when you enter items on a Debit Memo you can remove them from stock by allocating them with the F5 Key in Enter & Edit Debit Memos. When you update the Debit Memo with the F12 Key on the Final Screen, your inventory will be reduced, a negative invoice will be posted to your Vendors account for the total cost of the parts you allocated plus any inbound and outbound freight you specified in the heading of the Debit Memo. The general ledger will be updated just as it is with other transactions.
  4. New Report Option – Open Po’s in Vendor Order. There is a new option when printing this report. Show PO Notes. If you answer Yes to this, any notes that have been entered into the PO Notes field will be included on this report. PO Notes can be entered in PO Inquiry, F3-Basic Information, F3-PO Notes. This is a good place to enter expediting information that can be accessed by all users with permissions to see the Inquiry.

Accounts Receivable System

  1. New Fields – Customer Web site. You can now enter your customers’ web site in Enter and Edit Customers. This new field is located in Additional Information. If you are on the internet, clicking on your customers web site address will automatically launch Internet Explorer and bring you to your Customers web site.
  2. New Report – Sales History by Customer P.O. – This new report can be run for a single Customer or any range of Customers. You also have the ability to isolate a particular Purchase Order Number from your Customer. If you leave the Purchase Order field on the report option screen blank, all Sales will be included. This report will provide you with your Customers Usage as of a particular date. Information included is Product Code, Description, Unit Sales and Dollar Sales for the previous Year, Current Year to Date, As of Month to date and individual averages for the previous 12 months. When presented to the screen this information can be exported to Excel or to a text file where you can sort and or manipulate the information.
  3. New Feature – One Time Bill To – In the past you had the ability to change the Bill to Address on an Order or Invoice but the Customer address information had to be saved in the Customer Master Record. You can now have a One Time Bill To on a Sales Order or Invoice. If you enter a One Time Bill To, the information will be saved in the Order and Invoice history but it will not be in the Customer Master File information. You can add a One Time Bill To using the F5-Bill & Ship Address function key on the final screen of the Order and or Invoice.
  4. New field – COD Cashier’s Check/Money Order Only? This is a new field in the Customer Master file. This is used with the integrated UPS Worldship system. If you did not purchase the integrated UPS Worldship, system this information would not apply.
  5. New Shipper Options – New Shippers have been added to the Customer Shipper file to accommodate the integration with the UPS Worldship feature.
  6. New User Flag – Show accumulated open total when in Customer Inquiry. When viewing Customer Open Invoices you can now choose to either see the existing format where the far right column presents the balance open on each individual invoice or you can change your User Flag to show a running balance of what your Customer owes. You can change this User Flag in F1-Help, F4 – User Flags,
  7. User Flags Accounts Receivable.
  8. Selection re-named – Customer Invoice Inquiry, which is available in the Inquiry Menu, is now called Invoice Inquiry.

Accounts Payable System

  1. New Format – When putting in a Credit Memo in Accounts Payable, the way it was presented in the General Ledger Transactions was as a negative Debit and negative Credit. It will now be presented as a Debit and Credit.
  2. New Flag – Take Accounts Payable Discount on Credits. When using Accounts Payable Checks by Date the system would create a negative discount when applying a Credit to the invoices that were being paid. You can now specify in the Vendor Payment Terms if you would like the system to take a negative discount. The default Answer is No. This can be changed in AP File Maintenance, Enter & Edit Vendor Payment Terms.
  3. New Report – List Vendors by Status – This new report will present a listing of your Vendors by Vendor Status. Vendor Status is a way to differentiate Vendors for purposes of ISO Certification. Vendors can be designated as Approved, Probationary, Grandfathered, Removed/Not Active, MRO Only, Evaluation and Quality Suspended. You can edit the Status of a Vendor in Enter & Edit Vendors, F5- Additional Information.

    Information included on this report is Vendor Code, Shipping Name and Address, Remit to Name and Address, Telephone Number, Fax Number, Contact, Status and Payment Terms. This report is located in Accounts Payable, Accounts Payable Reports, Vendor Lists & Labels, and then Vendor List by Status. New User Flag – AP Checks, Take Discount on Credits – If this flag is set to No and your Vendor has prompt payment terms, the system will take credits in full without giving back the discount. This User Flag can be changed by going to F1- Help, F4-User Flags, User Flags Accounts Payable.

Inventory System

  1. New Feature – Alternate Product Code Contract Prices – You now have the ability to assign Contract Prices to Alternate Part Numbers. This is helpful if you have a customer that purchases the same part with different Alternate Part Numbers where you give them different prices based on their Alternate Part Number. If you would like to use the Alternate Part Number contract pricing, the part cannot have a regular contract price related to the Product Code or that will over-ride the Alternate Part Contract Price. When entering the order you need to select the part by the Alternate Part Number that has the contract price. Alternate Part Contract Prices can be entered in Enter & Edit Products, F9- Alternates. If the Alternate Part Number already exists, simply highlight it and press enter to select it, then Press F5-Contract to enter the Contract Price for that Alternate. If it is a new Alternate Part Number, simply enter the Alternate Part Number and then press F5-Contract.
  2. New field – Certificate of analysis required – This new field, which can be set to Yes or No on a Product-by-Product basis has been added to the Inventory Master File. This field is in the F6- Stocking Information Function Key in Enter & Edit Products. This field can be updated manually in Enter and Edit Products or you can import a text file and update this field with the existing import inventory feature. This field can be printed on your Purchase Order or Processing Purchase Order forms; this would require a form change. Form changes are billed at our normal hourly rate.
  3. New field – Inspection Required – This new field that can be set to Yes or No on a Product-by-Product basis has been added to the Inventory Master File. This field is in the F6-Stocking Information Function Key in Enter & Edit Products. This field can be updated manually in Enter and Edit Products or you can import a text file and update this field with the existing import inventory feature. This field can be printed on your Purchase Order or Processing Purchase Order forms; this would require a form change. Form changes are billed at our normal hourly rate.
  4. Some of the fields from the original Stocking Information screen in Enter & Edit Products have been moved to an additional Stocking screen, which is F5 while in the original F6-Stocking information screen. These fields were moved to accommodate additional fields that have been added to the system.
  5. New Function Key – Transfer Inquiry – If you have the Branch System and utilize the Transfer System you can now see activity on a particular product. When in Product Inquiry, Press F4- Basic Information and then F9-Transfers. This inquiry will show Transfers from and to all branches along with the individual quantities being transferred.
  6. New Feature – Import for Product Properties – Many fields were added to The BUSINESS EDGE Inventory Master File so that the Integrated Able Label System would have all of the options as the stand alone system. You can now setup a spreadsheet with the Product Property values and then easily import them into the system. These fields include Product Drawing File Name, Packaging Quantity, Thread, Finish, Country, Label Format, Product Category, Left Dimension Integer, Left Dimension Numerator, Left Dimension Denominator, Right Dimension Integer, Right Dimension Numerator, and Right Dimension Denominator. Being able to import these from a spreadsheet helps in implementing the Integrated Able Label system quickly. All of these fields can be used when printing labels through the Able Label integrated system.
  7. New Report – Tracking Only – Physical Variance Report by Product. This new report will sort by Product. The existing Variance report is sorted by Location. This report can be printed or presented to the screen and put into Excel or a text file.
  8. New Report information – Customer Price List – If you are using List Price Discount Tables, the Customer Price List will now include Quantity Breaks. In the past it only printed the first price level and quantity, if you have multiple quantity breaks based on quantities purchased this report will now include all of that information.

Sales Analysis

  1. New Report Option – Customer Sales and Profit by Product will now be presented in a scrolling box the screen option is chosen. As with any other report or information in a scrolling box you can now Export it to Excel or a Text file. If the Customer(s) included in the report have their own Alternate Part Numbers in the system, those will be included with the data as well.
  2. New Report information – Product Sales by Selected Customer report will now include your Customers Alternate Product Code if this report is run by Alternate Product Code and you have your Customer’s Alternate Part Numbers setup and related to the customer in Enter & Edit Products. This report is located in Sales Analysis, Product Sales Analysis, and Product Sales by Selected Customer.
  3. New Report information – Customer Sales 12 Month Report – When exporting this report to Excel or a Text file it will now include the Primary Billing information in the data.

Utilities

  1. New Security Option – View Vendor Financials – If this option is answered Yes then the User can view the Vendor Financial Fkey in Vendor Inquiry. The Vendor Financial Inquiry shows monthly charges, payments and credits.
  2. New Security Option – View Customer Financials – If this option is answered Yes then the User can view the Customer Financial Fkey in Customer Inquiry. The Customer Financial Inquiry shows monthly charges, payments and credits.
  3. Format Change – The Image Center will now store all inbound faxes as PDF’s instead of TIFF’s.
  4. New Feature – Image Center Inbound Faxing system now offers a cc line when faxing an inbound fax back out of the system.
  5. New User Flags – New flags have been added for the Image Center Inbound fax system. Instant Message Name and Notify about new Faxes – choices Never, E-Mail, Instant Message or E-Mail and Instant Message. Each User can set these flag to their preference. These flags can be accessed from the Main Menu, Press F1-Help, F4- User Flags, and then select nine. User Flags General.

New Branch Features

Branch option has been added to the Allocated Orders List

Branch Option added to Sales Journal – Customer Order

Order Inquiry will now show the fax number.


Release Notes – January 2005 – April 2005

» Download Release Notes «

Order & Quote Entry

  1. New Customer Flag – Print Prices on Packing List – Each Customer can be individually setup to Print Prices on their Packing List or Not. This new flag is located in Enter and Edit Customers, F5 – Additional Information. The default for this new flag will be No when your system is upgraded.

    New Option – When printing Packing Lists there are now three ways to answer the question, Show Prices? Use Customer Default – (this would use the answer that is setup in the Customer Master file which is a new field described in number 1 above), Yes or No. If you wish to start utilizing this new feature of printing prices based on this new question and have not printed your forms like this in the past a form change may be required. Form changes will be billed at our normal hourly rate.

    You can setup a default answer to this question in Enter and Edit Customer Defaults. Then when you enter a new Customer, the default will be set for you automatically and you can simply change it when needed.

    If you would like your forms changed to use this new flag, changes will be billed at our normal hourly rate.

  2. The system will now record the user name, date and time that a Picking Ticket and Packing List are printed.
  3. New Feature – Packing List Printed – Date Time and User information is now being saved in the Order records. A new column will now be included presenting this information on the Shipping Schedule by Date when presented to the screen to be exported to Excel.
  4. New Features – Customer Price Inquiry will now keep the customer you selected when pressing Esc to select a new product. The Customer Price Inquiry is the last selection in the Inquiry Menu and is very useful when a customer calls to find out what “their” price is on a specific product. You can now also use the + and – keys to automatically go to the next or previous item after selecting the first Product.
  5. New Feature for tracked inventory – F6- Allocate All – When Allocating a Sales Order there is a new function key F6-All. This will allocate all items on an Order automatically when there is only one Lot/Location quantity on hand when allocating. If there is more than one lot/location available the system will bring you to the line item so you can manually select the lot/location you are shipping from.
  6. New Feature – Cardex Inquiry while in a Sales Order Detail Line. When you are in the detail line of a Sales Order the current function of the F3 Key is Sales History. This presents all of the previous sales for the Customer and Product you have selected. Users can now change the functionality of the F3 key to display the Cardex information (F11 in Product Inquiry) by changing their User Flag. You can change this flag by pressing F1-Help, F4-User Flags, User Flags – Order Entry, Order Detail Line F3 Inquiry. Press spacebar to select from a drop down box.
  7. New Feature – Order Inquiry – When doing an Order Inquiry through the Inquiry menu, you can now type in a Customers P.O. Number to locate their order if you do not know your Sales Order Number. In the Order Inquiry, simply press enter past the Order Number Prompt or click on the Customer P.O. Prompt and type in your customer’s P.O. Number. If there is more than one Sales Orderwith the same P.O. Number a drop down box will display all of the Sales Orders with the P.O. Number you entered, and you can click on the one you would like or highlight it and press enter.
  8. New Feature – Insert Line – You now have the ability to insert a line in the middle of an Order, Quote or RMA. When you are on the Detail Line screen in Enter & Edit Orders, the F9-Ins key will insert a new line above the line you have highlighted. This is handy if you are trying to replicate a PO from a customer and accidentally missed a line or would like to group items. All lines will be renumbered based on the lines that you have inserted.
  9. New Feature – Duplicate Order.- This new feature enables you to select a Sales Order, Quote or RMA that was previously entered in the system and duplicate it. The order you are duplicating can be open or closed. When you confirm that you would like to duplicate the Order the system will generate a new order for the same customer with the next numerical Order number. The Order Date will be the date you duplicated the order. This new option is located in Order & Quote Entry.
  10. New Report – Inventory Requirements Report – This new report can be generated for any range of products, as with most other inventory related reports you can sequence this report by Product Code, Classification, Description or Alternate Part Number. You can then select up to 4 Dates, these might be spread a week a part for instance. This report will provide a running balance on each part for each period you selected based on Sales Order due to ship out and Purchase Orders and Processing Purchases orders that are due in. This new report is located in Order Reports, Order Requirements Reports, Inventory Requirements Report.
  11. New User Flag – Use Reverse Sequence During Order Entry – The default in the system is to add new lines to the bottom of the Sales Order Detail Lines. If you would like the last line entered to be on the top of the Enter & Edit screen instead of the bottom you can change this flag to Yes. This new User flag is located in User Flags – Order Entry.
  12. New Feature – Salesperson Booking report. When viewing this report to the screen the system will now include the detail when Include Detail Line is answered Yes. In the past you could only view the detail when this report was printed.

Purchase Order System

  1. New Feature – There is now an option to print a detailed PO In Process Register before updating Purchase Order receipts. The default report in the system provides a summary by Vendor presenting the Purchase Order(s) received and the total value. This new feature will list each Purchase Order along with the Products received. If you would like to change your system to view the new detailed In-Process report, you can do so by changing a flag. This new flag is located in Utilities, System Administrator, System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity & System Flags, Purchase Order Flags. The flag is located on the second screen and is Print Detail on PO Receipts in Process Register, simply change this flag to Yes.
  2. New Report – Purchase Order Receipts summarized by Vendor. Thisnew report can be produced for any date range and any range of Vendors. The information includes Vendor Code, Vendor Name, Quantity Received, Value Received and Weight. When this report is produced to the screen it can be exported to Excel or a Text file.
  3. New Feature – Print Stocking Labels or Customer Package Labels during the receiving process. If you are tracking lots and or locations you have the ability to print either Stocking Labels or Customer Package Labels as you receive each line item on a Purchase Order. There are two new function keys when you are at New Line on the tracking screen.
  4. New Fields – F.O.B and Ship Via fields have been added to the Vendor Master file. These are located under F5-Additional Information. If you fill in these fields in the Vendor Master file they will come up as the defaults when a new Purchase Order is entered. You can then over-ride them on the Purchase Order as needed. Defaults for the Vendors can also be setup in Enter & Edit Vendor defaults in Accounts Payable Maintenance for new Vendors.
  5. New Feature – Cardex and Branch Usage options. When you are in the detail line of a Purchase Order the current function of the F3 Key is Purchase History. This presents all of the previous purchases for the Product you have selected. Users can now change to functionality of the F3 key to display the Cardex information (F11 in Product Inquiry) or Monthly Usage information (F5,F5 in Product Inquiry) by changing their User Flag. You can change this flag by pressing F1-Help, F4-User Flags, User Flags – Purchase Orders, PO Detail Line F3 Inquiry. Press spacebar to select from a drop down box.
  6. New Feature – Open Purchase Order report – You now have the ability to enter a Date Range for either Current Promised Date, PO Date or Date Requested. This enables you to print a more concise report based on the information you are looking for. This is very helpful when you want to expedite Purchase Orders that may be late or due in the near future. This report can also be exported to Excel or a Text file which allows further sorting. This report is located in Purchase Order Reports, Open PO Reports, Open Po Report.
  7. New Feature – Open PO’s in Vendor Order – a date range for Current Promised Date has been added to this report. As always you can select a single vendor or a range of vendors. This report can also be produced in summary or detail form. Adding the Date Range option makes using this report for expediting more effective.
  8. New Feature – Print P.O. Receipt Stocking Labels – This new option will print Stocking labels for each line item received on a particular Purchase Order. This is located in Order & Quote Entry, Print & Fax Options, Print Labels, Print P.O. Receipt Stocking Labels. These labels can only be printed after a Purchase Order has been received.
  9. New Feature – When in Enter and Edit PO Detail Line by default the Default PO Cost is displayed as the Raw Cost. If for some reason you change that value and then want to change it back to the Default PO Cost, you can simply press Spacebar and Enter at the Raw Cost field and it will change back to what ever the Default PO Cost is in the Inventory Master File.
  10. New Feature – Insert Line – You now have the ability to insert a line in the middle of a Purchase Order. When you are at the Detail Lines of a Purchase Order the F9-Ins key will insert a new line above the line you have highlighted. All lines will be re-numbered based on the line(s) that you have inserted.
  11. New User Flag – Skip Location in Po Receipts – If this flag is set to No, the cursor will stop at the Location field when receiving a Purchase Order. If you have default locations and do not want to have the cursor stop at the location prompt simply answer Yes. This new User flag is located in User Flags – Purchase Orders.
  12. New User Flag – Use Reverse Sequence During PO Entry – The default in the system is to add new lines to the bottom of the PO Detail Lines. If you would like the last line entered to be on the top of the Enter & Edit screen instead of the bottom you can change this flag to Yes. This new User flag is located in User Flags – Purchase Orders.
  13. New Report Location – Merchandise Receiving Report has been added to the P.O. Receipt Routines menu. Some companies use this report when they are manually checking in a Purchase Order.

Processing Purchase Orders

  1. New Fields – F.O.B and Ship Via fields have been added to the Vendor Master file. If you fill in these fields in the Vendor Master file they will come up as the defaults when a new Processing Purchase Order is entered. You can then overwrite them on the Purchase Order if needed. Defaults for the Vendor can also be setup in Enter & Edit Vendor defaults in Accounts Payable Maintenance for new Vendors.
  2. New Feature – The Open PPO’s by Product Report will now be presented in a scrolling box when the screen option is selected. Since it is in a scrolling box this information can now be exported to Excel, a text file or sent as an email attachment. Any information throughout the system that is presented in a scrolling box can be exported to Excel, exported to a text file or e-mailed.
  3. New Report – Send Processing PO’s by Vendor – This new report will provide a listing of all Processing Purchase Orders sent to an individual Vendor on a specific date. This report can be used as a summary to send your vendor when you are shipping multiple jobs to them. Depending how you answer the questions Show only Non-Stock Detail Lines and Show prices for Non-Stock Detail Lines the report will print different information.

    Show only Non-Stocked Detail Lines – If you answer Yes to this question the Item(s) being sent to the processor and all Labor items will be include. If you answer No the Product you are Creating will be included as well.

    Show Prices for Non-Stock Detail Lines – If you answer Yes to this, each line item will show the cost of the Labor item i.e. Plating and a Total will print on the bottom of the report for all of the services you are purchasing.

Accounts Receivable

  1. New Feature – Automatic Discounts during Cash Receipts. If you offer payment terms that include discounts the system will automatically apply the discounts that are due when you pay your customers invoices in the system.The discount will only be given automatically if the invoice being paid is paid within the discount period. If you would like to allow a discount past the discount date, the F10 key will give the discount regardless of the date the invoice is being paid. There is also a system flag that will designate whether or not discounts are allowed on Freight and Tax. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags –Discount Gross Amount in Cash Receipts. The default for this flag is No.
  2. New Feature – You can now store your customers Credit Card information in their Customer Master Record. They system will store an unlimited number of credit cards for one customer. This information can be entered in Enter & Edit Customers, F5- Additional Information, F7- More, F6-Credit Cards. Additional features will follow relating to Customer Credit Cards.
  3. New Feature – There is an optional feature that can be used along with the credit card information that can now be stored in the Customer Master File. If theCredit Card System Flag is set to Yes and your Customers Payment Terms Code is CC a screen will prompt the User for Credit Card information. If your customer already has credit cards on file, a drop down list will be displayed showing the last four digits of all cards on file, the user can then select one. You also have the ability to enter a new credit card if the card being used is not on the list.When exiting an order the credit card that has been selected will be shown along with a prompt for verification.
  4. New Feature – When faxing all invoices in process the system will now give you the option to print all non-faxed invoices in process after the faxed invoices are sent to faxing. A screen will come up automatically, if you would like to print them you can verify your printer and press Esc. If you do not want to print at that point you can simply press Tab and Enter to exit the screen.
  5. New Feature – Print Unsent Invoices – This new option will ask for a date range and then the system will print any invoices that have not been either printed or faxed within that date range. This is very handy if you are faxing your invoices in process. After all of the invoices have either faxed successfully or failed this new option will automatically print all invoices that have not been printed or have not been successfully faxed. This new option is located in Accounts Receivable Invoice Routines, Print and Fax Options.
  6. New Feature – Customer Invoice Inquiry – This inquiry will now show both printed and faxed information. In the past, only the printed information was available in this inquiry. The User, Date and Time the invoice was printed or faxed will be displayed on the first screen of the inquiry.
  7. New Feature – Customer Invoice Inquiry – When doing a CustomerInvoice Inquiry through the Inquiry menu, you can now type in a Customers P.O.Number to locate your customers Invoice. In the Customer Invoice Inquiry, simply press enter past the Invoice Number Prompt or click on the Customer P.O. Prompt and type in your customer’s P.O. Number. If there is more than oneCustomer Invoice with the same P.O. Number a drop down box will display all of the Customer Invoices with the P.O. Number you selected, you can click on the one you would like or highlight it and press enter to select it.
  8. New Feature – Canadian PST Sales Tax – You can now over-ride the default for your Customer’s PST Taxable flag on an individual Invoice. You can do this using the F8-Tax function key on the heading of an Order and or Invoice.
  9. New Feature – If you are paying sales tax based on your sales, the SalesTax Sales Journal can now break down the sales tax charged in more detail.

    Tax authorities in The BUSINESS EDGE can now have multiple levels of tax broken down In Enter & Edit Tax Authorities. After entering the Tax AuthorityName and Total Percentage of Sales Tax, you can press F4- Detail and enter a detailed breakdown of the total percentage. The Detail entered in F4 must equal the total tax percentage for that particular Tax Authority. An example would be if you needed to break out State and City tax when reporting your tax.

  10. New Feature – Invoices in Process Register – Print Invoice Detail? This new question has been added to the Invoices. If you answer Yes, each line item will be listed on the Invoices in Process Register including Sale Price, Cost and Profit. This is a good way to check for errors before updating your daily invoices.
  11. New Report Fields – Additional Fields have been added to the Paid Commissions report so that it includes the same information as the Open Commission Report. An option has also been added to begin new salespeople on a new page.
  12. New Inquiry – Customer Product History Inquiry – You can select a Customer, Contract Price Date and Sales History Date Range. This new inquiry will present all Products that are setup with Alternate Part Numbers for a SpecificCustomer. The Customers Alternate Part Number must have the Customer Code Assigned to it for it to appear in this Inquiry.

    When this report is exported to Excel or a Text file it will include Your Customers Alternate Part Number, Alternate Description, Product Code, Product Description, List Price, their Contract Price, Total Quantity, Total Sales and TotalCost for the period you selected. This new report is located in Accounts Receivable Reports, Customer Activity Reports, Customer Product HistoryInquiry.

Accounts Payable

  1. New feature – Void Accounts Payable Check in current period. When voiding a check through the existing selection Void A/P Checks, the general ledger transaction of crediting cash and debiting accounts payable is reversed. The accounts payable invoice is opened up in the original period it was generated. This new feature enables you to void a check in another period. You can select the date you would like the transaction to post as well as the general ledger account you would like it to post to. If you are going to re-process the payment, you will then re-enter an invoice and generate a new check.
  2. You can now have a different Payee Name for the Remit to Address of a Vendor. When entering a new Remit to Address in Enter & Edit Vendors, the Vendor Name will be the default, you can simply arrow up and change the Remit to Name. The Remit to Name and Address prints on the Accounts Payable Check.

Inventory

  1. New report – Inventory Requirements Report – This new report can be generated for any sequence of Products by Product Code, Classification, Description or Alternate Product Code. The system will prompt you for up to five dates, these dates might be weekly. This report will then age your available inventory showing what is available for each date you have selected based on the transactions in the system. These transactions include On hand inventory, Open Sales Orders based on the Date requested or the Scheduled Date(s), PPO’s to be sent out, P.O.’s due in, and PPO’s due.

    This new report is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Order Reports, Order Requirement Reports, and Inventory Requirements Report.

  2. New Feature – When you are in a Product Inquiry and you do a partial lookup or press spacebar and enter to see all products in a scrolling box, the system will now include the Default P.O. Cost field when this information is exported to Excel.
  3. New Feature – When entering a Sales Order Users now have the ability to enter a Cost on Non-Stock items regardless of their security level. If their security level is setup so that they cannot see Costs they will not be able to see or change costs in other areas of the system.
  4. New Information – Sent to Processor Usage has been added to the Product Inquiry Screen. You can view this usage in the F5-Usage function key from the general inquiry screen or if you are using the Expert Inquiry with Stocking information it is presented on the right hand side of the screen.
  5. New Feature – Monthly Usage in Product Inquiry. When viewing Usage in a Product Inquiry the F5- Usage function key presents summary usage figures. You can now view a monthly breakdown by pressing F5 – Monthly Usage from the Usage screen. This will present usage by month starting with the most recent month on top. This information will be broken down by branch location if you have the optional branch feature. Since this information is presented in a scrolling window, it can also be exported to Excel or a text file.
  6. New Report – Purchasing Action Report – This new report will include products that are below minimum stocking levels. If you have the optional branch system all branches will be summed. The information provided includes Minimum Quantity to Buy, Optimum Quantity, The last four Sales Orders, Last four P.O.’s, last four incoming PPO’s, quantities that will be coming in or out on Sales Orders, Purchase Orders, and Processing Purchase Orders with stock levels shown after the pending event occurs. Also listed are monthly sales for the past 8 months.

    This report can be run to screen or paper. You have the ability to run it to the screen and deselect products that are included using the F4 key. After viewing the information on the screen you can the Print it by pressing F3 or export it to excel or a text file.

  7. New Report – Customer Usage Report – This new report enables you to select a range of Dates, Customers and Products. It will then produce a report showing each Product that the selected Customers purchased in the date range selected. It will include the total quantity purchased, total Sales Dollars by Item and total Cost by item. If presented to the screen this information is presented in a scrolling box and therefore can be exported to Excel or a Text file.

    This report is located in Inventory System, Inventory Reports, Usage Reports, Customer Usage Report.

  8. New Feature – List Inventory by Locations – When presented to the screen this report will now be presented in a scrolling box so that you can export it to Excel or a Text file. When exported to Excel or a text file it will also include the default Alternate Part Number. This report is located in Inventory Reports, Inventory Lists, List Inventory by Location.
  9. New Report – Customer Price List – This report can be printed to paper or displayed to the screen. After selecting a Customer and a range of Products a listing will provide each Product along with that Customers Price.
  10. New option – Physical Inventory system – Tracked Inventory – If you are tracking your inventory by lot and do not keep track of locations you can now use the Physical Inventory system based on a range of inventory instead of location. In order to utilize this function a system flag must be changed. This flag Physical Inventory Sort By can be changed in Enter & Edit System Flags 2.

General Ledger System

  1. New Posting Date Range – A new Posting Date Range has been added for Sales Orders. This new date range prevents users from changing Sales Orders entered in previous periods. If you are not concerned with changing old orders you can simply leave those particular range of dates open with the Earliest Date being at least as old as your oldest open order.

    If you do want the system to prevent users from changing orders from previous periods they will be prompted to open a revision in order to edit an existing order from a previous period. The system will then keep track of when the revision was created and by what user. The revision will have the current order date, not the order date of the previous order.

  2. New Control Account – A/R Discount – This new control Account is used when using the new automatic discounting through Cash Receipts. If you allow your customers to take prompt payment discounts and would like to use the function keys in Enter & Edit Deposit to automatically calculate their discounts this field must be filled in. This would be the General Ledger Account where those discounts will be recorded. You can locate this in General Ledger File Maintenance, Control Accounts – Income Statement, on the second page.

Sales Analysis System

  1. New Feature – The Customer Sales and Profit Report will now be presented in a scrolling box when the screen option is selected. This information can now be exported to Excel, a text file or e-mailed. All information throughout the system that is presented in a scrolling box can be exported to Excel, exported to a text file or sent as an e-mail attachment.
  2. New Report – Customer Purchase Summary – This new report will enable you to select a range of Customers and a Date Range. It will then produce a report that includes each Customer selected with activity in that Date range you selected. The total number of Sales Orders, Total Quantity of Pieces Ordered, Total Sales Dollars and total Cost. This report can be utilized when analyzing your customers order activity. This report is available in all of the output options.
  3. New Report question – Salesperson Sales by Customer – There is a new question when this report is run. Show Customers with No Sales. If you would like to include all customers with or without sales answer Yes to this question. If you answer no, only customer with activity will be included.
  4. New Feature – Customer Detailed Sales by Product. This report is now presented in a scrolling box when the screen selection is chosen. Any report in the system that is presented in a scrolling box can be exported to Excel or a text file.

Utilities

  1. New Feature – There are now new output options for reports. All reports have the ability to be viewed as an Adobe PDF file, sent as an Adobe PDF email attachment, or viewed as a flat text file in notepad. This new feature provides many new tools to the end user. You can also e-mail information contained in a scrolling box, this includes reports and inquiries. These features require The BUSINESS EDGE to be running on a current version of LINUX . It also requires special setup in the operating system. We charge a flat fee of $500 to upgrade your operating system from an older version of LINUX and then there is a flat fee of $250 to setup the operating functions that will enable you to use these new features.
  2. New Flag – Cups Printing enabled? Some systems may need this option to be set to yes in order to cancel system print jobs through the Utilities Menu. This will only address system printers. Printers that are setup only in windows need to be controlled through the control panel in windows.

    This new flag is located in System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity and System Flags, General Flags.

  3. Enhanced feature – When you use the find command and export the results to Excel from the scrolling box the heading will now be sent out to the Excel spreadsheet. This feature requires The BUSINESS EDGE to be running on a current version of LINUX . It also requires special setup in the operating system. We charge a flat fee of $250 for this setup so that you can use these new features.
  4. New Feature – E-mail scrolling box information. Information that is presented in a scrolling box can now be emailed. When there is information in a scrolling box holding Control and Pressing E will by default present a screen where you can type in email address that you would like to send the information. In order to use this feature your server must be on the internet and the LINUX sendmail feature must be configured on your server.
  5. New Feature – Allow Output to PDF’s and email. If this new flag is set to yes and your systems LINUX operating system is configured with the current apache utilities you can now send reports to PDF files or email them. When this flag is set to yes, instead of only having options for Paper or Screen when printing reports you will see more choices in the drop down box including Adobe PDF, e-mail and text file. You must be running a LINUX operating system and depending on the version of the LINUX operating system you may require an operating system upgrade to support these new features. If you call our Customer service department we can determine the capabilities of your server. Using the email feature also requires that your server be on the internet.

    This new flag is located in System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity and System Flags, General Flags.

  6. New Feature – After using the Find Command in a scrolling box you now have the ability to export the find results to Excel along with the column headings. In the past extra columns were being sent to excel, those will no longer appear.
  7. New Feature – If your LINUX operating system is on the internet and is configured to use the LINUX attachmail option you can now e-mail print screens.
  8. New Flag – Force Upper Case Input – This is a system flag that when set to Yes it will force all data entry to be entered in Upper Case. This is helpful if you find that you have inconsistent data entry. This forces uniform entry by all employees. This new flag is located in System Setup, Setup Miscellaneous, Entity and System Flags, General Flags.

Bin Stocking

  1. New Feature – You can now enter Customer Bin information in Enter and Edit Customers. This information can be entered in Enter & Edit Customers, F5- Additional Information, F7- More, F5- Customer Bins. The fields that are stored in the system are Bin Location, Bin Minimum Quantity, Bin Maximum Quantity and Customer Package Quantity.
  2. New Feature – Import Customer Bin Information. If you are using the Bin Stocking features in The BUSINESS EDGE and have your customers bin information in a spreadsheet you can now import it into the system. This is available in Utilities, Import File Data. The fields that can be imported are by Customer and Product and include Bin Location, Bin Minimum Quantity, Bin Maximum Quantity and Customer Package Quantity.
  3. New Feature – Print Bin labels for a Range of Customer Part Numbers – This new selection is located in Order & Quote Entry System, Print & Fax Options, Print Labels, Print Bin Labels, Print Range of Customer Bin Labels. This enables you to print bin labels based on Products that you have setup specifically setup Alternate Part Numbers for your Customer.
  4. New Feature – Print Bin Labels or Create Inventory file for Palm Pilot. If you have entered or imported all of by Customers Bin information you can print Bin Labels from this selection or create an excel file that can be used in the Parts Manager for The BUSINESS EDGE Palm Pilot program.

    After selecting you Customer, all of the parts entered for their bins will be presented in a scrolling box. You can the use the F3 Key to remove any parts you would like to take out. You will only be removing them from this temporary listing, they will not be removed from the system. You can the Use the F4 Invn to Palm Key to Create an excel file that can be used to import into the Palm Pilot or use F5 Bin Labels to print Bin Labels for those parts in the scrolling box. If you export the information to Excel it will reside in your default Excel directory. Your default Excel directory is typically your user directory. It is setup in F1-Help, F4- User Flags – User Flags General.

    This selection is located in Accounts Receivable, Customer Bin Inventory.

Branch Related Features

  1. New Feature – Manual Adjustments will now prompt users for the branch they are making an adjustment for. The default is the branch that the user currently has setup as their default branch. Adding this control enables users to view the cardex transactions for a part for all branches or for a single branch. When running the cardex the system has a new question, Include all Branches on Report?
  2. New Feature – When Allocating Orders, the only on hand inventory that will be displayed are those parts that are in the Branch that the order is being allocated for. If for some reason inventory needs to be allocated from a different branch, the inventory must be moved to a location in the correct branch.
  3. New Controls – You can no longer change the branch on an allocated order. The order must be unallocated first. They the order can be re-allocated with stock from the correct branch.

    When you change a customer on an order, the branch will automatically change to the customer’s branch. When the order is allocated and the customer is changed to one that has a different branch than the original customer, a warning will be displayed telling the user that the branch cannot be changed. The system will still allow the customer to be changed.

  4. New Controls – Tighter controls have been added to receiving routines. You can no longer select locations that are not in your branch. You can only receive one Branch’s Purchase Orders for any given vendor at a time.
  5. New Feature – In the past Cost Centers could only be setup in individual Customers Records. You can now assign a Cost Center to a Branch. If there is a Cost Center setup in the Branch file, it will override any Cost Center that is setup in a Customer record.
  6. New User Flag – By default when you are looking up a product the system shows the Total Available Quantity on the far right hand column. Users can now set a User Flag if they would prefer the Available quantity to represent only what the Available Quantity is in their particular branch. This flag can be changed in User Flags – Inquiries – F7 Inquiries, Show Branch Avail during Selection.
  7. New Flag – Create Transfer Back Orders? By default when a Transfer is received and products that were not received are put on a backorder with the next numerical suffix i.e. 1000-01. If you do not want Transfers to create backorders this new flag can be set to No. This flag is located in Entity & System Flags, Inventory Flags.
  8. New Report – Order Fill Report by Transfer Product – This new report can be produced for any branch location. It will present Sales Orders that can be filled based on Inventory that was received in on a Transfer from another Branch. Similar to the Order Fill Reports for Po’s and PPO’s you can select the transfer receipt date(s) you would like, a range of Transfer Numbers and the latest Sales Order Requested Date you would like to see.

    This report is located in Order Reports, Scheduling & Expediting Reports, Order Fill Report by Transfer-Product.

  9. Branch options have been added to many reports. The Branch option allows the User to print the report for a single branch or all branches combined.

New Reports

  1. Accounts Receivable Reports
    • Sales Journal by Date
    • Sales Tax Sales Journal
    • Invoices in Process by Date
  2. Purchase Order Reports
    • Receipts Journal by Vendor
    • Receipts Journal by Class/Family
    • Receipts Journal Summary by Vendor
    • Open PO Report
  3. Inventory Reports
    • Inventory Cost Status Report
    • Inventory Cost Status Report – Summary by Class
    • Inventory Requirements Report
    • Product Usage Inquiry